MAGNET Field Help Manual

MAGNET Field Help Manual
MAGNET Field Help
Version: 3.0
Part Number 1000411-01
Revision E
© Copyright Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc
March, 2015
All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Topcon. All rights reserved. The information contained herein may
not be used, accessed, copied, stored, displayed, sold, modified, published, or distributed, or otherwise reproduced
without the expressed written consent from Topcon.
Software End User License Agreement
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ CAREFULLY. The software product provided to you by Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. ("TPS") along with its associated manuals and documentation (collectively, the “Software”) is owned by TPS and your use is subject to the terms and conditions of this Software License EndUser Agreement (“Agreement”) set forth below. If you are entering into this agreement on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you represent that you have the authority to bind such entity to these terms and conditions, in which case the terms "you" or "your" shall refer to such entity. If you do not have such authority,
or if you do not agree with these terms and conditions, you may not use the service. TPS also reserves the
right to immediately terminate this agreement and suspend, cancel or delay the service for failure to comply
with the terms provided herein.
By clicking the “ACCEPT” button below, or by installing or using the Software, you agree to be bound by
the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In addition, by clicking the “ACCEPT” button below, you agree
to be bound by the terms and conditions of the Terms of Use of the Web site www.magnet-enterprise.com
(the “TPS Site”). If you do not agree, exit out of the TPS Site and you will not be authorized to use the Software or otherwise utilize the documentation accompanying the Software.
Safety. IMPROPER USE OF A TOPCON PRODUCT CAN LEAD TO INJURY TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY AND/OR MALFUNCTION OF THE PRODUCT. THE PRODUCT SHOULD ONLY BE
REPAIRED BY AUTHORIZED TPS WARRANTY SERVICE CENTERS. USERS SHOULD
REVIEW AND HEED THE SAFETY WARNINGS IN THE MANUAL ACCOMPANYING THE
PRODUCT.
Ownership of the Software. The Software and the accompanying documentation are owned by TPS and its
respective licensors and are protected by United States and international copyright laws and other intellectual
property laws.
Professional Use. The Software is designed to be used by a professional. The user is required to be a professional surveyor or have a good knowledge of surveying and be familiar with the safe use of such products,
in order to understand the user instructions before operating the Software.
Restrictions on Use and Transfer. You may not modify, adapt, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software or create derivative works from the Software, any component thereof or any related
documentation, nor may you remove, modify or hide or otherwise make unreadable or non-viewable any
notice, legend, advice, watermark trademark, service mark, or other designation contained on the Software,
component thereof, documentation, or output therefrom. You may not distribute registered copies of the Software to third parties, including, without limitation rent, lease, or lend the Software to third parties. You agree
2
to not use, permit the use, or use the Software in violation of any U.S. Federal, state, or local laws or regulations
or any foreign law or regulation, including laws regarding intellectual property rights in or laws or regulations
regarding the trading or exchange of securities or concerning the Software. You further agree to use the Software
solely for its intended purpose. The Software and all related information you may come to learn related to the Software and TPS’ operations in connection therewith is confidential in nature. You agree to take all reasonably
necessary precautions to protect TPS’ confidential information and exercise at least the same degree of care in
safeguarding the confidential information as you would with your own most valuable confidential information.
Support Services. TPS may provide you with support services related to the Software ("Support Services"). Any
supplemental software code provided to you as part of the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software and subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Grant of License to Software. If you have purchased or otherwise received Software from TPS, TPS grants you
the right to install and use copies of the Software on your computer running a validly licensed copy of the operating system for which the Software was designed (e.g., Windows CE 6.0, Windows Mobile, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7). This license is coterminous with the Term set forth in the Master Subscription
Agreement for the Magnet Terms of Use and is a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable (except as expressly
set forth herein) license to use such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single
Device. A “Device” means a personal computer or the product upon which the Software is intended (pursuant to
its applicable documentation) to be installed and used. You may permanently transfer rights under this Agreement
only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this Agreement. If the
Software is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the Software. The license is effective
until terminated. You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and related documentation. Without prejudice to any other rights of TPS, TPS may terminate your license if you fail to comply
with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In such event, you must destroy all copies of the Software in
your possession.
Maintenance of the Software. TPS agrees to provide Maintenance (as defined herein) to you for the first year
from the date you enter into this Agreement, at no additional charge, pursuant to the terms and conditions set forth
herein. Following the first year, and for successive years thereafter (“each year defined as a Term(s)”), in order to
receive continued Maintenance, you must pay the Maintenance Fee at the start of each Term as set forth by TPS.
Failure to renew Maintenance for a new Term may result in you having to enter into a new Agreement in order to
receive Maintenance.
Maintenance is defined as any improvements or modifications to the Software that TPS makes generally available. Any such improvements or modifications shall become part of the Software for all purposes of this Agreement. You acknowledge and agree that the Maintenance to be provided by TPS hereunder is limited to the most
3
current version of the Software and the immediately preceding version. Activation of your Software is
required in order to receive the most currently available Maintenance features.
Disclaimers. EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES IN A WARRANTY CARD ACCOMPANYING
THE SOFTWARE (AND ALL MAINTENANCE), THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” TPS
MAKES NO PROMISES, REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, REGARDING OR RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL BE ERROR-FREE OR AVAILABLE FOR USE AT
ALL TIMES) OR CONTENT THEREIN OR TO ANY OTHER MATERIAL FURNISHED OR
PROVIDED TO YOU PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE, AND TPS
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO SAID
MATERIALS OR THE USE THEREOF. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWABLE BY LAW,
THE UNIFORM COMMERCIAL CODE OR OTHER UNIFORM LAWS SHALL NOT APPLY TO
THIS AGREEMENT.
Trademarks. The TPS name, the TPS logo, and the product names associated with the Service are trademarks
of TPS and no right or license is granted to use them. Product and company names mentioned herein may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
Microsoft® Bing™ maps is used in Magnet™. Microsoft® Terms of Use for Bing™ maps can be found at:
http://www.microsoft.com/maps/assets/docs/terms.aspx#11. © 2011 Microsoft Corporation. All rights
reserved.
RealDWG ™ and Autodesk® RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc are used in Magnet™. Copyright © 1998-2011
Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. Information can be found at www.autodesk.com/autodeskrealdwg
Limitation of Liability. TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL
OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE OR ITS
DOCUMENTATION. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWABLE BY LAW, IN NO EVENT
SHALL TPS OR ITS PERSONNEL BE LIABLE UNDER ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE, ITS USE, INSTALLATION OR TPS'S
PERFORMANCE OR LACK THEREOF UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER OR
NOT TPS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO A NEGLIGENT
ACT, WILL TPS OR ITS AFFILIATES, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND THAT RESULT FROM (i) THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE THE SOFTWARE; (ii) THE TIMELINESS, DELETION, MISDELIVERY, OR FAILURE TO
4
STORE ANY DATA, COMMUNICATIONS OR SETTINGS; (iii) THE COST OF GETTING
SUBSTITUTE GOODS AND SERVICES; OR (iv) UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO OR ALTERATION
OF YOUR TRANSMISSIONS OR DATA EVEN IF SUCH PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ADDITION, WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, IN
ALL EVENTS THE REMEDIES AVAILABLE TO YOU SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF
THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU TO TPS FOR THE RIGHT TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR $100.
Indemnification. YOU SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD TPS AND ITS AGENTS, OFFICERS,
MANAGERS, EMPLOYEES AND MEMBERS HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL
CLAIMS, DEMANDS, SUITS, JUDGMENTS AND EXPENSES (INCLUDING REASONABLE LEGAL
FEES AND EXPENSES) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE BREACH BY YOU OF YOUR
OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR TO INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
MISAPPROPRIATION OR INFRINGEMENT CLAIMS BY ANY THIRD PARTY BASED ON OR
RELATING TO YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE. YOU AGREE TO GIVE TPS PROMPT NOTICE OF
SUCH CLAIMS AND TO PERMIT TPS TO CONTROL THE DEFENSE OR SETTLEMENT THEREOF.
Export Restrictions. You agree with all international and national laws that apply to the Software, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end use and country destination restrictions issued
by U.S. and other governments.
Website; Other Statements. No statement contained at the TPS Website (or any other web site) or in any other
advertisements or TPS literature or made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms
and Conditions (including the Software License Agreement, Disclaimer of Warranty and limitation of liability).
General. The above Terms and Conditions may be amended, modified, superseded, or canceled, at any time by
TPS. The Agreement shall be governed by and construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the state of
California, without regard to conflicts of laws provisions. Any action concerning this Agreement shall take place
in the state or federal courts located in San Francisco, California. If for any reason any provision of this Agreement, or a portion thereof, shall be unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of this Agreement, and the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full
force and effect. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between us and you with respect to the Software and it supersedes all prior or contemporaneous communications, agreements and understandings between
TPS and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. No joint venture, partnership, employment, or agency relationship exists between you and TPS as a result of this agreement or use of the Service. The failure of TPS to
enforce any right or provision in this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver of such right or provision unless
acknowledged and agreed to by TPS in writing. A printed version of this Agreement shall be admissible in judicial or administrative proceedings.
5
BY CLICKING ON THE “ACCEPT” BUTTON BELOW YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU
HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS
TERMS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT SUPERSEDES ANY PREVIOUS
AGREEMENT, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE BETWEEN
YOU AND TPS.
6
Table of Contents
Software End User License Agreement
2
Table of Contents
7
Introduction
36
Home screen
37
Home screen's associate icons
38
Help Options
40
Configure Menus
40
Software Updates
41
About MAGNET Field
41
Collect Support Information
Job Folder
43
New Job
43
Open Job
44
Delete Job
45
Job Information
46
Save Job As
46
Configure folder
47
Survey Configuration
48
List of Configurations
49
GPS configuration
49
Network RTK Survey
7
41
50
1. Network RTK: Configuration
50
2. Network RTK: Receiver Make
50
3. Network RTK: Rover Receiver
51
4. Network RTK: Rover Modem
51
5. Network RTK: Rover Radio
52
6. Network RTK: Internet Address
52
7. Network RTK: Login Info
53
8. Network RTK: GPUID Info
53
9. Network RTK: Modem Dialup
53
10. Network RTK: Rover PP Setup
54
11. Network RTK: Init Times
54
12. Network RTK: Topo Survey
55
13. Network RTK: Auto Topo Survey
56
14. Network RTK: Stake Settings
56
15. Network RTK: Stake Survey
57
16. Network RTK: Grade Stake Marking
58
17. Network RTK: Stake Settings
58
18. Network RTK: Tracking
59
19. Network RTK: Advanced
61
20. Network RTK: Miscellaneous
62
RTK Survey
62
1. RTK: Configuration
63
2. RTK: Receiver Make
63
3. RTK: Base Receiver
63
4. RTK: Base PP Setup
64
5. RTK: Base Radio
65
RTK: Base and Rover Radio Parameters
65
6. RTK: Rover Receiver
66
7. RTK: Rover Modem
67
8
8. RTK: Rover Radio
67
9. RTK: Rover PP Setup
68
10. RTK: Init Time
69
11. RTK: Topo Survey
69
12. RTK: Auto Topo Survey
70
13. RTK: Stake Settings
70
14. RTK: Stake Survey
71
15. RTK: Grade Stake Marking
72
16. RTK: Stake Settings
73
17. RTK: Tracking
74
18. RTK: Advanced
75
19. RTK: Miscellaneous
77
Network DGPS
9
77
1. Network DGPS: Configuration
77
2. Network DGPS: Receiver Make
78
3. Network DGPS: Rover Receiver
78
4. Network DGPS: Rover Modem
79
5. Network DGPS: Rover Radio
79
6. Network DGPS: Internet Address
80
7. Network DGPS: Login Info
80
8. Network DGPS: GPUID Info
81
9. Network DGPS: Modem Dialup
81
10. Network DGPS: Rover PP Setup
81
11. Network RTK: Init Time
82
12. Network DGPS: Topo Survey
82
13. Network DGPS: Auto Topo Survey
83
13. Network DGPS: Auto Topo Survey
83
15. Network DGPS: Stake Survey
84
16. Network DGPS: Grade Stake Marking
85
17. Network DGPS: Stake Settings
86
18. Network DGPS: Tracking
86
19. Network DGPS: Advanced
88
20. Network DGPS: Miscellaneous
88
MAGNET Relay
89
1. MAGNET Relay: Configuration
90
2. MAGNET Relay: Receiver Make
91
3. MAGNET Relay: Base Receiver
91
4. MAGNET Relay: Base Modem
92
5. MAGNET Relay: Base PP Setup
92
6. MAGNET Relay: Base Radio
93
7. MAGNET Relay: Modem Dialup
93
8. MAGNET Relay: Rover Receiver
93
9. MAGNET Relay: Rover Modem
94
10. MAGNET Relay: Rover Radio
94
11. MAGNET Relay: Rover PP Setup
94
12. MAGNET Relay: Init Time
95
13. MAGNET Relay: Topo Survey
96
14. MAGNET Relay: Auto Topo Survey
97
15. MAGNET Relay: Stake Settings
97
16. MAGNET Relay: Stake Survey
98
17. MAGNET Relay: Grade Stake Marking
99
10
18. MAGNET Relay: Stake Settings
19. MAGNET Relay: Tracking
100
20. MAGNET Relay: Advanced
102
21. MAGNET Relay: Miscellaneous
103
Real Time DGPS/NMEA Survey
103
1. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Configuration
103
2. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Receiver Make
104
Beacon
104
. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base Receiver
105
4. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base PP Setup
105
5. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base Radio
106
Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base and Rover Radio Parameters
11
99
107
6. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover Receiver
107
7. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover Modem
108
8. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover Radio
108
For the User Base corrections
109
For the Beacon corrections
109
SBAS Setup
110
9. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover PP Setup
110
10. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Init Time
111
11. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Topo Survey
112
12. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Auto Topo Survey
113
13. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Stake Settings
113
14. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Stake Survey
114
15. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Grade Stake Marking
115
16. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Stake Settings
115
17. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Tracking
116
18. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Advanced
118
19. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Miscellaneous
118
PP Static Survey
118
1. PP Static: Configuration
119
2. PP Static: Receiver Make
119
3. PP Static: Static Receiver
119
4. PP Static: Base PP Setup
120
5. PP Static: Occupations Times
120
6. PP Static: Tracking
121
8. PP Static: Miscellaneous
122
PP Kinematic Survey
122
1. PP Kinematic: Configuration
123
2. PP Kinematic: Receiver Make
123
3. PP Kinematic: Base Receiver
123
4. PP Kinematic: Base PP Setup
124
5. PP Kinematic: Rover Receiver
124
6. PP Kinematic: Rover PP Setup
125
7. PP Kinematic: Init Time
125
8. PP Kinematic: Topo Survey
126
9. PP Kinematic: Auto Topo Survey
127
10. PP Kinematic: Tracking
127
12. PP Kinematic: Miscellaneous
128
PP DGPS
1. PP DGPS: Configuration
129
129
12
2. PP DGPS: Receiver Make
129
3. PP DGPS: Base Receiver
129
4. PP DGPS: Base PP Setup
130
5. PP DGPS: Rover Receiver
130
6. PP DGPS: Rover PP Setup
131
7. PP DGPS: Init Time
132
8. PP DGPS: Topo Survey
132
9. PP DGPS: Auto Topo Survey
133
10. PP DGPS: Tracking
133
11. PP DGPS: Advanced
135
12. PP DGPS: Miscellaneous
135
Other settings
13
135
Antenna Setup
135
Receiver Settings
136
Point Properties
137
Raw Data Logging
137
Tracking
137
RTK Settings
137
Solution Types
138
Peripherals for the base receiver
139
Peripherals for the rover receiver
139
Output NMEA
139
List of NMEA messages
140
Configure Depth Sounder
140
mmGPS+ Parameters
141
Laser Configuration
141
Repeater Configuration
141
Radio Parameters for Digital UHF / Digital UHF II and TRL-35
142
Parameters for FH 915 Plus and RE-S1
144
Radio Parameters for Satel
144
Radio Parameters for internal and external GSM modems
145
Modem Dialup
145
Internet Address
146
Radio Parameters for AirLink CDMA (MUDP)
146
Rover GPRS Parameters
146
Rover CDMA Parameters
146
Rover CDPD Parameters
147
Hybrid Positioning
Resection in Hybrid Positioning
147
149
Coordinate System
150
Pre Defined CS
151
Custom Projections
152
Custom Projection - 1
152
Custom Projection - 2
Custom Datums
152
153
Custom Datum - 1
153
Custom Datum - 2
154
Custom Ellipsoids
154
Custom Ellipsoid
154
Geoids List
Add/Edit Geoid
155
155
14
Grid/Ground Parameters
Compute Rotation
156
Compute Azimuth/Bearing
156
Grid to Ground Transformation
157
Creating Ground Projection Relative to a Point
158
Creating Ground Projection Relative to the Origin of Grid System
160
Global Settings
160
Backup
161
Units
162
Display
163
Alarms
164
Code Options
165
Quick Codes
165
Code Settings
165
Code Prompts
166
Stake Reports Configuration List
15
155
166
Report Configuration
167
Report Tolerances
167
Enterprise Configure
167
Exchange folder
169
Export To Job
169
Select Job
170
Export Data To Job
170
Filter Points By Range and Code(s)
171
Select Object to Export
171
Select Codes For Filter
172
Export Status
172
Export Warnings
Import From Job
172
172
Import Data From Job
173
Select Object to Import
173
Filter Points By Range and Code(s)
174
Import Status
174
Import Warnings
Export To File
Export Data To File
174
175
175
Points To File
175
Lines to File
176
Areas to File
176
Point Lists to File
177
Raw Data
177
Roads to File
178
Localization to File
178
Surfaces to File
179
Multiple Data to File
179
Data Selection
179
Point Selection
179
File Units
179
Code Style
180
Separators
180
Control Codes
180
16
DXF/DWG Settings for Export
181
Text File Format Settings
181
Custom Style
182
Coordinate System
182
Units Format
182
Import From File
183
Import Data From File
183
Settings for Import
183
Import of Multiple Data Types
184
List of Imported Objects
184
Wrong Objects
184
Export To 3DMC
185
To 3DMC
185
To MC project
185
SiteLINK 3D File
186
Import From 3DMC
186
Enterprise Upload
186
Enterprise Download
187
Chat
188
Edit folder
189
Edit Points
17
190
Point Icon Descriptions
191
Points pop-up menu
192
Setup Columns
192
Select Points By Range
192
Select Points by Code
193
Select Points by Radius
193
Select Points by Code Strings
193
Find Point By Name
194
Select Points By Layer
194
Edit / Add Point
194
Point tab
195
String
195
Control Codes
195
Layer/Style tab
197
Cut Sheet tab
197
Check Points tab
197
WA tab
197
PTL tab
198
Image/Photo tab
198
Compass Calibration
199
Camera Settings
199
Point Attributes
200
Code Attributes tab
200
Attribute Ranges
200
Multiple Codes
201
Layer/Style tab
201
Image/Photo tab
201
Note tab
202
Edit Codes
202
Code
Attributes
202
203
18
Edit Linework
Points in Line tab
204
Select Points From List tab
205
Pop-up menu
Layer/Style
Edit Area
205
206
206
Points in Area tab
206
Layer/Style tab
207
Edit Point Lists
208
Point List tab
208
Edit Raw Data
209
Edit Optical Raw Data
210
Edit GPS Raw Data
210
Edit Raw Base Station
210
Pop-up menu
211
Angle Sets Report Setup Selection
211
Angle Sets Report
211
Edit Background Images
Drawing
Properties
Images
212
212
213
213
Background Images
213
Properties
214
Edit Surfaces
Surfaces Properties
19
204
214
214
Edit Sessions
215
Session Setup
215
Edit Stake Reports
216
Stake Report
216
View Stake Report
216
Layers
217
Layer tab
219
Style tab
219
Objects tab
219
Avoidance tab
219
Edit Roads folder
222
Edit Roads
223
Roads pop-up menu
223
Add/Edit Roads
223
Edit Road's Alignment
224
Edit Road's Surface
224
Calculate Road Points
225
Transition Points
225
Centerline Points
225
Right/Left Offset Points
226
Edit Horizontal Alignments
226
Add/Edit Horizontal Alignments
227
Start Point
227
Horizontal Alignment
227
Line
228
Curve
228
20
Spiral
229
Intersection Point
231
Edit Vertical Alignments
Add Vertical Alignments
232
Edit Vertical Alignments
232
Pop-up menu
232
High/Low Positions
233
Grade Display
233
Start Point
233
Vertical Alignment
234
Add Vertical Grade
234
Add Parabola
234
Add Circular arc
235
Add Element
235
Edit X-Section Templates
21
231
235
X-Sect Template
236
Segment
236
Edit X-Sections
237
X-Section Set
237
X-Section
237
Edit String Set
238
Add/Edit String Set
238
Add/Edit Road String
238
Add/Edit Alignment Pair
239
Select Linework from Map
239
Station Equation Set
239
Add / Edit Station Equation Set
240
Add /Edit Station Equation
241
Calculate folder
Calculate Inverse
242
243
Two-Point Inverse
244
Inverse Point to Line
244
Inverse Point to Point List
246
Inverse Point to Curve
246
Inverse Point to Road
248
Inverse Point to Linework
249
Inverse Linework
250
Point In Direction
251
Intersection
252
Calculator
253
Standard Calculator
254
Scientific Calculator
254
Calculate Curves
256
Curve Solution
257
Three-Point Curve
259
PI & Tangents
260
Radius & Points
262
Spiral
264
Traverse
266
Vertical
267
Calculate Area
269
22
Compute Area By Points
269
Known Area - Hinge
270
Known Area - Line
271
Calculate Angles
272
Corner Angle
273
Triangle
273
Calculate Offsets
274
Line Offset
275
Station & Offsets
Corners Offset
276
Curve Offset
277
Linework Offset
277
Offset Linework
278
Offset Points From Linework
278
Station & Offsets
279
Create Points
280
Points Details
280
Offset Points
Offset Points
Road Offset
Calculate Transform
23
275
281
282
282
283
Rotate
283
Translate
284
Scale
285
2D Transformation
285
2D Transform
286
Point Pair Info
286
2D Transform Parameters
286
Session Check
287
Input Sessions
287
Input Reference Data
287
Results
288
Calculate Traverse
Calculate
BS Point
Adjust
288
288
290
290
Adjustment Settings
290
Adjustment Method
291
Adjustment Results
291
Closure
Misclosure Results
Calculate Surface
292
292
293
Surface Volume
293
Open Surface
294
Create Surface
294
To create a Surface
294
To edit the Surface
295
General Icons
296
Editing Boundary
297
Contour Surface
Enter Plan
297
298
24
Creating points
300
Creating lines by using two points
301
Creating Arcs
302
Creating Arcs by two points
303
Creating an Arcs by three points
303
Creating Rectangles
305
Creating Close figures
306
Distance measurement between two points
307
Azimuth measurement of direction from point to point
308
Angle measurement for three points
308
Map
310
Map View Tools
310
Drawing and Snap toolbars
311
Drawing toolbar
25
311
Point
312
Polyline
312
Area
313
Fillet
313
Best fit arc
314
Best fit line
314
Snap Toolbar
315
End point snap mode
315
Mid-point snap mode
317
Circle center snap mode
319
Line intersection snap mode
322
Perpendicular snap mode
326
Circle quadrant snap mode
327
Map Pop-Up Menus
329
Map Properties
330
General tab
330
3D tab
331
Surfaces tab
331
Drawings tab
331
Connections
333
Connecting with Device
333
Bluetooth Connection
334
Device Discovery
334
Authentication
334
Connection to Bluetooth device
335
Connecting with Enterprise
335
Connecting with Network
335
Mount Point Information
336
LongLINK Connection
336
Connecting with SiteLINK 3D
337
Setup folder
Setup GPS folder
Status
338
338
339
Position tab
339
System tab
340
Solution type
341
Log History tab
341
26
27
Multi Base Status tab
342
Scatter Plots tab
342
Properties of Horizontal Plot
343
Properties of Vertical Plot
343
SVs tab
343
Status pop-up menu
344
Mission Planning
345
Mission Planning Setting
345
Satellite List
346
Satellite Number
346
PDOP
346
Localization in MAGNET Field
347
Basic Concept of Localization
347
Localization
349
Pop-up menu of Localization
350
Add Localization Point
351
Localization Results
352
Start Base (RTK)
353
Quick Radio
354
Start Base pop-up menu
354
Multi Base
355
Simulator
355
Known Point Initialization
356
KPI Position
356
Survey Session
357
RTK Session - Positioning
357
RTK Session - Meteo
357
RTK Session - Receivers
357
PP Session
358
Static Occupation
358
mmGPS Initialization
359
Transmitter Data
359
Transmitter
360
Transmitter Position
360
Resect mmGPS+
361
Sensor
361
Resect
361
Data
362
Known Point
362
Sensor
363
Field Calibration
363
Update Calibration Data
364
Known Point Offset
364
Advanced Sensor Options
365
Setup Optical (Total Station) folder
365
Backsight
366
User Scale
368
Pop-up menu
368
Remote Control Tilt
368
Station and Offset
369
Multiple Backsight
369
28
Taking Measurements
Resection
371
Resection 3D
372
Resection in Hybrid Positioning mode
372
Results Screen
376
Pop-up menu
377
Resection Options
378
Benchmark
Known Elevation (Multiple)
Reference Line Setup
378
379
379
Reference Line Point
380
Point Measurements
380
Reference Line Results
380
Remote Control
Rotate
381
382
Survey folder
384
Survey GPS
384
Topo
Topo Normal View
File or Session Name Check
Map View
385
385
386
386
Select Value to display
386
Beacon Status
387
Laser BS Meas
387
Auto Topo
29
370
387
Auto Topo Normal View
387
Map View
389
Survey Cross Section
389
X-Section
389
Find Station
390
Results
390
Map
390
Tape Dimension
391
Reference Line
391
Tape Dimension
391
Data
392
Surface
392
Volume Input
392
Surface Topo
393
Map
393
Surface Topo Volume Report
393
Configure Radio
394
PTL Mode
394
Grid Setup
394
mmGPS+ Options
395
Add Raw Note
395
Last Point Data
395
Survey Optical (Total Station)
Topo Survey
395
396
Pop-up menu
397
Sideshot-Direct
398
30
Sideshot-Direct/Reverse
399
Traverse
399
Offsets
399
Survey Cross Section
400
XSect-Direct
401
XSect-Direct/Reverse
401
Find Station
401
Results
402
Map
402
Tape Dimension
Reference Line
402
Tape Dimension
403
Map
403
Data
403
Surface
403
Missing Line
404
Data
404
Map
404
Set Collection
31
402
405
Angle/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev
405
Setup
405
Mode
405
Temp/Press
406
Predefined Points
406
Set Collection
407
TS Manual Entry
407
Auto Topo
407
Monitor Pointlist
408
Monitor
Scanning
409
410
Grid Scan
410
Feature Scan
411
Panorama
411
View
411
Image Scan
411
Area Name Setting
412
Scan Area Setting
412
Panorama
414
Grid Interval Settings
414
Grid Scan
415
Feature Point Selection
415
Feature Scan Settings
417
Feature Scan
417
2D Data Select
418
View
418
Scanning
418
Scanning with Image
418
Image Orientation
419
Orientation Results
420
Scan Area
420
Interval
420
32
Estimate Time
421
Scanning in Progress
421
View Scan
421
Area
422
Offsets in MAGNET Field
422
Offsets for TS Survey
422
Horizontal Angle Offset
423
Horizontal/Vertical Angle Offset
424
Distance Offset
425
Hidden Point
427
Two Lines Intersection
428
Line and Corner
430
Line and Offset
432
Plane and Corner
434
Offsets for GPS Survey
Offset Line
437
Azimuth and Offsets
438
2 Distance Offset
441
Offset Laser
442
Two Peg Test for Level
445
Two Peg Test Results
445
Level Run
33
436
446
Level Run
446
DL tab
446
Data
447
Shots
447
Pop-up Menu
447
Display Setting
447
Vertical Offset
447
Manual Level Entry
448
Stake folder
449
Stake Points
450
Stake Lines
450
Stake Offsets
451
Stake Line Offsets
452
Station & Offset
452
Stake Intersection Offset
Intersection Offset / Line 2
453
453
Stake 3-Pt Curve Offsets
454
Stake Curve Offsets
454
Stake Spiral Offsets
455
Stake Surface
Stake Surface Elevation
Surface Boundary / Grid Boundary
456
456
457
Stake Surface Road
457
Stake Surface
458
Stake Grid
Design Surface
459
459
Stake Point in Direction
460
Stake Point List
460
Stake Curve
461
Stake Real-Time Road
462
34
Stake Road (Slope)
Stake Road
462
Transition Points
463
Stake Alignment /Slope
464
Stake Alignment
464
Stake Slope
Stake Alignment
Stake Linework
Station & Offsets
Stake dialog
465
466
467
467
468
Instrument Panel
468
Stake Panel
469
Views
469
Data View
469
Map View
470
Normal View
470
Overhead View
470
Cross Section View
470
Surface View
470
Data Fields
471
Icons Description
471
Apps folder
35
462
472
Magnet News
473
Schedule
473
Timecard
473
Introduction
MAGNET Field is a cloud-enabled application that includes data collection, stakeout functionality and computations, and hardware support for Topcon, Sokkia, Gowin, and generic NMEA GPS products.
It is a part of the MAGNET family of products that includes MAGNET Office and MAGNET Enterprise.
After successfully installing the application on your device, the Product Activation wizard guides you
through the activation process.
Note:
l
l
l
After installing an update to MAGNET Field, the application will need to be activated again.
If the activation is canceled, MAGNET Field will run in Demo mode. Demo mode, allows user to
store up to twenty five points and create a road of one hundred meters in length.
MAGNET Field can be activated at the time of installation directly from your PC.
To establish a connection with MAGNET Enterprise and exchange data, follow the connection prompts
after activating the software.
Note: MAGNET Enterprise connection is not available for MAGNET Field Onboard.
Once a connection with a device is established, the Home screen is displayed. Alternatively, the user can
click the Home button (
)to open the Home Screen for the default job.
At this point, MAGNET Field has been successfully configured and a new job can be created. The userfriendly interface will provide intuitive settings and a simple approach to managing tasks.
On each subsequent MAGNET Field startup, the Connections dialog runs with the current job selections.
36
Home screen
See the Introduction for general information on MAGNET Field.
Click an icon to open the folder or execute the command:
Job
Manages jobs.
Configure
Manages job configurations.
Exchange
Exchanges data between an active job and other jobs, files and enterprise projects.
Chat
Chats with online recipients. Not available for onboard.
Edit
Edits existing job data.
Calculate
Calculates various coordinate geometry tasks.
Map
Shows the current job data on the map.
Connect
Switches between GPS and optical instruments, and sets connections with the instrument,
a network, and with MAGNET Enterprise. Not available for onboard.
Setup
Sets up surveying: GPS+ survey or Optical (Total Station) survey. Unavailable for Level
configuration style.
Survey
Conducts a survey: GPS+ survey or Optical survey. Not available for a GPS static and
37
Level surveys.
Two Peg Test
Performs the Two Peg Test for a Level survey. Not available for onboard.
Level Run
Sets up a Level survey in running mode. Not available for onboard.
Stake
Stakes different objects.
Apps
Uses applications that are pre-installed on the same device as the MAGNET Field.
The top banner of the home screen shows the name of the job that is open and associate icons. More...
Home screen's associate icons
Options
Provides access to Help files and options that are specific to the current open
screen. Over this icon in the Home screen and in every dialog for meas-
urements, a blinking notification displays if you received a file
message
or a
. The file is available in the 3DMC Inbox folder and the mes-
sage in Chats.
Indicates the power status of the controller battery.
Indicates the successful connection status with the Enterprise. When con-
necting, the animated icon
displays. A red cross
shows that
the connection is off. You can connect/reconnect with the enterprise in the
Connections dialog. Not available for onboard.
38
Indicates the successful connection status with the SiteLINK 3D server.
Indicates the connection status with the device. Not available for onboard.
You can connect/reconnect with the device in the Connections dialog. If the
device is disconnected, the indicator is gray. When connecting, it turns yellow,
then green, and finally turns into the image of the connected device:
l
l
- GPS type instrument is activated,
- GPS type instrument which obtains correction information.
l
- Optical type instrument is activated.
l
- Hybrid Positioning is activated.
GPS type instrument is the current device type when Hybrid Positioning
mode is activated. To select the Optical type, click the button.
Optical type instrument is the current device type when Hybrid Positioning
mode is activated. To select the GPS type, click the button.
Closes the program.
Returns to the home screen.
39
Help Options
Click the icon to open a menu of options which may be useful for you. Every screen and dialog in
MAGNET Field has such an icon in the top left corner, the menu, opened by clicking the icon, always contains the Help option and may contain some additional options specific to the current screen.
The following options can be selected from the menu of the home screen and every folder:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Click Help to access help files.
Check mark Keyboard to enable you to type entries in a dialog's fields using the soft keyboard.
Click Chats -> Create New to configure a chat with the MAGNET Enterprise users. Find out more...
Click Timecard to open the Timecard dialog when the Enterprise connection is established. Find out
more...
Click Configure Menus to show / hide functions in the menus. Find out more...
Click Activate Modules to perform a licence activation with the help of the Activation Manager wizard.
Click Minimize to reduce the current window to a button on the taskbar.
Click Software Updates to check whether any updates are available for MAGNET Field. Find out
more...
Click About to view basic information about MAGNET Field software. Find out more...
Configure Menus
This dialog enables you to change the contents of the Home screen or the folders within it. Bear in mind that
maximum TWELVE menu items can be shown on the screen. If there are more than twelve items, only first
twelve of them will be shown.
To configure menus:
1. Highlight the name of the desired Home screen's item. The other panel will show the contents of the
corresponding folder. By default MAGNET Field displays full contents of all the folders.
2. If you want to hide a seldom or never used item in this folder, clear the box near the desired name.
Select the box again to restore the item in the folder.
3. Use
and
icons to move the highlighted name up and down in the list to change the
order of icons.
4. You can cut a selected item by clicking
and paste it above another selected item with
.
40
5. To rename an item, click
and enter a new name.
6. Click
to create your password to freeze menus for editing if required.
7. Click
to store the changes and open the modified Home screen.
Software Updates
This dialog shows available updates detected of MAGNET Field. The dialog consists of two parts - upper part
shows general update info and info about available features updates. The other part shows info about available
program version for update, or, if none, current version info.
l
l
l
l
Click the Check button to perform check for all updates (features and program versions), renews info in
dialog in case of success.
Click the Apply button to start the features updating.
Click the Details button to show the release notes for available program version.
Click the Install button to install a new version of Magnet Field.
About MAGNET Field
This lets you:
l
l
l
l
View information about the current version of MAGNET Field.
Get the Id of the current device.
Learn the privacy policy of the company. For this, click the Privacy Policy button.
Collect support information for the support team. For this, click the Support Info button. More...
Collect Support Information
This dialog lets you collect all information needed for support into an archive file:
41
1. In the Support Info filename field enter the name of the target archive file. By default, it will be the
name of the current job.
2. In the comment area, you can add any comments which may help the support team resolve your issue.
This information will be saved in the target archive file as a text file.
3. If required, select the Upload support info via Internet check box to transfer the archive file to the
Enterprise server for the support team. This is available only when you are registered for Enterprise.
4. Click
to save the archive file in the current job folder by default and optionally to send it to
Enterprise.
42
Job Folder
Jobs include all data collected in surveys of different configurations. Upon installation, MAGNET Field only contains and opens the default job.
Click an icon to manage your jobs:
New Job
Creates a new job.
Open Job
Makes a selected job current.
Delete Job
Deletes a selected job from data storage.
Job Info
Shows information about a current job.
Save Job As
Copies a current job with a new name.
New Job
The new job creation process is performed with the help of a Wizard.
indicates the directory in which this job will be created. The last specified file path is retained.
To create a new job:
1. Enter a Name for the job.
Note: The Job name length should not exceed 63 characters and contain any of the following symbols:
43
! , ? % * @ # $ % ^ & ' " \ / | ~ ; [ ] { } ( ) < > ` + = .
2. Optionally, in Created by, enter any identifier of the person creating the job.
3. Optionally, in Comments, enter a description for the job.
4. Current date displays the date and time when the job is being created.
5. Click Browse if required to save the New Job file in a folder different from that
6. Click indicates.
at this step if you want the new job to use the settings from the last opened job as the
default settings. The new job becomes the current job, and the Home menu displays with the job name
in the title area.
7. Click Next to follow the wizard to complete the required steps.
Note: Clicking during any of the following step creates the new job with the settings that were
configured in all the previous steps (including the opened one).
8. Select the Survey Style or create a new configuration, and click Next. A Survey Configuration is a set
of parameters that does not depend upon the job. A Configuration can be used by different Jobs.
More...
9. Configure the Coordinate System settings required for the job, and then click Next. More...
10. Specify the Units for the job, and then click Next. More...
11. Configure the Display parameters for coordinates, azimuths and positions on roads, and then click
Next. More...
12. Set Alarms for various situations. More...
13. Click
to open the Home menu for the newly created job. The title of the Home menu will be
the current job name. When opening the job the Connections screen displays by default.
Open Job
Upon starting, MAGNET Field always opens the last used job after the product activation and Connections
are performed.
All existing jobs that are created/opened with MAGNET Field are defined as .mjf files and have the symbol
.
44
To open an existing job:
1. From the Job Name list, highlight the name of the job you want to open.
The Created and Modified fields will display when the job was created and last modified.
will show the directory in which this job resides. By default the job files are stored in the [program]
\Jobs folder.
By default the list displays the jobs in the order of last opening. If required, click the Job Name header to
sort the jobs in the alphabetical order, click again to return to the order by date.
2. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job in another folder if required.
3. Click
to open the job. The Home menu displays.
To open job backups of existing jobs:
1. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job.
2. In the File Types drop-down list, select MAGNET Field Job Backups (*.mjf.bak).
3. Highlight the name of the job to be opened, and click
.
To open a job that was created in TopSURV:
1. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job.
2. In the File Types drop-down list, select TopSURV Job Files (*.tsj) or TopSURV Job Backups (*.tsj.bak).
3. Highlight the name of the job to be opened, and click
.
Delete Job
Current Job: shows the name of the current job.
To delete a job:
1. From the Job Name list, highlight the name of the job you want to delete.
The Created and Modified fields will display when the job was created and last modified.
will show the directory in which this job resides. By default the job files are stored in the [program]
45
\Jobs folder.
2. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job in another folder if required.
to delete the job. A confirmation message displays.
3. Click
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion or No to cancel, and return to the Job folder.
Note: When deleting a job, MAGNET Field automatically deletes all associated files (the job history file,
images, etc.).
Job Information
Displays information about:
l
l
l
The current job in general
The settings in the job
The currently connected receiver:
- Receiver firmware version
- Receiver OAF expiration date (for nearest expired option). Click on this date to expand a full list of
OAF options.
Save Job As
To save the currently opened MAGNET Field Job file with a new name:
1.
displays the path to the current folder. Use the dialog icons to navigate to the desired folder to
save the new file. Learn more about the icons from Browse.
2. Enter the Name of the new file.
3. Click
to perform the operation.
46
Configure folder
Click an icon to configure the settings:
Survey
Creates or edits a survey configuration.
Coordinate System
Sets a coordinate system for the
job. Allows Grid to Ground
transformation (find out
more...).
Global
Logs the current job history to
the file, and connects with the
instrument at the startup
prompt.
Backup
Changes the directory to save
job backups.
Units
Sets default units to be used in
the job.
Display
Customizes the interface to display data in the job.
Alarms
Sets alarm parameters.
Codes
Sets code global parameters.
47
Stake Reports
Configures reports for staking.
Enterprise
Configures the user account to
enter into the MAGNET Enterprise. Not available for
onboard.
Survey Configuration
Survey Configuration is a set of parameters that control a survey, define communication between devices,
measure and store points. MAGNET Field contains some default configurations for different types of surveys
with GNSS receivers and optical instruments. If the defaults do not suit your needs, you can create a new configuration for your survey. To do this, click
. The Configuration dialog is displayed.
When you have created the new configuration, the name of this configuration will appear in the list.
To set a survey configuration for the job:
l
l
l
l
l
From the GPS+ Configuration drop-down list of available configurations, select the required configuration.
From the Optical Configuration drop-down list of available configurations, select the configuration
for the Total Station or Level mode.
Both types of configurations can be selected for one job. They will be used with the device selected
upon Connections: GPS+ or Optical.
Hybrid Positioning is available for selection when using any GPS+ continuous and only Robotic
optical configurations for one job.
Hybrid Positioning mode implies simultaneous connection with both GPS+ receiver and optical robot.
In this mode you needn't connect/disconnect with the current device.
Automatic Localization is available when Hybrid Positioning mode is activated. First five points will
be used for calculating parameters between WGS-84 and Local coordinate systems. These parameters
are saved in the job and they can be automatically updated during next measurements in the Hybrid
Positioning (if residuals for these points will be less than for the previous set of points).
48
l
After selecting the survey configurations for your job, click
to store settings, which will be used
each time you start a survey, and to return to the Home screen.
List of Configurations
The Configurations dialog presents a list of available survey configurations: names and types. Every survey type
has a predefined configuration with the name of My followed by the survey type (e.g. My RTK). Survey configurations are stored in the Styles.tsstyles file in the MAGNET Field directory. Magnet Field contains a list of
pre-defined configurations that you can use or modify.
You can customize the list of the configurations to include only ones you need:
l
l
l
l
Highlight the name of the configuration.
Click the Delete button to remove the configuration from the list.
Click the Edit button to change the highlighted configuration to suit your survey preferences.
Click the Add button to create a new configuration based on the highlighted name and type.
Creating/editing a survey configuration is accomplished with the help of a Wizard. Find out more... on GPS+ configurations and more... on optical configurations.
GPS configuration
MAGNET Field provides the set of independent wizards for creating configurations for the following GPS+ survey types:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
49
Network RTK
RTK
Network DGPS
MAGNET Relay
Real Time DGPS/NMEA
PP Static
PP Kinematic
PP DGPS
Network RTK Survey
Network Real Time Kinematic is similar to RTK survey but it is implies that the Rover uses correction data
from operating reference station networks. The rover receives the correction in the selected format and computes high accuracy coordinates on the rover side.
1. Network RTK: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
2. In the field Type select the Network RTK configuration.
3. In the Corrections field select the type of correction data that will be used for survey:
l MAGNET Relay – to transmit/receive RTK corrections using TCP/IP over cellular data link.
l VRS – to receive Virtual Reference Station data.
l MAC – to use Master-Auxiliary Concept data.
l FKP – to use network area corrections.
l Single Base – to receive RTK corrections from a single base.
l External Config – when the receiver uses an External program to configure RTK corrections.
If you select the MAGNET Relay type, you create an additional special configuration has some variation from Network configuration. See MAGNET Relay for the type description.
4. Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new
point. To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screens to create the Network RTK configuration.
2. Network RTK: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receivers, select the vendor which developed the Rover receiver from
the list in the Rover fields.
If you will work without receivers, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the simulation
parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
2. Select the Post Processing check box to store a raw data file (*.tps ) for the base and the rover receiv-
50
ers.
3. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
3. Network RTK: Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable. Note: Topcon Generic selection
will work with all receiver models which were manufactured before GR-3 receiver.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the rover receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From Protocol list, select the protocol for data transmission: TCP/IP, NTRIP, NTRIP 1.0, CSD (data call).
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the rover receiver antenna used.
6. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is opened.
Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
7. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate the
Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened. Here
you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do this,
select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left
corner.
9. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
4. Network RTK: Rover Modem
To configure the modem connection:
1. Select either Receiver, or Controller depending on whose modem will use for communication..
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
51
5. Network RTK: Rover Radio
The rover radio is intended for receiving differential corrections. You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular
modem). The dialog content depends on the receiver model selected.
To configure the radio modem:
1. In the Device Type field select which type of Radio Modem you will use: Internal Cellular, or
External Cellular.
2. In the Device Model field select model of the modem (for Topcon Generic, HiPer SR,HiPer II, HiPer
V, GR-3,GR-5, NET G3). For HiPer SR receivers, the Long LINK modem does not require any additional settings.
3. For External Cellular specify the Baud rate for the Port to which the radio is connected and specify
the Parity, the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits, which are specific to the connected
modem.
Note: Sometimes during modem connection, for the "Auto" baud rate selection of the modem, the baud
rate could not be set. The software creates an error message for this case: ” Modem baud rate could
not be determined automatically. Please run TRU (see Help for details) or specify baud rate in configuration”. See here how to resolve the issue.
4. If you use an AirLink CDMA or GPRS external cellular modem, select the Modem Register option
from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner to register the radio
modem. More...
5. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings.
6. Click Next to specify the Internet address as required.
6. Network RTK: Internet Address
In this dialog you can configure settings for Internet connection:
1. Enter an Internet Address that will be used for the connection.
2. If needed, enter a Label for the address which displays in the address list.
3. The desired server address you can select from the Address list field. To add the address to the
Address list press the Add New button. To remove any address from the Address list, select the
desired address and press the Delete button.
52
4. Select Use GPUIDcheck box to send GPUID message to SAPOS Germany if required. More...
5. Click Next to continue customizing the Internet connection.
7. Network RTK: Login Info
In this dialog you need to enter the login information:
1. Enter a Password to login the selected server.
2. Optionally, you can lock / unlock the password in this dialog. To do this, select the Lock Credentials
option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner. If you use this option
the Password field will display "*Locked*".
3. To unlock the password, click
in the top left corner, select the Lock Credentials option and type
in the password in the Enter Password field.
4. Click Next to continue customizing the internal connection.
8. Network RTK: GPUID Info
If required, enter your Id information for SAPOS Germany to check if you are using the reference network of
SAPOS for cadastre or for engineering measurements.
9. Network RTK: Modem Dialup
In this dialog you can configure parameters for a dialup Internet connection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
53
Select Provider from the drop-down list.
Enter the Dialup Number needed to make the Internet connection.
Enter the User ID for the server.
Enter the Password to login to the server with the entered Used ID.
Enter the PIN number for the server
Enter APN if required.
To set the values to default, click the Defaults button.
10. Network RTK: Rover PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog.
Enter information for the raw data logging in the rover receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l
User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking
or
(when Automatic was selected in the Start Log field) in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. The
Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the file name and select the
folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To: In this field, you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in
Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the Network RTK
configuration is 5 seconds.
4. Start Log: If you select Manual, to start raw data logging click
in the Topo or Autotopo dia-
log. If you select Automatic, the data logging is automatically started after clicking
in the Topo
or Autotopo dialog.
5. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the
*.tps file.
6. Log Corrections: If the checkbox is selected, the base receiver correction data will be saved into :
l the current tps file, if you are using the receiver modem,
l the corrections.bin file in Jobs/ <current job name> folder, if you are using the controller
modem.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
11. Network RTK: Init Times
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. In
this dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions
and GNSS receiver type. After starting the logging of the raw data, the software will analyze the observation
conditions and will show the Remaining Time field. The start value of the remaining time is equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
54
12. Network RTK: Topo Survey
During a real-time stationary survey you can select two independent ways to save measured points to the current
job: Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required. Data
will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for selection
depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually
when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them for
storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required. Data
will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for selection
depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them for
storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
55
,
13. Network RTK: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic Network RTK survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received
epochs: by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 15 meters.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
14. Network RTK: Stake Settings
To configure the parameters which will be used during a GPS stakeout:
1. In the Horizontal Distance Tolerance filed, enter the horizontal distance tolerance value. It is used to
determine when you are close enough to the point for the bull's eye to show up.
2. In the Screen Orientationfield you can select orientation of the screen during stakeout:
l North - the top of the screen is oriented to the north during the stakeout session;
l Moving Direction - the top of the screen is oriented to the direction of moving during the
stakeout session;
l Moving Direction +North - is similar to the Moving Direction option, but the screen will be oriented to the North direction when you are within three meters of the design point;
l Point/Azimuth- if you select this orientation type, the Orient Pt / Orient Az field will be added to
the Stake Point dialog. Here you can define a point or an azimuth to orient the screen top.
3. From the Display Reference drop-down list, select a object that will be displayed used in the Normal
View mode.
4. Optionally, you can specify an icon for the staked point. To do this, select the Display option from the
pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
56
15. Network RTK: Stake Survey
During a stakeout procedure you can select two independent ways to save stake out points to the current job: Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
Quick way will be activated by clicking
, and the
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required. Data
will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for selection
depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually
when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them for
storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required. Data
will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for selection
depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them for
storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
57
16. Network RTK: Grade Stake Marking
This dialog allows you to mark the grade stake with the skyward rounding of the cut/fill decimal values to an
even number of feet (or meters).
To configure the settings for marking:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Working Stake Length field, enter the working length of the stake.
In Top Stake Spacing field, enter a value of top reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Bottom Stake Spacing field, enter a value of bottom reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Cut/Fill interval field, enter an even number you want the cut/fill to round to.
If all requirements are met, clicking Next opens the next Stake Settings dialog. More..
For instance if the cut is 0.8 and the bottom spacing is 0.5, we will round up to a cut of 2.0 (assuming 1.0
interval) and place the mark at 1.2 above ground:
17. Network RTK: Stake Settings
In the Store Staked Point As fields you can set the parameters for storing staked points:
1. In the Point field, select a method to set the name for the first staked point. The initial point name can
be set to:
58
Design point name.
l Next point name.
l Design point with a pre-defined prefix (that is, stk_01, where “stk_” is the prefix).
l Design point with a pre-defined suffix. The choice of the default prefix or suffix appears only when
the corresponding item is chosen from the drop-down menu.
l Design Point plus Constant. A specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate
the staked point name. For instance, if the constant specified is 1000, and the design point is 100, the
staked point would be named 1100 (that is, 100+1000). If the design point is alphanumeric, the constant is appended to the name. For example, for the design point ALPHA, the corresponding staked
out point is named ALPHA1000.
l Range Start. Any start value of a range can be selected.
2. The Note can be set to either Design pointname, Design point with a prefix, or Design point with a suffix.
Also, it can be Station & Offset information. If the Station & Offset option is activated, an edit box for entering an alphanumeric prefix appears. For the United States, this prefix is “Sta”, for the international markets
the prefix is “Cha”, and for the Korean/Japanese markets the prefix is “No”. With this option activated,
depending on the choice for the prefix, MAGNET Field automatically generates one note for each stakeout
point: Sta5+5.5R5.0, Cha505.5R5.0, or No.5+5.5R5.0 respectively.
l
18. Network RTK: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellation to be used for position computation for Standalone, DGPS and RTK solutions:
59
l
ALL :
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
l If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default,
the L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals
are available.
l If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default,
the L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l
l
l
l
l
60
L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
l
l
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware and
firmware which supports the selected signals.
19. Network RTK: Advanced
In this dialog you can select the signal processing parameters and RTK setting:
1. From RTK Position, select the method of RTK corrections definition:
l Extrapolation(sometimes described as asynchronous) - the RTK engine will extrapolate the base station's carrier phase measurements to the current epoch (note that the truth carrier phases measured at
the base cannot be transmitted and received at the rover instantly). The final positioning accuracy
may be somewhat lower due to additional extrapolation errors, which may be up to a few millimeters
vertical and horizontal for a one second extrapolation time.
or
Matched Epoch (sometimes described as synchronous) - the RTK engine does not extrapolate the
base station's carrier phases in position computation. Instead, the engine will either compute a
delayed position or simply output the current stand-alone position (while waiting for new
RTCM/CMR messages from the base station). Note that the delayed position is computed for the
time (epoch) to which the last received base station's carrier phase measurements correspond.
Accuracies achievable in delay mode are normally on a level with those of post-processing kinematic.
2. By default the Multipath Reduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing technique
for reduction of C/A code phase multipath and C/A carrier phase multipath. This option is useful for collecting raw data near from metallic objects, or trees and high buildings.
3. Select the Canopy Environment check box to allow the RTK engine to use less rigid thresholds when filtering out measurement outliers. This mode is recommended when working under tree canopy or in other
cases of high multipath.
4. If the GNSS receiver is collecting raw data in high-vibration environment, we recommend to select HighVibration Environment (QLL) to enable Quartz Lock Loop technology to minimize the vibrationinduced impact on acquisition and tracking capabilities of the TPS receiver.
l
61
5. From the Base Station Make drop-down list, select the manufacturer of the Base receiver to designate
Base Make (IGS Class) used by the rover receiver to account for GLONASS biases.
l By default, it is set to Automatic Detection to override Base Make automatically detected by the
Rover receiver when this information is transmitted by the Base. The message 1033 of the
RTCM format contains the information.
l If the Base station does not transmit the manufacturer name of the Base receiver, you need to
select the corresponding manufacturer name from the drop-down list.
Note: Incorrect name of the Base receiver manufacturer can result to Float solution.
6. Optionally, you can select the settings of the RTK engine. To do this, select the RTK Settings option
from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the last screen to create the Network RTK configuration.
20. Network RTK: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the
database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is
stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
4. Get signal quality and operator name: when selected, the signal quality indicator and operator name
will be displayed in the Network tab of the Connections dialog.
5. Auto-disconnect from server: when selected (by default), an automatic disconnection from the server
is performed when you disconnect from the receiver.
6. Restart Epoch Counter if Solution changes: when selected , counting epochs for will stop if the specified solution is lost and will resume after it is found.
RTK Survey
Real-Time Kinematic survey implies usage of a pair of receivers operating simultaneously and a radio link
established between the two receivers. From a functional point of view, the two receivers will differ from
each other. One of the receivers (a Base) is located at a fixed point with known coordinates. The base
62
receiver will transmit the correction data via a radio link to the rover receiver to compute high accuracy coordinates on the rover side.
1. RTK: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
2. In the field Type select the RTK configuration.
3. Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new point.
To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in
the top left corner.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
2. RTK: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receivers, select the vendor which developed the Base receiver and Rover
receiver from the list in the Base and Rover fields.
If you will work without receivers, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the simulation parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
2. Select the Post Processing check box to store a raw data file (*.tps ) for the base and the rover receivers.
3. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
3. RTK: Base Receiver
To configure the base receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the base receiver you are using and enter its Serial Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
63
4. From RTK Format list, select the format for the differential corrections data, which the base radio will
transmit. RTCM MSM format is supported in Topcon GNSS receivers with firmware version 4.5 and
later. This format allows you to create the correction data with measurements of GPS, GLONASS and
BeiDou satellite systems.
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the base receiver antenna used.
6. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is
opened. Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
7. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate
the Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened.
Here you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do
this, select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the
top left corner.
9. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
4. RTK: Base PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you select the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. Enter
information for the raw data logging in the base receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking the Start Base button in
the Start Base dialog. The Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the
file name and select the folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To:In this field you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the RTK configuration is 5 seconds.
4. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the
*.tps file.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
64
5. RTK: Base Radio
The base radio is intended for transmitting differential corrections. You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular
modem) or UHF modem (Radio) or LongLINK for HiPer SR receiver. The dialog content depends on the
receiver model selected.
To configure the radio modem:
1. In the Device Type field select which type of Radio Modem you will use: Internal Radio, or Internal Cellular, or External Radio, or External Cellular (for Topcon Generic, HiPer II, HiPer V, GR-3,GR-5, NET
G3).
2. In the Device Model field select model of the modem (for Topcon Generic, HiPer SR,HiPer II, HiPer V,
GR-3,GR-5, NET G3). For HiPer SR receivers, the Long LINK modem does not require any additional settings.
3. For Internal Radio, External Radio, External Cellular specify the Baud rate for the receiver Port that the
radio is connected to.
Note: Sometimes during modem connection, for the "Auto" baud rate selection of the modem, the baud rate
could not be set. The software creates an error message for this case: ” Modem baud rate could not be
determined automatically. Please run TRU (see Help for details) or specify baud rate in configuration”.
See here how to resolve the issue.
4. For External Radio, External Cellular specify communication parameters for the receiver Port that the
radio is connected to: Parity, the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits, which are specific to the
connected modem.
5. If you use an AirLink CDMA or GPRS external cellular modem, select the Modem Register option from
the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner to register the radio modem.
More...
6. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings.
7. Click Next to specify the base and rover modem radio parameters as required.
RTK: Base and Rover Radio Parameters
The type of the dialog is dependent upon the selected modem type for the base or radio receiver. Click the desired
modem type to open an instruction how to configure modem parameters:
65
1. Internal Radio:
l
Digital UHF / Digital UHFII
l
FH 915 Plus
l
Satel
2. Internal Cellular
l
Auto, Digital UHF I/II GSM,FH915 + GSM, General Internal GSM, Satel GSM,
l
Digital UHF CDMA
l
TCP/IP
3. External Radio
l RE-S1
l Satel, SRL-35
TR-35
4. External Cellular
l
AirLink CDMA (MUDP) for base
l AirLink GPRS for rover
l AirLink CDMA for rover
l
l
l
l
Generic CDMA for rover
Generic GSM, MultiTech GSM, Siemens TC35
TCP/IP for base
You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular modem) or UHF modem (Radio). The dialog content depends
on the receiver model selected.
6. RTK: Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a
connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not
have a GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always
checked. The connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable. Note: Topcon
Generic selection will work with all receiver models which were manufactured before GR-3 receiver.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the rover receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From RTK Format list, select the format for the differential corrections data, which the rover radio
modem will receive.
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the rover receiver antenna used.
66
6. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is opened.
Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
7. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate the
Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened. Here
you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do this,
select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left
corner.
9. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
7. RTK: Rover Modem
To configure the modem connection:
1. Select either Receiver, or Controller depending on whose modem will use for communication.
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
8. RTK: Rover Radio
The rover radio is intended for receiving differential corrections. You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular
modem) or UHF modem (Radio). The dialog content depends on the receiver model selected.
To configure the radio modem:
1. In the Device Type field select which type of Radio Modem you will use: Internal Radio, or Internal Cellular, or External Radio, or External Cellular (for Topcon Generic, HiPer II, HiPer V, GR-3,GR-5, NET
G3).
2. In the Device Model field select model of the modem (for Topcon Generic, HiPer SR,HiPer II, HiPer V,
GR-3,GR-5, NET G3). For HiPer SR receivers, the Long LINK modem does not require any additional settings.
3. For Internal Radio, External Radio, External Cellular specify the Baud rate for the Port to which the
radio is connected.
Note: Sometimes during modem connection, for the "Auto" baud rate selection of the modem, the baud rate
could not be set. The software creates an error message for this case: ” Modem baud rate could not be
67
determined automatically. Please run TRU (see Help for details) or specify baud rate in
configuration”. See here how to resolve the issue.
4. For External Radio, External Cellular specify communication parameters for the receiver Port that the
radio is connected to: Parity, the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits, which are specific to
the connected modem.
5. If you use an AirLink CDMA or GPRS external cellular modem, select the Modem Register option
from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner to register the radio
modem. More...
6. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings.
7. Click Next to specify the base and rover modem radio parameters as required.
9. RTK: Rover PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog.
Enter information for the raw data logging in the rover receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l
User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking
or
(when Automatic was selected in the Start Log field) in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. The
Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the file name and select the
folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To: In this field, you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in
Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the RTK configuration is 5 seconds.
4. Start Log: If you select Manual, to start raw data logging click
in the Topo or Autotopo dia-
log. If you select Automatic, the data logging is automatically started after clicking
in the Topo
or Autotopo dialog.
5. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the
*.tps file.
6. Log Corrections: If the checkbox is selected, the base receiver correction data will be saved into :
68
the current tps file, if you are using the receiver modem,
l the corrections.bin file in Jobs/ <current job name> folder, if you are using the controller modem.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
l
10. RTK: Init Time
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. In this
dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions and
GNSS receiver type. After starting the logging of the raw data, the software will analyze the observation conditions and will show the Remaining Time field. The start value of the remaining time is equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
11. RTK: Topo Survey
During a real-time stationary survey you can select two independent ways to save measured points to the current
job: Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required. Data
will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for selection
depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually
when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them for
storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
69
,
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for
selection depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
12. RTK: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic RTK survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received
epochs: by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 1 meter.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
13. RTK: Stake Settings
To configure the parameters which will be used during a GPS stakeout:
1. In the Horizontal Distance Tolerance filed, enter the horizontal distance tolerance value. It is used to
determine when you are close enough to the point for the bull's eye to show up.
2. In the Screen Orientationfield you can select orientation of the screen during stakeout:
l North - the top of the screen is oriented to the north during the stakeout session;
l Moving Direction - the top of the screen is oriented to the direction of moving during the
stakeout session;
l Moving Direction +North - is similar to the Moving Direction option, but the screen will be oriented to the North direction when you are within three meters of the design point;
70
Point/Azimuth- if you select this orientation type, the Orient Pt / Orient Az field will be added to the
Stake Point dialog. Here you can define a point or an azimuth to orient the screen top.
3. From the Display Reference drop-down list, select a object that will be displayed used in the Normal View
mode.
4. Optionally, you can specify an icon for the staked point. To do this, select the Display option from the popl
up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
14. RTK: Stake Survey
During a stakeout procedure you can select two independent ways to save stake out points to the current job: Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
Quick way will be activated by clicking
, and the
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required. Data
will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for selection
depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually
when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them for
storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required. Data
will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for selection
depends on the type of selected survey. More...
71
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the RTK configuration.
15. RTK: Grade Stake Marking
This dialog allows you to mark the grade stake with the skyward rounding of the cut/fill decimal values to an
even number of feet (or meters).
To configure the settings for marking:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Working Stake Length field, enter the working length of the stake.
In Top Stake Spacing field, enter a value of top reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Bottom Stake Spacing field, enter a value of bottom reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Cut/Fill interval field, enter an even number you want the cut/fill to round to.
If all requirements are met, clicking Next opens the next Stake Settings dialog. More..
For instance if the cut is 0.8 and the bottom spacing is 0.5, we will round up to a cut of 2.0 (assuming 1.0
interval) and place the mark at 1.2 above ground:
72
16. RTK: Stake Settings
In the Store Staked Point As fields you can set the parameters for storing staked points:
1. In the Point field, select a method to set the name for the first staked point. The initial point name can be set
to:
l Design point name.
l Next point name.
l Design point with a pre-defined prefix (that is, stk_01, where “stk_” is the prefix).
l Design point with a pre-defined suffix. The choice of the default prefix or suffix appears only when
the corresponding item is chosen from the drop-down menu.
l Design Point plus Constant. A specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate
the staked point name. For instance, if the constant specified is 1000, and the design point is 100, the
staked point would be named 1100 (that is, 100+1000). If the design point is alphanumeric, the constant is appended to the name. For example, for the design point ALPHA, the corresponding staked
out point is named ALPHA1000.
l Range Start. Any start value of a range can be selected.
73
2. The Note can be set to either Design pointname, Design point with a prefix, or Design point with a suffix. Also, it can be Station & Offset information. If the Station & Offset option is activated, an edit box
for entering an alphanumeric prefix appears. For the United States, this prefix is “Sta”, for the international markets the prefix is “Cha”, and for the Korean/Japanese markets the prefix is “No”. With this
option activated, depending on the choice for the prefix, MAGNET Field automatically generates one
note for each stakeout point: Sta5+5.5R5.0, Cha505.5R5.0, or No.5+5.5R5.0 respectively.
17. RTK: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellation to be used for position computation for
Standalone, DGPS and RTK solutions:
l
ALL :
l
l
l
l
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default,
the L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals
are available.
74
If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
l
l
l
l
l
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware and
firmware which supports the selected signals.
18. RTK: Advanced
In this dialog you can select the signal processing parameters and RTK setting:
1. From RTK Position, select the method of RTK corrections definition:
l Extrapolation(sometimes described as asynchronous) - the RTK engine will extrapolate the base station's carrier phase measurements to the current epoch (note that the truth carrier phases measured at
75
the base cannot be transmitted and received at the rover instantly). The final positioning accuracy
may be somewhat lower due to additional extrapolation errors, which may be up to a few millimeters vertical and horizontal for a one second extrapolation time.
or
Matched Epoch (sometimes described as synchronous) - the RTK engine does not extrapolate
the base station's carrier phases in position computation. Instead, the engine will either compute a
delayed position or simply output the current stand-alone position (while waiting for new
RTCM/CMR messages from the base station). Note that the delayed position is computed for the
time (epoch) to which the last received base station's carrier phase measurements correspond.
Accuracies achievable in delay mode are normally on a level with those of post-processing kinematic.
By default the Multipath Reduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing technique for reduction of C/A code phase multipath and C/A carrier phase multipath. This option is useful
for collecting raw data near from metallic objects, or trees and high buildings.
Select the Canopy Environment check box to allow the RTK engine to use less rigid thresholds
when filtering out measurement outliers. This mode is recommended when working under tree canopy
or in other cases of high multipath.
If the GNSS receiver is collecting raw data in high-vibration environment, we recommend to select
High-Vibration Environment (QLL) to enable Quartz Lock Loop technology to minimize the vibration-induced impact on acquisition and tracking capabilities of the TPS receiver.
From the Base Station Make drop-down list, select the manufacturer of the Base receiver to designate
Base Make (IGS Class) used by the rover receiver to account for GLONASS biases.
l By default, it is set to Automatic Detection to override Base Make automatically detected by the
Rover receiver when this information is transmitted by the Base. The message 1033 of the
RTCM format contains the information.
l If the Base station does not transmit the manufacturer name of the Base receiver, you need to
select the corresponding manufacturer name from the drop-down list.
l
2.
3.
4.
5.
Note: Incorrect name of the Base receiver manufacturer can result to Float solution.
6. Optionally, you can select the settings of the RTK engine. To do this, select the RTK Settings option
from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the last screen to create the RTK configuration.
76
19. RTK: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
4. Restart Epoch Counter if Solution changes: when selected , counting epochs for will stop if the specified solution is lost and will resume after it is found.
5. Auto-disconnect from LongLINK: when selected (by default), an automatic disconnection from the
LongLINK modem is performed when you disconnect from the HiPer SR receiver in an RTK survey.
Network DGPS
Network Differential GPS implies the usage of pseudo-range corrections received from operating differential
GPS reference station networks. The configuration of the Network DGPS survey type is similar to Network
RTK. The difference is that MAC data is not used and DGPS solutions are derived from Network DGPS survey
1. Network DGPS: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
2. In the field Type select the Network DGPS configuration.
3. In the Corrections field select the type of correction data that will be used for survey.
l MAGNET Relay – to transmit/receive RTK corrections using TCP/IP over cellular data link.
l VRS – to receive Virtual Reference Station data.
l FKP – to use network area corrections.
l Single Base – to receive RTK corrections from a single base.
l External Config – when the receiver uses an External program to configure RTK corrections.
If you select the MAGNET Relay type, you create an additional special configuration has some variation
from Network configuration. See MAGNET Relay for the type description.
77
4. Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new
point. To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screens to create the Network
DGPS configuration.
2. Network DGPS: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receivers, select the vendor which developed the Rover receiver from
the list in the Rover fields.
If you will work without receivers, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the simulation
parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
2. Select the Post Processing check box to store a raw data file (*.tps ) for the base and the rover receivers.
3. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
3. Network DGPS: Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a
connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not
have a GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always
checked. The connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable. Note: Topcon
Generic selection will work with all receiver models which were manufactured before GR-3 receiver.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the rover receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From Protocol list, select the protocol for data transmission: TCP/IP, NTRIP, NTRIP 1.0, CSD (data
call).
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the rover receiver antenna used.
6. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is
opened. Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
78
7. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate the
Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened. Here
you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do this,
select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left
corner.
9. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
4. Network DGPS: Rover Modem
To configure the modem connection:
1. Select either Receiver, or Controller depending on whose modem will use for communication.
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
5. Network DGPS: Rover Radio
The rover radio is intended for receiving differential corrections. You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular
modem). The dialog content depends on the receiver model selected.
To configure the radio modem:
1. In the Device Type field select which type of Radio Modem you will use: Internal Cellular, or External
Cellular.
2. In the Device Model field select model of the modem (for Topcon Generic, HiPer SR,HiPer II, HiPer V,
GR-3,GR-5, NET G3). For HiPer SR receivers, the Long LINK modem does not require any additional settings.
3. For External Cellular specify the Baud rate for the Port to which the radio is connected and specify the
Parity, the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits, which are specific to the connected modem.
Note: Sometimes during modem connection, for the "Auto" baud rate selection of the modem, the baud rate
could not be set. The software creates an error message for this case: ” Modem baud rate could not be
determined automatically. Please run TRU (see Help for details) or specify baud rate in configuration”.
See here how to resolve the issue.
79
4. If you use an AirLink CDMA or GPRS external cellular modem, select the Modem Register option
from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner to register the radio
modem. More...
5. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings.
6. Click Next to specify the Internet address as required.
6. Network DGPS: Internet Address
In this dialog you can configure settings for Internet connection:
1. Enter an Internet Address that will be used for the connection.
2. If needed, enter a Label for the address which displays in the address list.
3. The desired server address you can select from the Address list field. To add the address to the
Address list press the Add New button. To remove any address from the Address list, select the
desired address and press the Delete button.
4. Select Use GPUIDcheck box to send GPUID message to SAPOS Germany if required. More...
5. Click Next to continue customizing the Internet connection.
7. Network DGPS: Login Info
In this dialog you need to enter the login information:
1. Enter a Password to login the selected server.
2. Optionally, you can lock / unlock the password in this dialog. To do this, select the Lock Credentials
option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner. If you use this
option the Password field will display "*Locked*".
3. To unlock the password, click
in the top left corner, select the Lock Credentials option and
type in the password in the Enter Password field.
4. Click Next to continue customizing the internal connection.
80
8. Network DGPS: GPUID Info
If required, enter your Id information for SAPOS Germany to check if you are using the reference network of
SAPOS for cadastre or for engineering measurements.
9. Network DGPS: Modem Dialup
In this dialog you can configure parameters for a dialup Internet connection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select Provider from the drop-down list.
Enter the Dialup Number needed to make the Internet connection.
Enter the User ID for the server.
Enter the Password to login to the server with the entered Used ID.
Enter the PIN number for the server
Enter APN if required.
To set the values to default, click the Defaults button.
10. Network DGPS: Rover PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. Enter
information for the raw data logging in the rover receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l
User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking
or
(when
Automatic was selected in the Start Log field) in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. The Raw Data
Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the file name and select the folder in which to
save the file.
2. Log To: In this field, you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the Network DGPS configuration is 5 seconds.
81
4. Start Log: If you select Manual, to start raw data logging click
in the Topo or Autotopo dia-
log. If you select Automatic, the data logging is automatically started after clicking
in the Topo
or Autotopo dialog.
5. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the
*.tps file.
6. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
11. Network RTK: Init Time
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. In
this dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions
and GNSS receiver type. After starting the logging of the raw data, the software will analyze the observation
conditions and will show the Remaining Time field. The start value of the remaining time is equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
12. Network DGPS: Topo Survey
During a real-time stationary survey you can select two independent ways to save measured points to the current job: Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
, and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Network DGPS configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered.
More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
82
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Network DGPS configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them for
storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
13. Network DGPS: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic Network DGPS survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs:
by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 15 meters.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
13. Network DGPS: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic Network DGPS survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs:
by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
83
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 15 meters.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
15. Network DGPS: Stake Survey
During a stakeout procedure you can select two independent ways to save stake out points to the current job:
Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
,
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Network DGPS configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered.
More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Network DGPS configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered.
More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
84
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
16. Network DGPS: Grade Stake Marking
This dialog allows you to mark the grade stake with the skyward rounding of the cut/fill decimal values to an
even number of feet (or meters).
To configure the settings for marking:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Working Stake Length field, enter the working length of the stake.
In Top Stake Spacing field, enter a value of top reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Bottom Stake Spacing field, enter a value of bottom reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Cut/Fill interval field, enter an even number you want the cut/fill to round to.
If all requirements are met, clicking Next opens the next Stake Settings dialog. More..
For instance if the cut is 0.8 and the bottom spacing is 0.5, we will round up to a cut of 2.0 (assuming 1.0 interval) and place the mark at 1.2 above ground:
85
17. Network DGPS: Stake Settings
In the Store Staked Point As fields you can set the parameters for storing staked points:
1. In the Point field, select a method to set the name for the first staked point. The initial point name can
be set to:
l Design point name.
l Next point name.
l Design point with a pre-defined prefix (that is, stk_01, where “stk_” is the prefix).
l Design point with a pre-defined suffix. The choice of the default prefix or suffix appears only
when the corresponding item is chosen from the drop-down menu.
l Design Point plus Constant. A specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate the staked point name. For instance, if the constant specified is 1000, and the design point
is 100, the staked point would be named 1100 (that is, 100+1000). If the design point is alphanumeric, the constant is appended to the name. For example, for the design point ALPHA, the
corresponding staked out point is named ALPHA1000.
l Range Start. Any start value of a range can be selected.
2. The Note can be set to either Design pointname, Design point with a prefix, or Design point with a suffix. Also, it can be Station & Offset information. If the Station & Offset option is activated, an edit box
for entering an alphanumeric prefix appears. For the United States, this prefix is “Sta”, for the international markets the prefix is “Cha”, and for the Korean/Japanese markets the prefix is “No”. With this
option activated, depending on the choice for the prefix, MAGNET Field automatically generates one
note for each stakeout point: Sta5+5.5R5.0, Cha505.5R5.0, or No.5+5.5R5.0 respectively.
18. Network DGPS: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
86
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellation to be used for position computation for Standalone, DGPS solutions:
l
ALL :
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
l If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals are
available.
l If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l
l
l
l
l
87
L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
l
l
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware
and firmware which supports the selected signals.
19. Network DGPS: Advanced
In this dialog you can select the signal processing parameters:
1. By default the Multipath Reduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing technique for reduction of C/A code phase multipath and C/A carrier phase multipath. This option is useful
for collecting raw data near from metallic objects, or trees and high buildings.
2. If the GNSS receiver is collecting raw data in high-vibration environment, we recommend to select
High-Vibration Environment (QLL) to enable Quartz Lock Loop technology to minimize the vibration-induced impact on acquisition and tracking capabilities of the TPS receiver.
3. Click Next. The wizard will open the last screen to create the Network DGPS configuration.
20. Network DGPS: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the
database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is
stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
4. Get signal quality and operator name: when selected, the signal quality indicator and operator name
will be displayed in the Network tab of the Connections dialog.
5. Auto-disconnect from server: when selected (by default), an automatic disconnection from the server
is performed when you disconnect from the receiver.
6. Restart Epoch Counter if Solution changes: when selected , counting epochs for will stop if the specified solution is lost and will resume after it is found.
88
MAGNET Relay
MAGNET Relay configuration allows you to use any Topcon GNSS receiver as the base receiver for up to ten
rover receivers. There's no need to use a SIM card with fixed IP for the base receiver in such configuration.
Moreover, the base and rover receivers do not need the internal cellular modems. The communication will be
provided by internal modems of the controller with MAGNET Field.
The MAGNET Relay configuration can be used after you connect to MAGNET Enterprise. To apply the configuration, you need:
l
l
the login and password to Enterprise server
the subscription to MAGNET Relay.
The base receiver transmits the correction data to the MAGNET Enterprise; rover receivers will be able to select
active mount point and receive the corrections from the given base after connected to the Enterprise.
Before running the Base Receiver, you need to connect the controller to MAGNET Enterprise server using the
internal modem of the controller. If the receiver has an internal/external cell modem and you selected the receiver
modem in the configuration, MAGNET Field will automatically establish the connection of the receiver modem
89
with MAGNET Enterprise server during Start Base procedure. After that you can disconnect the controller
from MAGNET Enterprise server; the base receiver will continue to transmit correction data to MAGNET
Enterprise server using its own modem. If the receiver does not have an internal/external cell modem, select
the Controller modem in the configuration and the controller will transmit the correction data to MAGNET
Enterprise server during whole session.
Before running the Rover Receiver, you need to connect the controller to MAGNET Enterprise server using
the internal modem of the controller. We recommend to select in configuration the Controller modem. In this
case the controller will receive the correction data from MAGNET Enterprise server during whole session.
1. MAGNET Relay: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
In the field Type select the Network RTK configuration.
In the Corrections field select MAGNET Relay
Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new
point. To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screens to create the MAGNET
Relay configuration.
90
2. MAGNET Relay: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receivers, select the vendor which developed the Base receiver and Rover
receiver from the list in the Base and Rover fields.
If you will work without receivers, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the simulation parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
2. Select the Post Processing check box to store a raw data file (*.tps ) for the base and the rover receivers.
3. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
3. MAGNET Relay: Base Receiver
To configure the base receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the base receiver you are using and enter its Serial Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From RTK Format list, select the format for the differential corrections data, which the base radio will
transmit. RTCM MSM format is supported in Topcon GNSS receivers with firmware version 4.5 and later.
This format allows you to create the correction data with measurements of GPS, GLONASS and BeiDou
satellite systems.
5. The Relay Name field will show the user's MAGNET Field license serial number as the default relay
name on the given controller. This name is used when the Enterprise server generates a mount point name
and the Start Base dialog. If there is no serial number yet, the Relay name is offered.
6. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the base receiver antenna used.
7. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is opened.
Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
8. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate the
Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened. Here
you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
91
9. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do
this, select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the
top left corner.
10. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
4. MAGNET Relay: Base Modem
To configure the modem connection:
1. Select either Receiver, or Controller depending on whose modem will use for communication. When
you select the receiver modem, MAGNET Field automatically establishes the connection of the
receiver modem with MAGNET Enterprise server during Start Base procedure. After that you can disconnect the controller from MAGNET Enterprise server; the base receiver will continue to transmit correction data to MAGNET Enterprise server using own modem.
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
5. MAGNET Relay: Base PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you select the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. Enter
information for the raw data logging in the base receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking the Start Base button in
the Start Base dialog. The Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the
file name and select the folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To:In this field you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the RTK configuration is 5 seconds.
4. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the
*.tps file.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
92
6. MAGNET Relay: Base Radio
The base radio is intended for transmitting corrections data to the MAGNET Enterprise server. The dialog content depends on your modem selection in the Config: Base Modem dialog:
l
l
If you selected the receiver modem, in the Device Type field, select either Internal Cellular or External Cellular.
If you selected the controller modem, the internal cellular controller modem will always be used for connection with existing network.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
7. MAGNET Relay: Modem Dialup
In this dialog you can configure parameters for a dialup Internet connection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select Provider from the drop-down list.
Enter the Dialup Number needed to make the Internet connection.
Enter the User ID for the server.
Enter the Password to login to the server with the entered Used ID.
Enter the PIN number for the server
Enter APN if required.
To set the values to default, click the Defaults button.
8. MAGNET Relay: Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable. Note: Topcon Generic selection
will work with all receiver models which were manufactured before GR-3 receiver.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the rover receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From Protocol list, the MAGNET Relay protocol is always selected.
93
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the rover receiver antenna used.
6. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is
opened. Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
7. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate
the Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened.
Here you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do
this, select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the
top left corner.
9. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
9. MAGNET Relay: Rover Modem
We recommend to use the modem controller for the rover receiver. In this case the controller will receive the
correction data from MAGNET Enterprise server during whole session.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
10. MAGNET Relay: Rover Radio
The rover radio is intended for receiving differential corrections from the MAGNET Enterprise server. If you
selected the controller modem in the Config: Rover Modem dialog, the internal cellular controller modem
will always be used for connection with existing network.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
.
11. MAGNET Relay: Rover PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog.
Enter information for the raw data logging in the rover receiver.
94
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l
User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking
or
(when
Automatic was selected in the Start Log field) in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. The Raw Data
Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the file name and select the folder in which to
save the file.
2. Log To: In this field, you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the Network RTK configuration is 5 seconds.
4. Start Log: If you select Manual, to start raw data logging click
in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. If
you select Automatic, the data logging is automatically started after clicking
in the Topo or Auto-
topo dialog.
5. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the *.tps
file.
6. Log Corrections: If the checkbox is selected, the base receiver correction data will be saved into :
l the current tps file, if you are using the receiver modem,
l the corrections.bin file in Jobs/ <current job name> folder, if you are using the controller modem.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
12. MAGNET Relay: Init Time
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. In this
dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions and
GNSS receiver type. After starting the logging of the raw data, the software will analyze the observation conditions and will show the Remaining Time field. The start value of the remaining time is equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
95
13. MAGNET Relay: Topo Survey
During a real-time stationary survey you can select two independent ways to save measured points to the current job: Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
, and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for
selection depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for
selection depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
96
14. MAGNET Relay: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic MAGNET Relay survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs:
by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 15 meters.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
15. MAGNET Relay: Stake Settings
To configure the parameters which will be used during a GPS stakeout:
1. In the Horizontal Distance Tolerance filed, enter the horizontal distance tolerance value. It is used to
determine when you are close enough to the point for the bull's eye to show up.
2. In the Screen Orientationfield you can select orientation of the screen during stakeout:
l North - the top of the screen is oriented to the north during the stakeout session;
l Moving Direction - the top of the screen is oriented to the direction of moving during the stakeout session;
l Moving Direction +North - is similar to the Moving Direction option, but the screen will be oriented
to the North direction when you are within three meters of the design point;
l Point/Azimuth- if you select this orientation type, the Orient Pt / Orient Az field will be added to the
Stake Point dialog. Here you can define a point or an azimuth to orient the screen top.
3. From the Display Reference drop-down list, select a object that will be displayed used in the Normal View
mode.
4. Optionally, you can specify an icon for the staked point. To do this, select the Display option from the pop-
up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
97
16. MAGNET Relay: Stake Survey
During a stakeout procedure you can select two independent ways to save stake out points to the current job:
Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
,
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for
selection depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for
selection depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
98
17. MAGNET Relay: Grade Stake Marking
This dialog allows you to mark the grade stake with the skyward rounding of the cut/fill decimal values to an
even number of feet (or meters).
To configure the settings for marking:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Working Stake Length field, enter the working length of the stake.
In Top Stake Spacing field, enter a value of top reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Bottom Stake Spacing field, enter a value of bottom reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Cut/Fill interval field, enter an even number you want the cut/fill to round to.
If all requirements are met, clicking Next opens the next Stake Settings dialog. More..
For instance if the cut is 0.8 and the bottom spacing is 0.5, we will round up to a cut of 2.0 (assuming 1.0 interval) and place the mark at 1.2 above ground:
18. MAGNET Relay: Stake Settings
In the Store Staked Point As fields you can set the parameters for storing staked points:
99
1. In the Point field, select a method to set the name for the first staked point. The initial point name can
be set to:
l Design point name.
l Next point name.
l Design point with a pre-defined prefix (that is, stk_01, where “stk_” is the prefix).
l Design point with a pre-defined suffix. The choice of the default prefix or suffix appears only
when the corresponding item is chosen from the drop-down menu.
l Design Point plus Constant. A specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate the staked point name. For instance, if the constant specified is 1000, and the design point
is 100, the staked point would be named 1100 (that is, 100+1000). If the design point is alphanumeric, the constant is appended to the name. For example, for the design point ALPHA, the
corresponding staked out point is named ALPHA1000.
l Range Start. Any start value of a range can be selected.
2. The Note can be set to either Design pointname, Design point with a prefix, or Design point with a suffix. Also, it can be Station & Offset information. If the Station & Offset option is activated, an edit box
for entering an alphanumeric prefix appears. For the United States, this prefix is “Sta”, for the international markets the prefix is “Cha”, and for the Korean/Japanese markets the prefix is “No”. With this
option activated, depending on the choice for the prefix, MAGNET Field automatically generates one
note for each stakeout point: Sta5+5.5R5.0, Cha505.5R5.0, or No.5+5.5R5.0 respectively.
19. MAGNET Relay: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellation to be used for position computation for
Standalone, DGPS and RTK solutions:
100
l
ALL :
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
l If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals are
available.
l If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
l
l
l
l
l
101
l
If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware
and firmware which supports the selected signals.
20. MAGNET Relay: Advanced
In this dialog you can select the signal processing parameters and RTK setting:
1. From RTK Position, select the method of RTK corrections definition:
l Extrapolation(sometimes described as asynchronous) - the RTK engine will extrapolate the base
station's carrier phase measurements to the current epoch (note that the truth carrier phases measured at the base cannot be transmitted and received at the rover instantly). The final positioning
accuracy may be somewhat lower due to additional extrapolation errors, which may be up to a
few millimeters vertical and horizontal for a one second extrapolation time.
or
Matched Epoch (sometimes described as synchronous) - the RTK engine does not extrapolate
the base station's carrier phases in position computation. Instead, the engine will either compute a
delayed position or simply output the current stand-alone position (while waiting for new
RTCM/CMR messages from the base station). Note that the delayed position is computed for the
time (epoch) to which the last received base station's carrier phase measurements correspond.
Accuracies achievable in delay mode are normally on a level with those of post-processing kinematic.
By default the Multipath Reduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing technique for reduction of C/A code phase multipath and C/A carrier phase multipath. This option is useful
for collecting raw data near from metallic objects, or trees and high buildings.
Select the Canopy Environment check box to allow the RTK engine to use less rigid thresholds
when filtering out measurement outliers. This mode is recommended when working under tree canopy
or in other cases of high multipath.
If the GNSS receiver is collecting raw data in high-vibration environment, we recommend to select
High-Vibration Environment (QLL) to enable Quartz Lock Loop technology to minimize the vibration-induced impact on acquisition and tracking capabilities of the TPS receiver.
Optionally, you can select the settings of the RTK engine. To do this, select the RTK Settings option
l
2.
3.
4.
5.
102
from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
6. Click Next. The wizard will open the last screen to create the MAGNET Relay configuration.
21. MAGNET Relay: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
4. Restart Epoch Counter if Solution changes: when selected , counting epochs for will stop if the specified solution is lost and will resume after it is found.
Real Time DGPS/NMEA Survey
Real Time Differential GPS implies that the rover receiver uses differential pseudorange correction data transmitted from DGPS services. Real Time DGPS survey is used in GIS applications. A number of differential services exist to transmit differential correctional data, including maritime radio beacons, and SBAS (Satellite Based Augmentation Systems) service.
1. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
2. In the field Type select the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
3. In the Corrections field select the type of correction data that will be used for survey.
l User Base - a user base transmits pseudo-range corrections. This configuration is similar to RTK
with the pseudo-range measurements only.
l Beacon - a radio beacon transmits pseudo-range corrections.
l SBAS/Autonomous - the Satellite-Based Augmentation Systems (WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS) are
source of differential correction data. The availability of satellite signals depends upon the receiver
type and location.
103
CDGPS - the Canada-wide Differential GPS (CDGPS) Service provides wide-area DGPS corrections via L-band communications satellite across the breadth of Canada as well as parts of the
United States.
4. Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new
point. To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
l
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screens to create the Real Time
DGPS/NMEA configuration.
2. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receivers, select the vendors of receivers. Do the following:
l for the Use Base corrections: select the Base receiver and Rover receiver from the list in the
Base and Rover fields.
l for the Beacon, SBAS/Autonomous and CDGPS corrections: select the Rover receiver from the
list in the Rover fields.
2. If you will work without receivers, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the simulation
parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
3. Select the Post Processing check box to store a raw data file (*.tps ) for the base and/or the rover
receivers.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
Note: For SBAS/Autonomous corrections you can select Generic NMEA in the Manufacturer dropdown selection list. For this manufacturer you cannot set the Simulation mode and store a raw data
file (*.tps ) for the rover receivers.
Beacon
This dialog is available for the Beacon corrections only.
To configure settings for a radio beacon source for differential GPS corrections:
1. Select the Country where the radio-beacon based differential service is located.
2. Select the Station that provides broadcasting differential corrections for the rover.
3. Select the Beacon Corrections from BR-1 check box if required to use the beacon receiver BR-1 as a
source of differential corrections for the rover. More...
104
4. Select the Automatic Scan Mode check box if you want to enable this mode in BR-1 to get the Beacon
signal automatically. BR-1 will search broadcasting frequencies and output RTCM corrections from the
best signal.
. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base Receiver
This dialog opens for User Base corrections only. To configure the base receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the base receiver you are using and enter its Serial Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From DGPS Format list, select the format for the differential corrections data, which the base radio will
transmit.
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the base receiver antenna used.
6. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is opened.
Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
7. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate the
Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened. Here
you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do this,
select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left
corner.
9. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
4. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you select the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog and for User
Base corrections only. Enter information for the raw data logging in the base receiver.
105
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking the Start Base button in
the Start Base dialog. The Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the
file name and select the folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To:In this field you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the RTK configuration is 5 seconds.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
5. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base Radio
The base radio is intended for transmitting differential corrections. You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular modem) or UHF modem (Radio) or LongLINK for HiPer SR receiver. The dialog content depends on
the receiver model selected.
To configure the radio modem:
1. In the Device Type field select which type of Radio Modem you will use: Internal Radio, or Internal
Cellular, or External Radio, or External Cellular (for Topcon Generic, HiPer II, HiPer V, GR-3,GR5, NET G3).
2. In the Device Model field select model of the modem (for Topcon Generic, HiPer SR,HiPer II, HiPer
V, GR-3,GR-5, NET G3). For HiPer SR receivers, the Long LINK modem does not require any additional settings.
3. For Internal Radio, External Radio, External Cellular specify the Baud rate for the receiver Port that
the radio is connected to.
Note: Sometimes during modem connection, for the "Auto" baud rate selection of the modem, the baud
rate could not be set. The software creates an error message for this case: ” Modem baud rate could
not be determined automatically. Please run TRU (see Help for details) or specify baud rate in configuration”. See here how to resolve the issue.
4. For External Radio, External Cellular specify communication parameters for the receiver Port that the
radio is connected to: Parity, the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits, which are specific to
the connected modem.
106
5. If you use an AirLink CDMA or GPRS external cellular modem, select the Modem Register option from
the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner to register the radio modem.
More...
6. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings.
7. Click Next to specify the base and rover modem radio parameters as required.
Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Base and Rover Radio Parameters
The type of the dialog is dependent upon the selected modem type for the base or radio receiver. Click the desired
modem type to open an instruction how to configure modem parameters:
1. Internal Radio:
l
Digital UHF / Digital UHFII
l
FH 915 Plus
l
Satel
2. Internal Cellular
l
Auto, Digital UHF I/II GSM,FH915 + GSM, General Internal GSM, Satel GSM,
l
Digital UHF CDMA
l
TCP/IP
3. External Radio
l RE-S1
l Satel, SRL-35
TR-35
4. External Cellular
l
AirLink CDMA (MUDP) for base
l AirLink GPRS for rover
l AirLink CDMA for rover
l
l
l
l
Generic CDMA for rover
Generic GSM, MultiTech GSM, Siemens TC35
TCP/IP for base
You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular modem) or UHF modem (Radio). The dialog content depends on
the receiver model selected.
6. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
107
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a
connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not
have a GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always
checked. The connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable. Note: Topcon
Generic selection will work with all receiver models which were manufactured before GR-3 receiver.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the rover receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From DGPS Format list, select the format for the differential corrections data, which the rover radio
modem will receive (For the Generic NMEA this field is hidden).
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the rover receiver antenna used.
6. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is
opened. Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
7. If needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to several rovers, you need activate
the Multiple Ports option. To do this, click the Peripherals button. The Peripherals dialog is opened.
Here you can select the number of ports to use for base output.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do
this, select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the
top left corner.
9. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
7. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover Modem
To configure the modem connection (for User Base corrections only):
1. Select either Receiver, or Controller depending on whose modem will use for communication.
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
8. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover Radio
The rover radio is intended for receiving differential corrections. The content of the dialog depends on the
selected corrections type .
108
For the User Base corrections
You can set GSM/CDMA modem (Cellular modem) or UHF modem (Radio). The dialog content depends on
the receiver model selected.
To configure the radio modem:
1. In the Device Type field select which type of Radio Modem you will use: Internal Radio, or Internal Cellular, or External Radio, or External Cellular (for Topcon Generic, HiPer II, HiPer V, GR-3,GR-5, NET
G3).
2. In the Device Model field select model of the modem (for Topcon Generic, HiPer SR,HiPer II, HiPer V,
GR-3,GR-5, NET G3). For HiPer SR receivers, the Long LINK modem does not require any additional settings.
3. For Internal Radio, External Radio, External Cellular specify the Baud rate for the Port to which the
radio is connected.]
Note: Sometimes during modem connection, for the "Auto" baud rate selection of the modem, the baud rate
could not be set. The software creates an error message for this case: ” Modem baud rate could not be
determined automatically. Please run TRU (see Help for details) or specify baud rate in configuration”.
See here how to resolve the issue.
4. For External Radio, External Cellular specify communication parameters for the receiver Port that the
radio is connected to: Parity, the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits, which are specific to the
connected modem.
5. If you use an AirLink CDMA or GPRS external cellular modem, select the Modem Register option from
the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner to register the radio modem.
More...
6. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings.
7. Click Next to specify the base and rover modem radio parameters as required.
For the Beacon corrections
If the Beacon Corrections from BR-1 check box is selected (in the Config: Beacon dialog ), this dialog
appears.
To configure the BR-1 connection:
109
1. Select either Receiver, or Controller depending on whose BR-1 will use for communication.
2. In the Port Connected to BR-1 panel specify the Baud rate for the Port to which the BR-1 is connected (Bluetooth or COM1).
3. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
SBAS Setup
This dialog opens for SBAS/Autonomous corrections.
To configure SBAS:
1. For all new Topcon receivers that support automatic tracking, you can select one of two options for use
of SBAS satellites: Best Available or Custom.
Note : If the Topcon Generic receiver was selected in the Rover Receiver dialog, custom setup is
required. Not more than two SBAS satellites can be enabled for tracking in Topcon Generic receiver.
2. For custom selection, select the boxes near the PRN numbers of the satellites as required.
Note: All satellites can be selected. The satellite most available from those selected will be used in
DGPS solution.
l PRN #, Name and Type: These columns will list all possible SBAS PRN numbers with the
respective names of the satellites and types of satellite systems.
l GPS #: This PRN # applies only to the Topcon Generic receiver. One of currently unused GPS
numbers should be selected in this column to be able to track this satellite in Satellite View dialog. To change, click GPS number and select the appropriate number from the pop-up menu.
3. Enable/disable use of ionospheric corrections from the SBAS satellite when computing positions. It is
recommended to use ionospheric corrections.
l None: ionospheric corrections are not used
l Apply if avail: use ionospheric corrections if available
l Use sat only if avail: use only the satellites for which ionospheric corrections are available.
9. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Rover PP Setup
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog.
Enter information for the raw data logging in the rover receiver.
110
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l
User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking
or
(when
Automatic was selected in the Start Log field) in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. The Raw Data
Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the file name and select the folder in which to
save the file.
2. Log To: In this field, you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the RTK configuration is
5 seconds.
4. Start Log: If you select Manual, to start raw data logging click
in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. If
you select Automatic, the data logging is automatically started after clicking
in the Topo or Auto-
topo dialog.
5. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the *.tps
file.
6. Log Corrections: If the checkbox is selected, the base receiver correction data will be saved into :
l the current tps file, if you are using the receiver modem,
l the corrections.bin file in Jobs/ <current job name> folder, if you are using the controller modem.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
10. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Init Time
This dialog is opened if you have selected the Post Processing check box in the Receiver Make dialog. In this
dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions and
GNSS receiver type. After starting the logging of the raw data, the software will analyze the observation conditions and will show the Remaining Time field. The start value of the remaining time is equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
111
11. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Topo Survey
During a real-time stationary survey you can select two independent ways to save measured points to the current job: Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
, and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
112
12. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic Real Time DGPS/NMEA survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs:
by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 1 meter.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
13. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Stake Settings
To configure the parameters which will be used during a GPS stakeout:
1. In the Horizontal Distance Tolerance filed, enter the horizontal distance tolerance value. It is used to
determine when you are close enough to the point for the bull's eye to show up.
2. In the Screen Orientationfield you can select orientation of the screen during stakeout:
l North - the top of the screen is oriented to the north during the stakeout session;
l Moving Direction - the top of the screen is oriented to the direction of moving during the stakeout session;
l Moving Direction +North - is similar to the Moving Direction option, but the screen will be oriented
to the North direction when you are within three meters of the design point;
l Point/Azimuth- if you select this orientation type, the Orient Pt / Orient Az field will be added to the
Stake Point dialog. Here you can define a point or an azimuth to orient the screen top.
3. From the Display Reference drop-down list, select a object that will be displayed used in the Normal View
mode.
4. Optionally, you can specify an icon for the staked point. To do this, select the Display option from the pop-
up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
113
14. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Stake Survey
During a stakeout procedure you can select two independent ways to save stake out points to the current job:
Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
,
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration All and DGPS types solution will be considered. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
114
15. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Grade Stake Marking
This dialog allows you to mark the grade stake with the skyward rounding of the cut/fill decimal values to an
even number of feet (or meters).
To configure the settings for marking:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Working Stake Length field, enter the working length of the stake.
In Top Stake Spacing field, enter a value of top reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Bottom Stake Spacing field, enter a value of bottom reserve part of the stake for marking.
In Cut/Fill interval field, enter an even number you want the cut/fill to round to.
If all requirements are met, clicking Next opens the next Stake Settings dialog. More..
For instance if the cut is 0.8 and the bottom spacing is 0.5, we will round up to a cut of 2.0 (assuming 1.0 interval) and place the mark at 1.2 above ground:
16. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Stake Settings
In the Store Staked Point As fields you can set the parameters for storing staked points:
115
1. In the Point field, select a method to set the name for the first staked point. The initial point name can
be set to:
l Design point name.
l Next point name.
l Design point with a pre-defined prefix (that is, stk_01, where “stk_” is the prefix).
l Design point with a pre-defined suffix. The choice of the default prefix or suffix appears only
when the corresponding item is chosen from the drop-down menu.
l Design Point plus Constant. A specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate the staked point name. For instance, if the constant specified is 1000, and the design point
is 100, the staked point would be named 1100 (that is, 100+1000). If the design point is alphanumeric, the constant is appended to the name. For example, for the design point ALPHA, the
corresponding staked out point is named ALPHA1000.
l Range Start. Any start value of a range can be selected.
2. The Note can be set to either Design pointname, Design point with a prefix, or Design point with a suffix. Also, it can be Station & Offset information. If the Station & Offset option is activated, an edit box
for entering an alphanumeric prefix appears. For the United States, this prefix is “Sta”, for the international markets the prefix is “Cha”, and for the Korean/Japanese markets the prefix is “No”. With this
option activated, depending on the choice for the prefix, MAGNET Field automatically generates one
note for each stakeout point: Sta5+5.5R5.0, Cha505.5R5.0, or No.5+5.5R5.0 respectively.
17. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Note: If the SBAS/Autonomous correction is selected, the Track SBAS Satellites is always checked.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellation to be used for position computation for
Standalone, DGPS and RTK solutions:
116
l
ALL :
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
l If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals are
available.
l If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
l
l
l
l
l
117
l
If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware
and firmware which supports the selected signals.
18. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Advanced
In this dialog you can select the signal processing parameters:
1. By default the Multipath Reduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing technique for reduction of C/A code phase multipath and C/A carrier phase multipath. This option is useful
for collecting raw data near from metallic objects, or trees and high buildings.
2. If the GNSS receiver is collecting raw data in high-vibration environment, we recommend to select
High-Vibration Environment (QLL) to enable Quartz Lock Loop technology to minimize the vibration-induced impact on acquisition and tracking capabilities of the TPS receiver.
3. Click Next. The wizard will open the last screen to create the Real Time DGPS/NMEA configuration.
19. Real Time DGPS/NMEA: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the
database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is
stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
4. Restart Epoch Counter if Solution changes: when selected , counting epochs for will stop if the specified solution is lost and will resume after it is found.
PP Static Survey
Using this type you can configure one GNSS receiver to collect raw data (*.tps file) on a measured point. For
each measured point MAGNET field creates a *.tps file. You can select where to store the file: in the GNSS
receiver or in the controller. The Points dialog displays coordinates of the measured points in the standalone
position only. To obtain the precise coordinates of the measured point(s), import the collected raw data file(s)
to MAGNET Tools for post - processing.
118
1. PP Static: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
2. In the field Type select the PP Static configuration.
3. Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new point.
To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in
the top left corner.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Static configuration.
2. PP Static: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receiver, select the vendor which developed the receiver from the list in
the Base field. If you will work without a receiver, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the
simulation parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Static configuration.
3. PP Static: Static Receiver
To configure the static receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the static receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the static receiver antenna used.
5. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is opened.
Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
119
6. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do
this, select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the
top left corner.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Static configuration.
4. PP Static: Base PP Setup
Enter information for the raw data logging in the base receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking the Start Occupations
button in the Static Occupation dialog. The Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where
you can enter the file name and select the folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To:In this field you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the PP Static configuration is 15 seconds.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Static configuration.
5. PP Static: Occupations Times
In this dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions and GNSS receiver type. To start logging data, in the Static Occupation dialog click the Start Occ
button. The software will analyze the observation conditions and shows the Remaining Time field. The start
value of the remaining time is equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Static configuration.
120
6. PP Static: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellations for logging to the *. tps file.
l
ALL :
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
l If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals are
available.
l If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default, the
L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l
l
l
121
L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
l
l
l
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware
and firmware which supports the selected signals.
8. PP Static: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the
database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is
stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
PP Kinematic Survey
Post Processing Kinematic implies two receivers. One is fixed on a control point with known coordinates.
Other receiver is moving along some trajectory. Using this type you can configure both GNSS receivers to
collect raw data (*.tps file). You can select where to store the file: in the GNSS receiver or in the controller.
122
To obtain the precise coordinates of the measured points, import the collected raw data files to MAGNET Tools
for post - processing.
1. PP Kinematic: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
2. In the field Type select the PP Kinematic configuration.
3. Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new point.
To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in
the top left corner.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
2. PP Kinematic: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receivers, select the vendor which developed the Base receiver and Rover
receiver from the list in the Base and Rover fields.
If you will work without receivers, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the simulation parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
3. PP Kinematic: Base Receiver
To configure the base receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the base receiver you are using and enter its Serial Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the base receiver antenna used.
123
5. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is
opened. Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
6. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do
this, select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the
top left corner.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
4. PP Kinematic: Base PP Setup
Enter information for the raw data logging in the base receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking the Start Base button in
the Start Base dialog. The Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the
file name and select the folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To:In this field you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the PP Kinematic
configuration is 5 seconds.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
5. PP Kinematic: Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a
connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not
have a GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always
checked. The connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable. Note: Topcon
Generic selection will work with all receiver models which were manufactured before GR-3 receiver.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the rover receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the rover receiver antenna used.
124
5. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is opened.
Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
6. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do this,
select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left
corner.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
6. PP Kinematic: Rover PP Setup
Enter information for the raw data logging in the rover receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l
2.
3.
4.
5.
User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking
or
(when
Automatic was selected in the Start Log field) in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. The Raw Data
Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the file name and select the folder in which to
save the file.
Log To: In this field, you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the PP Kinematic configuration is 5 seconds.
In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the *.tps
file.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
7. PP Kinematic: Init Time
In this dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions
and GNSS receiver type. After starting the logging of the raw data, the software will analyze the observation conditions and will show the Remaining Time field. The start value of the remaining time is equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
125
8. PP Kinematic: Topo Survey
During stationary survey you can select two independent ways to save measured points to the current job:
Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
,
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for
selection depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. What is displayed in the list for
selection depends on the type of selected survey. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
126
9. PP Kinematic: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs:
by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 1 meter.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP Kinematic configuration.
10. PP Kinematic: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellations for logging to the *. tps file.
l
ALL :
l
l
l
127
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default,
the L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals
are available.
l If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default,
the L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
l
l
l
l
l
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware
and firmware which supports the selected signals.
12. PP Kinematic: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
128
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
PP DGPS
Post Processing Differential GPS implies two receivers. One is fixed on a control point with known coordinates.
Other receiver is moving along some trajectory. Using this type you can configure both GNSS receivers to collect
raw data (*.tps file). You can select where to store the file: in the GNSS receiver or in the controller. To obtain
the sub meter accuracy, import the collected raw data files to MAGNET Tools for post - processing.
1. PP DGPS: Configuration
To add / edit a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the Configurations list.
2. In the field Type select the PP DGPS configuration.
3. Optionally, you can set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new point.
To do this, select the Point Properties option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in
the top left corner.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
2. PP DGPS: Receiver Make
1. If you will work with real GNSS receivers, select the vendor which developed the Base receiver and Rover
receiver from the list in the Base and Rover fields.
If you will work without receivers, select the Simulation Mode check box. You can set the simulation parameters in the Simulation Setup dialog.
2. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
3. PP DGPS: Base Receiver
To configure the base receiver:
129
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a
connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not
have a GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always
checked. The connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the base receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the base receiver antenna used.
5. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is
opened. Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
6. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do
this, select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the
top left corner.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
4. PP DGPS: Base PP Setup
Enter information for the raw data logging in the base receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking the Start Base button in
the Start Base dialog. The Raw Data Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the
file name and select the folder in which to save the file.
2. Log To:In this field you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the PP DGPS configuration is 1 seconds.
4. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the
*.tps file.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
5. PP DGPS: Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
130
1. The Ext. Receiver box is enabled for a controller that has an internal GNSS receiver. You can select a connection with the internal GNSS receiver or any external GNSS receiver. If the controller does not have a
GNSS receiver or the software is installed on the computer, the Ext. Receiver box is always checked. The
connection for the external receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial Cable. Note: Topcon Generic selection
will work with all receiver models which were manufactured before GR-3 receiver.
2. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the rover receiver you are using and enter its Serial
Number.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not be used.
4. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the rover receiver antenna used.
5. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Antenna Height button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The Antenna Setup dialog is opened.
Here you can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height.
6. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver's internal battery if it is available. To do this,
select the Receiver Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left
corner.
7. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
6. PP DGPS: Rover PP Setup
Enter information for the raw data logging in the rover receiver.
1. File name: You can select the way of creating of the file name:
l Default - the name of the *.tps file will be set automatically,
l
User Defined - the name of the *tps file will be set by you after clicking
or
(when
Automatic was selected in the Start Log field) in the Topo or Autotopo dialog. The Raw Data
Logging dialog will be opened, where you can enter the file name and select the folder in which to
save the file.
2. Log To: In this field, you can select the device where the raw data will be stored: in Receiver or in Controller.
3. Logging Rate: Select the data logging interval in seconds. The default values for the PP DGPS configuration is 1 seconds.
4. In the Min SVs field select the minimum number of the tracked satellites to start the logging of the *.tps
131
file.
5. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
7. PP DGPS: Init Time
In this dialog you can change the default settings of the occupation time for the different observation conditions and GNSS receiver type. After starting the logging of the raw data, the software will analyze the
observation conditions and will show the Remaining Time field. The start value of the remaining time is
equal of the initialization time for the given observation conditions.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
8. PP DGPS: Topo Survey
During stationary survey you can select two independent ways to save measured points to the current job:
Precise and Quick. In the Topo dialog or Stake dialog, the Precise way will be activated by clicking
and the Quick way will be activated by clicking
,
.
In the Precise area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the PP DGPS configuration All type solution will be considered. More...
2. Measure Continuously: select the check box to log measurements continuously and stop them manually when required.
3. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If needed, you can change the default number (3) of measurements.
4. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of
measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
5. Auto Store : select the check box to enable auto-storing positions for the average mode.
In the Quick area you can set the following parameters:
1. Solution: for the PP DGPS type All types solutions will be considered. More...
2. Average: the field allows you to set a specific number of measurements for logging and average them
for storing the position. If required, you can change the default number (1) of measurements.
132
3. Precision: select the check box to consider the threshold of the horizontal and vertical precisions of measurement to store the position. The default values are 0.25 m and 0.400 m, respectively.
Note: Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of the
button from any in the Topo and
Stake dialog in GPS+ mode.
Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
9. PP DGPS: Auto Topo Survey
For for auto-storing positions in the dynamic survey:
1. Solution: from the drop-down list, select the solution type for each position computation as required.
More...
2. Method : from the drop-down list, select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs:
by time, by horizontal distance, by slope distance or by elevation.
3. Interval: in the field, enter the value for the selected method:
l in seconds for the By Time method. Default value is 1 second.
l in meters for the By Horiz Dist, By Slope Dist and By Elevation. Default value is 1 meter.
4. Click Next. The wizard will open the corresponding screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
10. PP DGPS: Tracking
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the satellites tracking in the receiver:
l
l
l
l
Select Track BDS Satellites — to track BeiDou satellites.
Select Track IOV Satellites — to track Galileo satellites.
Select Track SBAS Satellites — to track SBAS satellites.
Select Track QZSS Satellites — to track QZSS satellites.
Select one of the following checkboxes to configure the signal tracking for satellites::
l
l
l
Select Track L5 Signal — to track GPS L5 and QZSS L5 signals.
Select Track L2C Signal — to track GPS L2C, GLONASS C/A L2, QZSS L2C and BeiDou B2 signals.
Select Track GLO P Signal — to track GLONASS P-codes on L1 and L2.
From the Satellite System list you can select a satellite constellation to be used for position computation for Standalone, DGPS solutions:
133
l
ALL :
GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus:
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus:
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the check box Track GLO L2P Signal is selected.
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
l If the Track QZSS Satellites checkbox is selected — QZSS satellites will be used. By default,
the L1C/A signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the L2C signals
are available.
l If the Track SBAS Satellites checkbox is selected — SBAS satellites will be used. By default,
the L1C/A signals are available.
GPS - GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signal check box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected.
GPS + GLONASS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
GPS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default,
the B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are
available.
GPS + GLONASS + BDS:
l GPS satellites with L1C/A, L1P and L2P signals, plus
l L5 signals, if the Track L5 Signalcheck box is selected;
l L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l GLONASS satellites with L1C/A, L1P signals, plus
l
l
l
l
l
134
L2C signals, if the Track L2C Signal check box is selected;
l L2P signals, if the Track GLO L2P Signal check box is selected.
If the Track BDS Satellites checkbox is selected — BeiDou satellites will be used. By default, the
B1 signals are available. If the Track L2C Signal checkbox is selected, the B2 signals are available.
l
l
Note: The selected configuration for tracking and positioning will work properly if you're using the hardware and
firmware which supports the selected signals.
11. PP DGPS: Advanced
In this dialog you can select the following signal processing parameters:
1. By default the Multipath Reduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing technique
for reduction of C/A code phase multipath and C/A carrier phase multipath. This option is useful for collecting raw data near from metallic objects, or trees and high buildings.
2. If the GNSS receiver is collecting raw data in high-vibration environment, we recommend to select HighVibration Environment (QLL) to enable Quartz Lock Loop technology to minimize the vibrationinduced impact on acquisition and tracking capabilities of the TPS receiver.
3. Click Next. The wizard will open the last screen to create the PP DGPS configuration.
12. PP DGPS: Miscellaneous
In this dialog you can you to customize the user interface:
1. Display coordinates after measurement: when selected, computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a GPS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database.
2. Prompt for antenna height: when selected, prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is stored.
3. Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.
Other settings
In this part you can find the description of configuration of external devices and modems.
Antenna Setup
To set up the GPS antenna:
135
1. Select the model of the Topcon Antenna if available for selection (for instance, HiPer V, GR-5, GR3).
2. In the Height panel you can view/edit:
l the value of the antenna height,
l the method used to measure the antenna height:
l Vertical - measured from the ground point to the antenna reference point (ARP) located
on the bottom of the receiver.
l Slant - measured from the ground point to the antenna slant height measure mark
(SHMM).
l the value of the adapter height (adapter - an additional device which can be set between a GPS
receiver and a rod).
3. For the external GNSS antenna you can enter its Serial Number.
4. Optionally, you can:
l to use relative antenna calibration for the base(the default is the use of absolute calibrations). To
do this, select the Use relative calibration option from the pop-up menu that displays by click-
ing
l
in the top left corner. This selection is used when the base transmits data correction
to a rover with the relative calibration.
to correct calculate the height of the ground point, where the rover is installed. To do this, select
the Relative calibrations on Base option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner. This selection is only used when the relative calibration is selected
for the corresponding base receiver.
Note: This option is available for Network RTK and RTK types.
5. Click
to save the settings.
Receiver Settings
When an external power supply is used at the base, and the receiver charger mode is turned on, it supplies
power to the receiver battery. You can use an external power supply without charging the receiver battery.
To do this:
136
1. Select the Turn Charger Mode Off check box.
2. Click
to save the setting.
Point Properties
Set a value to increment/ decrement the survey point number when adding a new point.
Raw Data Logging
Enter the File Name for the *.tps file in which to log raw data.
Tracking
In this dialog you can configure the GNSS receiver to track the satellite systems and satellite signals and to select
a satellite constellation to be used for position computation for Standalone, DGPS and RTK solutions for the following GPS+ survey types:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Network RTK
RTK
MAGNET Relay
MAGNET DGPS
Real Time DGPS/NMEA
PP Static
PP Kinematic
PP DGPS
RTK Settings
This dialog allows you to set the following parameters to configure the RTK engine.
In the Ambiguity box you can select the initial confidence level to the fixed RTK solution and defines the time
period at which the ambiguity resolution is performed:
l
137
Level: The RTK engine has 3 levels of confidence when fixing integer ambiguities, Low, Medium and
High which correspond to the indicator's 95%, 99.5% and 99.9% thresholds, respectively. The receiver's
l
l
RTK engine will constantly update the confidence level indicator as new measurements arrive. Once
this parameter exceeds the selected threshold, the engine will fix up all or some of the integer ambiguities. The corresponding position estimate will be marked as fixed RTK solution. The higher the confidence level specified, the longer the integer ambiguity search time. By default, the Medium is set.
Resolution Period: defines the interval in seconds at which the ambiguity resolution is performed.
This interval is used for Extrapolation and Matched Epoch modes.
Correction Period sets:
l the differential interval for the base station, when you configure a Base receiver
l the same interval to output the RTK position (by the rover receiver), when you configure a
Rover receiver.
By default, 1 second is set. Any updating of the value is only effective in the Matched Epoch mode.
l
l
l
Accept noisy observables - After clicking the checkbox, the RTK engine will use less rigid thresholds
for computing RTK solution. This parameter allows the user to speed up the ambiguity fixing procedure, but it also decreases the reliability of the ambiguity resolution. This parameter can be used for
abnormal survey conditions only:
l When a rover receiver gets VRS corrections from a network, we recommend to select the mode
for a poor VRS network geometry when the receiver is located at the boundary of the VRS coverage area and the nearest physical station is located at a great distance.
l When a rover receiver gets the correction from another receiver, we recommend to select the
mode when the rover receiver is located close to metallic objects, high building and trees.
Set IF Baseline - After clicking the checkbox, the RTK engine will use the ionosphere-free combination when the baseline length is greater or equal to the entered value.
Set PDOP Mask - After clicking the checkbox, the rover receiver will not compute the RTK position
if the computed PDOP exceeds the specified threshold value.
Solution Types
There can be a combination of the following solution types:
l
l
l
Fixed mmGPS+: positions were Fixed Only solution with mmGPS+ calculated height.
Fixed Only: positions were computed by RTK engine using the carrier phase measurements from Base
and Rover receivers. Integer ambiguities were fixed.
Float mmGPS+: positions were Float solution with mmGPS+ calculated height.
138
l
l
l
l
Float: positions were computed by RTK engine using the carrier phase measurements from base and rover
receivers. Integer ambiguities, however, were NOT fixed (their float estimates were used instead).
DGPS: positions were achieved using the pseudo-range measurements from base and rover receivers.
All: positions were computed using all the epochs accepted, including autonomous solutions.
Auto: autonomous positions were computed when differential corrections are not available.
Peripherals for the base receiver
Select the Multiple Ports check box, and then select the number of ports to use for base output if required.
Additional dialogs will appear later in the wizard sequence to setup parameters for each port.
Peripherals for the rover receiver
In this dialog you can select any option to work with peripherals of the rover receiver:
1. Select the NMEA Ports check box to configure the output of the NMEA messages. Select the number of
ports from the drop-down list that appears and click
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ard sequence to setup parameters for each port and specify NMEA messages for output. More...
Select the Multiple Ports check box and then select the number of ports to use for rover output if required.
Additional dialogs will appear later in the wizard sequence to setup parameters for each port. This check
box is available for RTK type. Note: Use only one port (one radio modem) to receive corrections from the
base.
Select the Depth Sounder check box to configure a depth sounder. Click Parameters to specify settings.
More...
Select the mmGPS+ check box to configure the mmGPS+ system. Click Parameters to specify settings.
This check box is available for RTK and Network RTK types. More...
Select the External Laser check box to configure the laser device that can be connected either directly to
the Controller or through the Receiver. Click Parameters to specify settings. More...
Select the Use Repeater check box to configure the repeater that can be connected either directly to the
Controller or through the Receiver. Click Parameters to specify settings. This check box is available for
RTK type. More...
Output NMEA
To configure the NMEA Messages for output:
139
. Additional dialogs will appear later in the wiz-
1. Select the check boxes near the types of messages as required. More...
2. Select the Set GP as Receiver Talker ID check box to instruct the receiver to use "GP" as Talker ID
in appropriate NMEA sentences generated. This enables support of Google Maps that cannot recognize default "GN" or "GL" as Talker IDs in these messages.
3. Enter the Interval in seconds in which the application will output the messages (up to 0.1 sec.).
List of NMEA messages
The following NMEA Messages are available for output:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
GSA to output the operation mode of the GNSS receiver, the satellite used for positioning, and DOP.
GLL to output data on the current latitude/longitude and positioning mode.
VTG to output the traveling direction and velocity.
GRS to output the residual error of distance for each satellite. This is used to support RAIM.
ZDA to output the UTC, day, month, year, and local time zone.
GST to output the statistics of position errors.
GNS to output data on time, position, and positioning of GPS+GLONASS (GNSS).
GGA to output data on time, position, and positioning.
GSV to output the number of satellites, satellite number, elevation angle, azimuthal angle, and SNR.
HDT to output the direction (heading).
P_ATT to output attitude parameters.
RMC to output time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GNSS navigation receiver.
ROT to output rate of turn.
GMP to output GNSS map projection fix data.
Configure Depth Sounder
If required, select Simulation Mode to test and demo depth sounder functionality without actually having a
depth sounder in water.
To configure the Depth Sounder:
1. Select the Model of the depth sounder.
2. Set the Max Depth Age in second. This value determinate the age of the depth measurement which
will be used in the future positioning calculation together with GPS measurements.
3. Set Depth Sounder Port Setting including port, parity, data, baud and stop rates to connect to the
device.
140
When the configuration is used, the depth sounder icon( ) will appear on the status bar of any measurement
dialog.
mmGPS+ Parameters
In mmGPS aided RTK survey, a wireless sensor connected to the Rover picks up the signals from the laser transmitter for accurate (millimeter) elevations.
Note: When measuring the height of the Rover antenna, include the height of the sensor with a 5/8 inch plug.
To configure the mmGPS+:
1. Select the Receiver port, which is connected to the mmGPS+ Sensor.
2. Select the Sensor Gain to adjust the gain on the mmGPS+ Sensor. Select Auto to automatically control the
mmGPS receiver’s detection level of the transmitter’s signal.
3. Enter the Height Difference Limit value to set the threshold for the difference between GPS and
mmGPS+ height measurements. If the GPS+ height and mmGPS+ height differ by more than the amount
entered, the mmGPS+ icon will change to warn the user.
Laser Configuration
In this dialog you can configure the external laser:
1. Select the laser Manufacturer. Currently MAGNET Field supports MDL, Leica and Laser Technology,
Inc.
2. For the Laser Technology you can select the Model of the instrument.
3. Select the Type of laser measurement system if it uses Encoding or not.
4. If required, enter the offset value for the laser in the Mount Offset field.
5. In the Device field select Receiver if the external laser is connected with the receiver, or select Controller
if the external laser is connected with the controller.
6. Specify communication parameters for the receiver Port that the laser is connected to: Baud rate, Parity,
the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits.
Repeater Configuration
If required, the you can use an external radio modem or receiver with an internal radio modem as a stand-alone
repeater to increase the range between the Base and Rover.
To configure the repeater:
141
1. In the Model field, select model of the modem: either Digital UHF, or Digital UHF II, or RE-S1, or
Satel.
2. In the Connect Type field, select Receiver if a modem is connected with the receiver, or select Controller if the external modem is connected with the controller.
3. In the Connect Port Setup field, specify communication parameters for the receiver/controller Port
that the repeater is connected to: Baud rate, Parity, the number of Data bits, the number of Stop bits.
Note: If you have selected Receiverand Port C, the internal modem of the GNSS receiver will be used
as a repeater, and you cannot use the receiver for survey.
4. Click Next to continue the repeater configuration:
l For Digital UHF, Digital UHF II see Radio Param.
l For RE-S1 see Radio Param.
l For Satel see Radio Param.
Radio Parameters for Digital UHF / Digital UHF II and TRL-35
In this dialog you can configure internal radio modem Digital UHF and Digital UHF II, external modem
TRL-35. Also you can configure modem Digital UHF and Digital UHF II as repeater:
1. Select the output Power value for the radio modem.
2. Select an appropriate operation Protocol for data transmitting/receiving:
l Simplex protocol is ArWest’s proprietary protocol. This protocol is used for Digital UHF and
TRL-35 radio modem.
l PDL protocol can selected for any modem types.
l TrimTalk protocol is Trimble protocol and it can be used for any modem types.
l Satel FCS Off protocol is Satel protocol without Free Channel Scan (FCS). The protocol can be
used for Digital UHF II only.
l Satel FCS On protocol is Satel protocol with Free Channel Scan (FCS). The protocol can be
used for Digital UHF II only.
3. Select the type of Modulation for the radio modem. The modulation type is defined by the modem
type and the selected protocol :
l you can select between DBPSK and DQPSK modulation for Digital UHF and TRL-35 radio
modems with Simplex protocol.
l you can select GMSK modulation for Digital UHF and TRL-35 radio modems with PDL and
TrimTalk protocol.
l you can select between GMSK and 4-level FSK for Digital UHF II radio modem with PDL protocol.
142
you can select GMSK for Digital UHF II and TRL-35 radio modems with TrimTalk protocol.
l you can select 4FSK for Digital UHF II radio modem with Satel FCS Off/ Satel FCS On protocol.
4. In the Spacing field you can select:
l 12.5 kHz- to provide more jam-resistant communication with low baud rate (4800 bps for GMSK and
9600 bps for 4-level FSK)
l 25 kHz - to provide communication with high baud rate (9600 bps for GMSK and 19200 bps for 4level FSK)
l
Do not set- to save the previous setting of the Spacing parameter.
l
The parameter depends on the chosen protocol, modulation type and link rate.
5. In the Scrambling field you can select:
l On or (1-255) to activate Scrambling option — more robust data communication over high interference areas.
l Off to deactivate the Scrambling option.
l Don't set up to save the previous setting of the Scrambling option.
Scrambling option depends on the selected protocol and modem type:
for the Simplex protocol you can activate, or deactivate, or stay previous Scrambling setting for
Digital UHF and TRL-35 radio modems. To activate the option you need select a seed for pseudorandom sequence generator (the value from 1 to 255).
l for the PDL protocol you can activate, or deactivate, or stay previous Scrambling setting for Digital
UHF, Digital UHF II and TRL-35 radio modems.
l for the Trim Talk protocol this option is:
l automatically set for Digital UHF II radio modem.
l saved previous Scrambling setting for Digital UHF and TRL-35 radio modems .
l for the Satel protocol this option is automatically switched on for Digital UHF II radio modem.
6. In the FEC field (Forward Error Correction) you can select:
l On to activate the technique to control errors in data transmission over unreliable or noisy communication channels.
l Off to deactivate the FEC option.
l Don't set up to save the previous setting of the FEC option.
l
FEC option depends on the selected protocol and modem type:
l
143
for the Simplex protocol you can activate, or deactivate, or stay previous FEC setting for Digital
UHF and TRL-35 radio modems.
l
l
l
for the PDL protocol you can activate, or deactivate, or stay previous FEC setting for Digital
UHF, Digital UHF II radio and TRL-35 modems.
for the Trim Talk protocol this option is:
l automatically switched off for Digital UHF II radio modem.
l saved previous FEC setting for Digital UHF and TRL-35 radio modems.
for the Satel protocol you can activate, or deactivate, or stay previous FEC setting for Digital
UHF II radio modem.
Parameters for FH 915 Plus and RE-S1
In this dialog you can configure FH 915 Plus and RE -S1 radio modem. Also you can configure modem RE S1 as repeater:
1. Select the output Power value for the radio modem.
2. Select the Channel number to set the one from ten channel to transmit date. In the corresponding rover
receiver you need to select the given channel number.
3. Set the operation Protocol. Select FH915 Ext protocol when the receiver will be used as repeater.
4. Select the Location to adjust the frequency range depending on the country.
Radio Parameters for Satel
In this dialog you can configure Satel radio modem:
1. Select the output Power value for the radio modem.
2. Set the operation Protocol.
3. Select an appropriate operation Protocol for data transmitting/receiving:
l Satel FCS Off protocol is Satel protocol without Free Channel Scan (FCS).
l Satel FCS On protocol is Satel protocol with Free Channel Scan (FCS).
l PDL protocol can selected for any modem types.
l TrimTalk (P) protocol is TrimTalk protocol, which you need to select for working with any
rovers receivers (not Trimble) with the TrimTalk protocol.
l TrimTalk (T) protocol is TrimTalk protocol, which you need to select for working with the
Trimble rovers receivers with the TrimTalk protocol.
4. Select the type of Modulation for the PDL protocol only. You can select between GMSK and 4-level
FSK.
144
Radio Parameters for internal and external GSM modems
In this dialog you can configure internal base and rover cellular modem for Digital UHF , Digital UHF II, Satel
GSM, FH 915+ GSM, General Internal GSM,and Auto detect device model.
For Base radio:
1. Enter the PIN of the Base modem SIM card.
2. Optionally, you can select the bearer service type for base cellular modem. To do this, select the Show
Bearer Service option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
3. From the list in the Bearer Service field you can select the bearer service type for base cellular modem in
the CSD mode. By default, Don't set up is selected.
For Rover radio:
1. Enter the PIN of the Rover modem SIM card.
2. In the Base Phone Number field, enter the base receiver phone number that will be used for the correction
transmission.
3. The desired base phone number you can select from the Phone number list field. To add the base phone
number to the Phone number list press the Add button. To remove any phone number from the field,
select the desired phone number and press the Delete button.
4. Optionally, you can select the bearer service type for rover cellular modem. To do this, select the Show
Bearer Service option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking
in the top left corner.
5. From the list in the Bearer Service field you can select the bearer service type for rover cellular modem in
the CSD mode. By default, Don't set up is selected.
Modem Dialup
In this dialog you can configure internal/external cellular modem of the receiver for the following GPS+ survey
types:
l
l
145
Network RTK
RTK: for Base receiver
l
l
MAGNET Relay: for Base receiver
Network DGPS
Internet Address
In this dialog you can configure settings for Internet connection for the following GPS+ survey types:
l
l
l
Network RTK
RTK: for Base receiver
Network DGPS
Radio Parameters for AirLink CDMA (MUDP)
In this dialog you can configure external cellular modem AirLink CDMA(MUDP):
1. Enter an Internet Address to Add that will be used for the connection between the base and several
rovers using UDP protocol:.
2. The desired server address you can select from the Ip Address list field. To add the entered address to
the IP Address list, press the Add button. To remove any address from the IP Address list, select a
desired address and press the Delete button.
Rover GPRS Parameters
In this dialog you can set the IP address of the base modem for AirLink GPRS rover device model.
1. Enter the GPRS address of the base in the Base GPRS Address field.
2. The desired base GPRS address you can select from the IP Addresses list field. To add the GPRS
address to the IP Addresses list press the Add button. To remove any base GPRS address from the
field, select the desired phone number and press the Delete button.
Rover CDMA Parameters
In this dialog you can set the IP address of the base modem for AirLink CDMA rover device model.
1. Enter the CDMA address of the base radio in the Base CDMA Address field.
2. The desired base CDMA address you can select from the IP Addresses list field. To add the CDMA
address to the IP Addresses list press the Add button. To remove any base CDMA address from the
field, select the desired phone number and press the Delete button.
146
Rover CDPD Parameters
In this dialog you can set the IP address of the base modem for Generic CDMA rover device model.
1. Enter the CDPD address of the base radio in the Base CDMA Address field.
2. The desired base CDPD address you can select from the IP Addresses list field. To add the CDPD
address to the IP Addresses list press the Add button. To remove any base CDPD address from the field,
select the desired phone number and press the Delete button.
Hybrid Positioning
The Hybrid positioning mode allows you to simultaneously record the point coordinates from GPS rover receiver
and Total Station to the opened job. This option can be activated only for Robotic Total Station with reflector.
The GPS receiver and Robotic Total Station are connected to the job. The user can separately create own configuration for a GPS receiver and for Robotic Total Station and depending on survey task select either the GPS or
Optical instrument by clicking
or
at the home screen.
To activate Hybrid Positioning select the appropriate check box in the Settings dialog. When the Hybrid Pos-
itioning is enabled, the icon
is displayed in the home screen.
When you activate the Hybrid Positioning, you can:
1. Perform resection with new features. More...
2. Automatically search for an Reflector
3. Automatically perform the localization (for five measured points) and for known parameters between
WGS-84 and Local coordinate systems:
l Load the Bing Maps for the Total Station measurements to the opened job .
l Send the coordinates measured by Total Station in WGS-84 coordinate system to Enterprise server.
In surveying process, if point coordinates determination are performed by the GPS+ receiver and the optical
device at the same time, it is required to mount the GPS antenna and the reflector. One of the possible solutions is
the usage of the A7 prism with the special adapter for the GPS antenna or GPS receiver. See the picture below:
147
For this case you need to select the corresponding prism for Foresight point in the Config:Survey Settings
dialog. For the prism the software will automatically use the predefined offset between ARP and horizontal
optical axis for calculating of the point elevation when Hybrid Positioning is selected.
If you do not have "Topcon A7 360" prism, you can create own prism (by selection <Add New> in the field
Prism in the Config:Survey Settings dialog), enter offset between ARP and horizontal optical axis and select
the Hybrid Positioning antenna offset check box.
If you select the Automatic Localization check box in the Settings dialog, first five points will be used for
calculating parameters between WGS-84 and Local coordinate systems. These parameters are saved in the
job and they can be automatically updated during next measurements in the Hybrid Positioning (if residuals
for these points will be less than for the previous set of points).
Also in the Hybrid positioning mode you can manually select localization points and use Grid to Ground
transformation.
148
If the localization are performed or Grid to Ground transformation is selected or a Grid coordinate system was
selected for Total Station measuring:
l
the Hybrid Lock icon (
l
icon automatically turns the Robotic Total Station to the reflector. To search the reflector, the software has
to have the coordinates of the occupation point (where the Robotic Total Station is set) and current coordinate of a point where the rod (with GPS antenna and reflector) is set in WGS -84 coordinate system.
the Bing Maps check box is available in the General tab of the Map Properties dialog. Select the check box
and click
) is available in SideShot-Direct and Resection 3D dialogs. Clicking on the
to load Bing Maps to the job.
Resection in Hybrid Positioning
Before performing resection you need activate Hybrid Positioning, select desired prism and select Hybrid positioning antenna offset check box and open Resection dialog.
There are four different scenarios to perform the resection procedure:
1. The desired Grid projection is defined in the job. Grid to Ground transformation is not selected. The GPS
and TS measurements are performed for each unknown point. The coordinates of the Occupation Point are
calculated in the current Grid coordinate system.
You measure first control point by Robotic Total Station, save it in the job and the software prompts to
measure GPS coordinate of the point and save it. After measuring two sets of coordinates for first point the
software prompts specify next control point. After saving second point the result screen displays total station measured value of angles and slope distances with estimate of accuracy. You can continue to measure
a other point (clicking Add button) or finish the measuring and calculate the occupation point coordinates
using two points (clicking Accept button) in the current Grid coordinate system. More...
2. The desired Grid projection is defined in the job. Grid to Ground transformation is selected. The relation
ship between Grid and Ground coordinate systems is known. Coordinates for both coordinate sets are displayed in the current coordinate system. The coordinates of the Occupation Point are calculated in the Grid
or Ground coordinate systems.
The routine of the resection procedure is equal scenario 1. More...
149
3. A Grid projection is not defined in the job. The user has coordinates of the control points (two points at
least) in the Ground coordinate system. For each control point TS and GPS measurements are
provided. The software automatically performs the localization between WGS-84 and Ground. The
coordinates of the Occupation Point are calculated in the Ground and WGS-84 coordinate systems.
You need either to enter a new point name and manually enter the desired coordinates or select from
the list, save the TS measurements for the point in the job. The software prompts to measure GPS
coordinate of the point and save it. Then the software prompts specify another control point. After saving second point the result screen displays total station measured value of angles and slope distances
with estimate of accuracy. You can continue to measure a next point (clicking Add button) or finish
the measuring and calculate the occupation point coordinates using two points (clicking Accept button). After calculating the occupation point coordinates in the Ground coordinate system, the software
automatically performs the localization between WGS-84 and Ground using the measured points.
More...
4. The coordinates of the control points (two points at least) in the Ground coordinate system imported in
the job. The desired Grid projection is defined in the job. For each control point TS and GPS measurements are provided. The software automatically performs the localization between Grid and
Ground. The coordinates of the Occupation Point are calculated in the Grid and Ground coordinate systems.
You need to import the set of points with coordinates in Ground coordinate system to the job. Then
select the desired Grid projection. After that, the select from the list desired point, save the TS measurements for the point in the job. The software prompts to measure GPS coordinate of the point and
save it. Then the software prompts specify another control point. After saving second point the result
screen displays total station measured value of angles and slope distances with estimate of accuracy.
You can continue to measure a next point (clicking Add button) or finish the measuring and calculate
the occupation point coordinates using two points (clicking Accept button). After calculating the occupation point coordinates in the Ground coordinate system, the software automatically performs the localization between Grid and Ground using the measured points. More...
Coordinate System
To specify the Coordinate System for the Job:
1. In Projection select the projection to be used from the drop-down list. Initially the list is empty. Click
to activate projections necessary for work. More...
150
2. Select the Use NADCON check box, available for all projections on NAD27 datum, to make the coordinates in MAGNET Field equal to the same from Corpscon (Coordinate Conversion Software).
3. Select the Use Grid/Ground check box to enable transformation to ground coordinates for surveying.
Click
to set transformation parameters. After closing the Coordinate System dialog, the default dis-
play system will be Ground.
Find out more on Grid to Ground transformation.
4. In Datum specify the datum as required for the projection selected. Select the datum from the drop-down
list.
Note: The NAD83 datum has three independent realizations in MAGNET Field with respect to the
WGS84 datum: NAD83, NAD83(ITRF96) and NAD83_NO_TRANS. More...
Click
to add a custom datum if necessary. More...
5. Select Geoid from the drop-down list. The job will refer to the selected geoid file to convert ellipsoidal
heights to elevations. Click
to add the geoid to the list. More...
Pre Defined CS
The Pre Defined CS dialog contains a list of cataloged projections divided by regions, that can be chosen for use
in the job.
To add a desired projection to the list in the Coordinate System dialog:
In the Pre-Defined panel:
l
l
l
l
l
Click the region node to expand the tree of available projections, and use the scroll bar to view the full list
of projections.
Highlight the name of the desired projection.
Use the arrow button to select the chosen projection in the Pre-Defined panel and insert it into the Active
panel.
Repeat the steps to add other projections.
Create a custom projection to the list of pre-defined ones by clicking the Custom button. More...
In the Active panel:
151
l
View all active projections.
l
Use
l
Click
to delete a highlighted projection from the Active panel if required.
to add the active projections to the drop-down list in the Coordinate System dialog.
Custom Projections
This dialog contains a list of custom (user-defined) projections.
l
l
l
l
Initially the Projection list is empty.
Click the Add button to create a new custom projection and add it to the list. More...
Click the Edit button to change a projection that was added to the list.
Click the Delete button to delete a highlighted projection from the list.
Custom Projection - 1
To create a new custom projection:
1. Enter a Name for the new projection.
2. Select a Type from the list of sample projections.
3. Select a Datum from the displayed list of datums, or click
to create a custom one (more...) and
then select it.
4. Enter the Region to which the projection belongs. If no region is specified, it will be added to the
Global list.
5. Enter a description (Note) for the projection.
6. Click Next to enter the new projection specifications depending on the selected sample projection type.
More...
Custom Projection - 2
Depending on the Type of projection selected, you are prompted to fill in some of the following fields.
152
1. Enter the latitude (Lat0) and longitude (Lon0) of a point chosen as the origin on the central meridian of the
custom projection.
2. Enter the false Easting (East0 or E0) and Northing (North0 or N0) of the origin for the projection. These
constant values are added to all negative Eastings and Northings to get only positive values of Easting and
Northing.
3. Enter the Scale that sets a constant scale factor along the central meridian of the custom projection.
4. Enter the longitude of Central Meridian for the projection.
5. Enter the North and South latitudes bounding the area of the custom projection (NorthLat and SouthLat).
6. Enter the azimuth of the axis (AxisAzimuth) for the projection.
7. Click
to create the new projection and add it to the Projection list.
Note: The Latitudes are positive for the Northern Hemisphere, and negative for the Southern Hemisphere. The
Longitudes are positive for Eastern directions and negative for Western directions relative to the GMT line.
Custom Datums
This dialog contains a list of custom (user-defined) datums.
l
l
l
l
Initially the Datum list is empty.
Click the Add button to create a new custom datum and add it to the list. More...
Click the Edit button to change a datum that was added to the list.
Click the Delete button to delete a highlighted datum from the list.
Custom Datum - 1
To create a new custom datum:
1. Enter a Name for the new datum.
2. Select an Ellipsoid from the displayed list of ellipsoids, or click
to create a custom one (more...) and
then select it.
3. Enter a description (Note) for the datum.
4. Click Next to enter transformation parameters to convert from WGS84 to the new datum. More...
153
Custom Datum - 2
MAGNET Field uses the seven-parameters Helmert Transformation Strict Formula for datum transformation.
To create a custom datum:
1. In Offsets, enter the Datum to Space (WGS84) offsets: dX, dY, dZ.
2. In Rotations, enter the Datum to Space (WGS84) rotations: rX, rY, rZ, in seconds.
3. Enter the Scale in ppm.
4. Click
to create the new datum and add it to the Datum list.
Custom Ellipsoids
This dialog contains a list of custom (user-defined) ellipsoids.
l
l
l
l
Initially the Ellipsoid list is empty.
Click the Add button to create a new custom ellipsoid and add it to the list. More...
Click the Edit button to change an ellipsoid that was added to the list.
Click the Delete button to delete a highlighted ellipsoid from the list.
Custom Ellipsoid
To create a custom ellipsoid:
1. Enter a Name for the ellipsoid.
2. Change the values of ellipsoid semi-major equatorial axis (A) and inverse flattening (1/F) as required.
Note: By default, the A and 1/F fields contains the values for the most common reference ellipsoid
defined by WGS84.
3. In Note, enter a description for the ellipsoid.
4. Click
to create the new ellipsoid and add it to the list of all the available Ellipsoids.
154
Geoids List
Geoid is the physical reference surface of the Earth. Its shape reflects the distribution of mass inside the Earth.
Geoid undulations are important for converting GPS-derived ellipsoidal height differences to orthometric height
differences (elevations).
The Geoids List dialog contains a list of Geoids available for selection: the Name and Full Path
l
l
Initially the Geoid List is empty.
Click the Add button to add a new geoid to the list. More...
Note: Install the geoid file on the disk prior to adding it to the list. Some geoid files can be installed into the
Geoids folder during MAGNET Field installation. They are provided with the installation program as
Geoid File Format (.gff) files.
l
l
Click the Edit button to change a geoid that was added to the list.
Click the Remove button to delete a highlighted geoid from the list.
Add/Edit Geoid
In the Add/Edit Geoid dialog, select a Geoid file from disk and see the boundaries for the geoid. After being
chosen, the geoid file appears in the Geoids List dialog.
To add a geoid to the geoids list:
1. Select the Geoid Format of the geoid file to load.
2. Click Browse to navigate to the desired file on the disk, and select it.
l
l
3. Click
After the geoid is chosen,
After the geoid is chosen, you can see the boundary of the geoid application: the longitudes and latitudes of the north-west and south-east corners of the geoid boundary.
to add the selected geoid to the list of all the available Geoids in the jobs.
Grid/Ground Parameters
To set Grid/Ground parameters:
155
displays the path to the file.
1. In Parameters, select which set of parameters to enter: Scale factor (more...), Average Job Height
(more...) or Origin Point (more...).
2. In Origin Pt and Scale Factor modes directly enter the Combined Scale Factor to be used in the transformation. In any Parameters mode resulting combined scale factor will be displayed at the bottom of
the dialog for reference purposes.
3. In Avg Job Ht mode enter the Map Scale Factor from Ellipsoid to Grid to be used in the transformation.
4. In Scale Factor mode designate combined scale factor transformation direction. In Origin Pt and
Avg Job Ht modes this displays used direction.
5. Enter the Average Job Height to be used in the transformation.
6. Enter the angle value of Azimuth Rotation directly if it is known.
7. Click
to calculate the rotation from azimuths on Grid and Ground. More... Azimuths/Bearings
in turn can be calculated from points in the job. More...
8. In Scale Factor or Average Job Ht modes enter Offsets of the origin along the North and East axes.
These offsets are from the Geodetic North -> Ground North.
9. In Origin Pt mode select from map, list or enter the coordinates for the Origin Point.
10. In Origin Pt mode enter the coordinates for the Ground Point.
Learn more... about how to perform Grid/Ground transformation.
Compute Rotation
To calculate Rotation from azimuths on Ground and Grid:
l
l
You can either manually enter the Grid and Ground Azimuths or click the Compute button to calculate azimuth using points in the job that define the needed directions.
Click
to compute Rotation.
Compute Azimuth/Bearing
To compute the azimuth by two points that define the direction:
156
1. In From, enter the name of the initial point or select the point from the map
or the list
.
2. In To, enter the name of the terminal point or select the point from the map
3. Enter an angle to Add to Azimuth if required.
4. View the computed Azimuth.
or the list
.
Grid to Ground Transformation
MAGNET Field supports two methods for setting the relation between Grid and Ground coordinate systems.
One method performs scaling and rotation relative to some point of the job. The other method performs scaling
and rotation relative to the origin of the Grid coordinate system.
To get started with transformation:
and then the Coordinate System icon
.
1. Click the Configure icon 2. Select the desired projection through which the link will be found with some Ground coordinate system.
Only after selecting the projection the option of Grid to Ground transformation will become available.
3. To activate the Grid to Ground (or vice versa) transformation select the Use Grid/Ground check box.
4. Press
to select a desired transformation method (from "Origin Pt", "Avg Job Ht" and "Scale
Factor") and set the corresponding parameters for this method.
Find out more:
Creating Ground Projection Relative to a Point
Creating Ground Projection Relative to the Origin of Grid System
Parameters of transformation from the Grid to Ground coordinates can be used in GPS stake of road points. For
example, to stake a point at the distance of 100 meters from some point, you have to create a ground coordinate
system, which will work as a base coordinate system in GPS stake calculation. To do this, select the corresponding Grid and enter the average height of a desired portion of the road. The created ground coordinate system enables you to stake points at special distances in the grid system.
157
Creating Ground Projection Relative to a Point
If you know the coordinates of a point in both coordinate systems (Grid and Ground) and also rotation of
these systems, then to find the relation between Grid to Ground coordinate systems, select "Origin Pt" from
the Parameters list on the Grid/Ground Parameters screen.
This method calculates an offset vector in the horizontal plane between coordinates of a point (called the origin point) in the grid and ground coordinate systems and computes the ground coordinates from the grid
coordinates using this offset. If a rotation angle is present between these coordinate systems, MAGNET Field
can rotate a grid or ground coordinate system relative to this point. Also MAGNET Field takes into account a
scale factor between these coordinate systems. See the plot here.
After determining the relation between both coordinate systems, MAGNET Field will calculate ground
coordinates from the grid coordinate system and vice versa.
See an example of using this method below.
The current MAGNET Field job contains two sets of measured points:
l
l
One network of points measured by a GR-3 receiver from a reference station in Grid coordinate system, for example, SPC83 -Ohio(North).
Another network of points measured by a Topcon Total Station (GTS-220) in the Ground coordinate
system with the arbitrary choice of zero BS azimuth.
These networks have:
l
l
A common point - the point CP2 of the GPS network and point CP2_TS of the TS network. This
point is the origin point for our transformation.
A common line - the line between CP2 and CP6 points of the GPS network, and the line between
CP2_TS and CP6_TS of the TS network. The azimuths of this line in different networks will be used
for calculation of the rotation angle between both coordinate systems.
See Map View for the different networks here.
To perform Grid to Ground transformation for these networks:
1. Click
, select the desired Grid system (SPC83 -Ohio(North)) in the Projection field of the
Coordinate System screen.
158
2. Check the Use Grid / Ground box to use this transformation, and press
3.
4.
5.
6.
to open the Grid/Ground
Parameters screen.
Select "Origin Pt" in the Parameters field to activate this method.
Select the origin point in the Grid coordinate system (CP2 point) from the list.
Remove the coordinates of the selected point in the fields Northing and Easting, which MAGNET Field
automatically writes in the Grid coordinate system.
Type in the values of the Ground coordinates of the origin point (see the Grid/Ground Parameters screen
here).
in the Grid/Ground Parameters screen:
7. Clicking
l Calculates a combined scale factor for this point.
l Combines the GPS point with the TS point. After that, in the Ground coordinate system, the GPS
point will have horizontal coordinates of the corresponding TS point, and, in the Grid coordinate system, the TS point will have horizontal coordinates of the corresponding GPS point.
l Performs grid to ground transformation (and vice versa) taking into account the scale factor.
The Map displays the networks either in the Ground or Grid coordinate system.
To take into account the rotation between these two networks in this transformation:
1. As we see from Map View for the different networks, the grid azimuth is set by direction of the line CP2
- CP6, and the ground azimuth is set by direction of the same line in ground coordinate system (the line
CP2_TS - CP6_TS). MAGNET Field calculates the corresponding azimuth when you select the start and
end points of the line.
2. Click
in the Azimuth Rotation field. The Compute Rotation screen allows calculating Grid and
Ground azimuth to obtain rotation angle between two coordinate systems (see Grid to Ground Transformation Without Rotation).
3. Click the Compute button in the Ground line. In the Compute Azimuth screen, select the corresponding
points (that define the common line in the Ground coordinate system) from the list.
4. Click the Compute button in the Grid line. In the Compute Azimuth screen, select the corresponding points
(that define the common line in the Grid coordinate system) from the list.
5. The final rotation angle between two coordinate systems for our example is displayed in the Rotation field.
Click
to save this calculation.
6. The Grid/Ground Parameters screen contains all needed values to calculate the relation between the Grid
and Ground coordinate systems (see here). Click
159
in this screen.
7. The Grid to Ground transformation is successfully performed. Find a plot here that displays the error
of transformation taking into account the scale factor and rotation for the given example.
Creating Ground Projection Relative to the Origin of Grid System
If you know the value of the scale factor between grid and ground coordinate systems or the average height
of the network, then, in the Grid/Ground Parameters screen, you can select "Scale Factor" or "Avg Job Ht".
This method calculates plane ground coordinates by scaling, offsetting, and rotating grid coordinates. Find
graphic explaination of transformation only by scaling here, only by ratating here, and only by shifting
here.
To find a relation between Grid and Ground coordinate systems:
1. If the scale factor is known, select "Scale factor" in the Grid/Ground Parameters screen, type in a
desired value, and select the correct direction (Grid to Ground or Ground to Grid) for this value.
2. If the average height of the network is known, select "Avg.Job Height" in the Grid/Ground Parameters
screen and type in the desired value of the height in the Avg.Job Height field.
The Scale Factor will be automatically calculated from: Scale_Factor = (1+ Avg.Job Height/Mean_
Earth_Radius), where Mean_Earth_Radius = 6371000.0 m
3. In both cases you can enter the rotation and offsets:
l If the angle of rotation is known, type in this value into the Azimuth Rotation field. MAGNET
Field performs rotation of the Ground relative to the origin of the Grid coordinate system.
l To shift the Ground system from the selected Grid, type in the desired plane offsets on the Northing Offset and Easting Offset fields.
The final coordinates in the Ground will be calculated from: Nground=Ngrid+Northing_Offset
and Eground=Egrid+Easting_Offset
Global Settings
Global Setting are used by all of the jobs. Changes made in Global Settings work on all of the jobs.
In the Global tab:
160
1. Select the Use Bold Font check box to display the text in bold typeface.
2. Select the Enable Job History check box to enter and save the surveyor’s operation on the job in the file.
3. If required, select the Port Data Logging check box to record traffic with the currently connected device
into a txt file. After you click
, you have to reconnect with the device.
4. From Color Scheme, select a color for screen background if you want to change the default dark.
In the New Jobs tab, set parameters to automatically import:
1. Localization from previous job:
l Select Never import to create new jobs without previous localization.
l Select Always import to automatically export localization from the last open job to a new job upon
opening the new job.
l Select Prompt to import to choose if you want to use localization from the last open job.
2. Global code library to job:
l Select Never import to create new jobs without automatic import of global codes.
l Select Always import to automatically import.
l Select Prompt to import to choose whether to import or not.
3. To Continue point name numbering in the job, select this check box.
In the Keyboard tab:
1. Button Sound is the default to provide sound effects when you click any functional button.
2. QWERTY Keyboard is the default to enable the QWERTY layout of the soft keyboard. If you clear this
check box, the ABC keyboard is used.
Note: For PC version always QWERTY keyboard is used.
Backup
Backup copies are automatically created for the current job and safely stored with new names "<job file_
name>!YYY-MM-DD!. mjf.bak" in the Target folder. By default, backup files are stored in the Jobs folder. You
are able to open the backup of the job file in the usual way. More...
To configure backup settings:
1. You can change the target folder. To do this, select the Custom check box, click the Browse button and
select the backup target folder.
161
2. Select the Frequency in which you want the backup to occur. Ten minutes is the default. If you select
None, backups will not be created.
3. In History Depth, change the number of backups to keep if required. Three files is the default.
Note: MAGNET Field will create a separate *.bak file for the current job every time you open the job
file during the day with another date. If the job file is opened in subsequent days, the *.bak files previously formed will be overwritten to the ones with the newer dates.
4. Click
to save the settings and return to the Home screen.
Units
You can set different units and precisions for how MAGNET Field will display various numerical values in
dialogs:
l
l
l
l
Distance (including area and volume)
Angle
Coordinate precision
Other
On the Distance tab, select as required:
l
l
Distance unit for any length values. That can be Meters; IFeet - (1 International ft = 0.3048 m); US
Feet (1 US survey ft = 1200/3937 m); IFeet and Inches, US Feet and Inches (the latter two are calculated by taking into account that 1 ft = 12 in), IChains (1 International ch = 66 International ft) or
USChains (1 US survey ch = 66 US survey ft).
Note: If the selected units are USfeet, linear values can be entered as meters or IFeet by appending "m"
or "if" to the entered value. If the selected units are in meters, then a linear value in USFeet or International feet can be entered by appending "f" or "if" to the end of the entered value. If the selected
units are in IFeet, linear values can be entered as meters or USfeet by appending "m" or "f" to the
entered value. The appended characters "m", "f", or "if" are case insensitive. In other words, enter
"M", "F", or "IF".
Note: When using IFeet and Inches or US Feet and Inches the following format is observed: f.iix,
where f is feet, ii is inches and x is 1/8th of an inch.
Distance precision for the number of decimal places in length values.
Setting precisions
To display only integers, select "0" and so on. To display 5 decimal places, select "0.12345".
162
l
l
Area unit for area values
Volume unit for volume values
On the Angle tab, select as required:
l
l
l
l
Angle unit for angular values. That can be DMS, represented as ddd mm ss (the full circle contains 360
degrees) or Grads (Gons) - the full circle contains 400 grads (gons).
Note: Azimuth can be entered as two points separated by "-", "," or ";". Certain angles can be entered as
three points separated by "-", "," or ";". For instance a value of 100-101 indicates the Azimuth from Point
100 to Point 101.
Angle precision for the number of decimal places in angular values. More...
COGO angle unit for angular values in COGO tasks. In addition to Angle unit settings, that also can be
Radians (the full circle contains 2*PI radians); or Mils (1 Mil = 1 Milliradian = 1/1000 of a Radian)
COGO angle precision for the number of decimal places in angular values in COGO tasks. More...
On the Coordinate tab, select as required:
l
l
l
Northing/Easting precision for the number of decimal places in Northing/Easting coordinates. More...
Lat/Lon precision for the number of decimal places in latitude/longitude seconds.
Height precision for the number of decimal places in ellipsoidal heights and elevations. More...
On the Other tab, select if necessary:
l
l
Temperature unit only for the raw measurements. That can be Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F).
Pressure unit only for the raw measurements. That can be mmHg, hPa, inHg or mbar.
Display
You can configure the display of the following settings:
l
l
l
l
163
Coordinate Type to view coordinates for the coordinate system type selected
Coordinate Order to display: Northing/Easting/Height or Easting/Northing/Height
Azimuth Origin to display the azimuth computed from either reference directions: North, South, East, or
West
Disp Dir As to view directions as bearings or azimuths
l
Disp CL Pos As select a desired format to display stationing the centerline:
1234.000 - as Chainage, the distance to the station along the centerline
12+34.000 - as US Station (American format), when using 100 units as a full station plus a remainder
1+234.000 - as EU Station (Euro format), when using 1000 units as a full station plus a remainder
1/234.000 - as SWE Station (Swedish format), when using 1000 units as a full station and a slash
before a remainder
Alarms
In the dialog you can configure alert conditions. The dialog contains four tabs:
The Users tab displays a list of the names of all MAGNET Enterprise users who are currently assigned to a
chat.
1. On the Main tab you can select:
l Audible Alarm to enable audible alarms. The alert will sound automatically when an alert situation occurs.
l Enterprise Alarm to enable a sound when new chat comes.
l RTCM.3.x Coordinate Systems to enable a warning that the coordinate system is set by reading the RTCM messages. This option will work when a GPS device is selected.
l
Avoidance Alarm to enable the
blinking notification in Topo / Autotopo / Stake dia-
log, if a TS or a GPS measurement is performed in this area.
2. On the Controller tab you can select:
l Power Alarm to enable a sound when conditions of low power of a controller are appeared.
l
Memory Alarm to enable a sound when conditions of low memory of a controller are
appeared.
3. On the GPS+ tab you can select:
l Power Alarm to enable a sound when conditions of low power of a receiver are appeared.
l Memory Alarm to enable a sound when conditions of low memory of a receiver are appeared.
l Radio Link to enable a sound when poor radio link is detected.
l Fix-Float to enable a sound when Float solution is set after Fixed solution.
l Base Changed to enable a sound when the rover began to receive a correction data from other
real or virtual base station.
4. On the Optical tab you can select:
164
l
l
l
Power Alarm to enable a sound when conditions of low power of an optical device are appeared.
Track to enable a sound when conditions of loss of the target in automatic tracking mode for optical
instruments are appeared.
Grid/Ground Warning to enable a warning when a grid coordinate system is set.
5. Click
to observe information about the controller and the connected device status.
Code Options
This dialog allows you to configure:
Quick Codes
Settings for Codes
Prompts for Codes
Quick Codes
Quick Code is a code that appears in a box on the Map and allows you to take measurements with this code in
Quick mode in Topo survey and to log now in Auto Topo survey by clicking the box. Up to six codes are available for such configuration at a time.
To configure quick codes:
1. Select a check box.
2. Enter the name of the desired code. You can type in the name of an existing code or select it from the dropdown list. If you type in a new name, the Code dialog will prompt you to create a new code.
3. For a line or area code, enter a string value.
Code Settings
The Settings tab allows you to configure global settings for codes:
In the Codes field, configure the settings for codes:
165
1. In Default New Type, set the default type for a new code. If set to Prompt, you will be prompted to
define the new code when storing points.
2. In Data Entry, set the preferred entry mode between Notes and Codes for Survey dialogs.
3. In Code File, click the Browse button to select the Global Code file to be used along with the codes in
the job.
Note: The default code file (MAGNETDefCodeLib.xml) is installed automatically in the tpsdata folder
upon MAGNET Field installation.
4. The global setting Code with Description toggles the display of descriptions with Codes.
In the Control Codes field, configure the settings for control codes:
1. Selecting Allow Custom allows you to custom define the control codes and enables you to set them
persistent for Survey dialogs.
2. To set custom control codes persistent for Survey dialogs, select Allow Persistent check box.
Code Prompts
In the Prompts tab, select the appropriate boxes in the Prompt for Code in field to be prompted for setting
codes when storing points in:
Optical Survey
GPS Survey
Stakeout
COGO
Stake Reports Configuration List
Contains a list of default configurations of stakeout reports and their types.
To edit the list of report configurations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Highlight a name of the report configuration to control.
Click the Delete button to remove the report configuration from the list.
Click the Edit button to change the highlighted report configuration. More...
Click the Copy button to create the copy of the highlighted report configuration.
Click the Add button to create a new configuration. More...
166
Report Configuration
You can edit:
1. The Name of the report configuration. To do this, click in the field.
2. The Type of the report configuration. Select a type from the drop down list.
3. Select the corresponding items in the list to include corresponding information in the report. Use the scroll
bar to view the entire list. By default all items are included.
and
arrow buttons to change the order of displayed information in the report.
4. Use
5. Click the Edit button or just click the item to open a field to edit the item Name as required. You can use
Calculator
to make some calculations if required.
6. Click the Tolerances button to specify the threshold value of precision for stakeout point(s). More...
Report Tolerances
In this dialog you can specify the threshold value of precision for stakeout point(s) for Northing and/or Easting
and/or Elevation. To do it, click the corresponding check box(es) and type in the desired value in the current linear units. You can see in the "In Tolerances" column of the Stakeout report the following:
l
l
l
"Yes" - when the final accuracy of the stakeout point will be less than the threshold value,
"No" - when the final accuracy of the stakeout point will be more than the threshold value,
"None" - when neither of the check boxes is selected.
Enterprise Configure
To configure settings for communication with the MAGNET Enterprise web-server:
In the Login tab, enter the appropriate login information:
l
l
l
167
In Login, enter the user name of your account.
In Password, enter the secret word of your account.
Select the Connect on startup check box to connect upon starting the program.
In the Upload tab:
l
l
Select the corresponding check boxes to specify which reference data related to the current job will be
exported.
If required, clear the Upload current job by default check box not to export the job.
In the Download tab:
l
If required, clear the Prompt to import file to Job check box to import files without prompts.
In SiteLINK 3D tab:
l
l
If required, select the Enable SiteLINK 3D features check box to enter credentials for SiteLINK 3D
communication:
Select the Connect on startup check box to connect upon starting the program.
168
Exchange folder
You can exchange data between the current job and another job, different files of the predefined formats or your
own custom formats, and the MAGNET Enterprise project.
Click an icon to perform the task:
To Job
Exports data from the current job to another job.
From Job
Imports data to the current job from another job.
To File
Exports data from the current job to a file.
From File
Imports data from a file to the current job.
To 3DMC
Exports data from the current job to a 3DMC project.
From 3DMC
Imports data from a 3DMC project.
Enterprise Upload
Uploads job data to MAGNET Enterprise. Not available for onboard.
Enterprise Download
Downloads data from MAGNET Enterprise. Not available for onboard.
Export To Job
To export data from the current job to another job:
169
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select an existing job or create a new one to which you will export data. More...
Define the general types of data to be exported. More...
Select what specific data of the defined types will be exported. More...
Filter points for export if required. More...
View the export progress. More...
Select Job
To select a Job to open:
l
l
l
l
l
Highlight the job in the job list. The job list contains the Job Names of all existing jobs created/opened
using this software.
When a job is selected in this list, the Created: and Modified: fields will reflect when the job was created and last modified.
indicates the path to the selected job. By default, the job files are stored in the [program]\Jobs
folder.
If you do not see the desired job name in the list, click Browse. It takes you to the Browse dialog to
browse directories to search for the job.
You can export data to a new job. Click New to create a new job.
Export Data To Job
To select data to be exported from the current job to another job:
1. From the Points drop-down list, select the filter for points to export:
l All Points
l By Point List(s)
l By Type(s)
l By Range and Code(s)
l By Type(s), Range and Code(s)
l or None
If more than one filter is selected, they will be processed together and only points that meet the settings
of all the filters will be exported. Select None you do not want to filter.
170
2. Select the corresponding check boxes to select data types, which should be exported. The data that absent
in the current job will be unavailable for selection. More...
3. Click Settings if required to setup export of points as control. By default, they are exported as design.
4. Click Next to filter the points if required, then choose the needed objects from a list of objects of the selected data type.
Filter Points By Range and Code(s)
To select for exchange points by a range and code(s):
l
l
l
Select the Filter by Codes check box to make the editable field active. Enter the desired codes either manually or click Select and choose the codes from a dialog which appears. Select Codes For Filter
Select the Filter by Range check box, to make the editable field active. Specify the names of the points to
be included. These can be specified by a range or by enumeration individually. The symbols ';', '.' or ',' can
be used for Name Separator and '-' for Range Separator.
If available, click Next to continue selecting data.
Note: The Next button is available until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Next button becomes
grayed out, the
button appears to start the export process.
Select Object to Export
The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for export.
1. When filtering points by types, the existing types of points will be available for selection.
2. The objects in this dialog are those available in the current job.
3. Choose the needed objects from a list of objects:
l Selection can be done by placing check marks in the list next to the desired codes.
l Click Check and Uncheck to toggle the highlighted item(s) on and off, respectively.
l Click Select All to choose all the items at a time.
l Selection can be done by the context menu that depends on the place where it pops up:
l Select All: highlights all the types in the list.
l Select All Below: highlights all the types below the highlighted line.
l Select Several: highlights the required types.
171
Cancel Selection: removes highlights in the list.
l Check: places check marks in the highlighted lines.
l Uncheck: clears check marks in the highlighted lines.
4. If the Next button is available, click it to continue selecting data.
Note: The Next button is available until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Next button
l
becomes grayed out, the
button appears to start the export process.
Select Codes For Filter
All the codes existing in the current job will be listed in the Code(s) list.
Select the code(s) for which you want to exchange all the points having that code:
l
l
l
Selection can be done by placing check marks in the list, against the desired codes.
Click Check and Uncheck to toggle the highlighted item(s) on and off, respectively.
Click Select All to choose all the items at a time.
Export Status
The export process is reflected in the Export Status dialog that contains a progress bar and comments about
the export process. The progress bar displays the percentage of the points being exported.
Export Warnings
Displays the warning messages during the Export process if necessary.
Import From Job
To import data from another job to the current job:
172
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the job from which you will import data. More...
Define the general types of data to be imported. More...
Filter points for import if required. More...
Select what specific data of the defined types will be imported. More...
View the import progress. More...
Import Data From Job
The title of this dialog contains the name of the job selected. The dialog enables you to select the data to import
and, if necessary, filter the imported points:
1. From the Points drop-down list, select the filter for points to import:
l All Points
l By Point List(s)
l By Type(s)
l By Range and Code(s)
l By Type(s), Range and Code(s)
l or None
If more than one filter is selected, they will be processed together and only points that meet the settings of
all the filters will be exported. Select None you do not want to filter.
2. Select the corresponding check boxes to select data types which should be imported. The data that absent
in the current job will be unavailable for selection. More...
3. Click Settings if required to setup import of points as control. By default, they are imported as design.
4. Click Next to filter the points if required, then choose the needed objects from a list of objects of the selected data type.
Select Object to Import
The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for import.
1. When filtering points by types, the existing types of points will be available for selection.
2. The objects in this dialog are those available in the current job.
3. Choose needed objects from a list of objects:
173
Selection can be done by placing check marks in the list next to the desired codes.
l Click Check and Uncheck to toggle the highlighted item(s) on and off, respectively.
l Click Select All to choose all the items at a time.
4. If the Next button is available, click it to continue selecting data.
Note: The Next button is available until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Next button
l
becomes grayed out, the
button appears to start the import process.
Filter Points By Range and Code(s)
To select for exchange points by a range and code(s):
l
l
l
Select the Filter by Codes check box to make the editable field active. Enter the desired codes either
manually or click Check and choose the codes from a dialog which appears. Select Codes For Filter
Select the Filter by Range check box, to make the editable field active. Specify the names of the
points to be included. These can be specified by a range or by enumeration individually. The symbols
';', '.' or ',' can be used for Name Separator and '-' for Range Separator.
If the Next button is available, click it to continue selecting data.
Note: The Next button is available until all data of chosen types is selected. After the Next button
becomes grayed out, the
button appears to start the import process.
Import Status
The import process is reflected in the Import Status dialog that contains a progress bar and comments about
the import process. The progress bar displays the percentage of the points being imported.
Import Warnings
Displays the warning messages during the Import process if necessary.
174
Export To File
To export data from the current job to a file:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Data type to export and specify the file Format to create as required. More...
Set a name and destination directory for the file.
Specify the coordinate system and coordinate type for exported points.
Define settings for custom text formats. More...
View the export progress. More...
Export Data To File
To export different data types to files of either predefined or custom formats:
1. Select the Data type to export to the file.
2. Select the Format of the file to create for the data type you selected. Each format is intended for storing a
certain data group.
3. If required, select the Select file units check box to configure units for values in the file. More...
4. If more fields are displayed for some data types, complete them if required:
Points
Lines
Areas
Point Lists
Raw Data
Roads
Localization
Surfaces
Note: When exporting Multiple data to file, the fields for all included data types will be displayed to configure.
Points To File
Configure settings to export points from the current job to a file:
1. Select the Select types of the points check box if not all types of points should be exported. More...
2. Select the Use filters check box if filters (by code and by range) should be used for exported points.
More...
175
3. If more fields are displayed for some file formats, complete them if required:
l Configure ASCII file properties for a text format. By default, the created ASCII file will contain the type of the attributes, and all text values in this file will be written with quotation marks
around them.
l Click the Code Style button to setup the code style. More...
l Click the Settings button to configure the point style. More...
l Set a number starting at which Alphanumeric points will be renumbered for the formats
which do not allow alphanumerical point names. By default, MAGNET Field will continue numbering from the last existing number of the job point.
l To Store description as attribute, select this check box for ESRI Shape format.
l To Append points to existing file, select this check box for CMM format.
Lines to File
Configure settings to export lines from the current job to a file:
1. By default the Export areas as lines check box is selected to save areas as lines in the created file.
2. If more fields are displayed for some file formats, complete them if required:
l Configure ASCII file properties for a text format. By default, the created ASCII file will contain the type of the attributes, and all text values in this file will be written with quotation marks
around them.
l Click the Code Style button to setup the code style. More...
l Click the Settings button to configure the line style. More...
l Set a number starting at which Alphanumeric points will be renumbered for the formats
which do not allow alphanumerical point names. By default, MAGNET Field will continue numbering from the last number of the job point.
l To Store description as attribute, select this check box.
Areas to File
When you export areas from the current job to the ESRI Shape format file, you can Store description as
attribute. To enable this option, select the check box.
176
Point Lists to File
Configure settings to export point lists from the current job to a file:
1. Select the Select types of the points check box if not all types of points in the point list should be exported.
More...
2. Select the Use filters check box if filters (by code and by range) should be used for exported points.
More...
3. If more fields are displayed for some file formats, complete them if required:
l Configure ASCII file properties for a text format. By default, the created ASCII file will contain the
type of the attributes, and all text values in this file will be written with quotation marks around them.
l Click the Code Style button to setup the code style. More...
l Click the Settings button to configure the point style. More...
l Set a number starting at which Alphanumeric points will be renumbered for the formats which do
not allow alphanumerical point names. By default, MAGNET Field will continue numbering from
the last existing number of the job point.
l To Store description as attribute, select this check box for ESRI Shape format.
Raw Data
Configure settings to export raw data from the current job to a file:
1. The Export TS raw data check box is selected by default if the format of the created file is intended for
raw data collected with total stations.
2. The Export GPS raw data check box is selected by default if the format of the created file is intended for
raw data collected with GNSS receivers.
Note: Code, Attributes, String, Note, Control Code, Photo Name and Control flag are also exported with
GPS and TS raw data into LandXML.
3. If more fields are displayed for some file formats, complete them if required:
l Optionally, you can Select additional point types to write into the created file. More...
l Select the GPS points as SP check box to save GPS points as manually entered points (Store Points)
in the Carlson SurvCE RW5 and Trimble TDS RAW files.
l Select the Control codes as notes check box to include control codes as notes into a TDS file. In
this case you can make the TDS file compatible with the FBK format. To do this, select the FBK
compatible check box; the Alphanumeric points will be renumbered field appears to set the first
177
l
l
l
l
l
number that will be used to rename points. By default, MAGNET Field will continue numbering
from the last existing number of the job point.
Optionally, you can Rename alphanumeric points for Topcon FC-6/GTS-7 and Topcon GTS7+ files. To do this, select the corresponding check box; the Alphanumeric points will be
renumbered field appears to set the first number that will be used to rename points.
The Attributes and Attribute Names check boxes are selected by default to write these values
into the created Field Book file.
Set a number starting at which Alphanumeric points will be renumbered for the Field Book
format which does not allow alphanumerical point names.
Configure ASCII file properties. By default, the created Topcon Custom GPS file will contain
the type of the attributes.
Click the Code Style button to setup the code style. More...
Roads to File
When you export roads from the current job to:
l
l
Topcon 3DMC Project file, MAGNET Field will rename alphanumeric point names. By default, it will
continue numbering from the last existing number of the job point.
LandXML file, the road string sets are also included. Optionally, you can store x-sections as Zones if
you select the Use Zone elements for x-sections check box.
Localization to File
When you export localization data from the current job:
l
l
To Topcon 3DMC Project file, MAGNET Field will rename alphanumeric point names. By default, it
will continue numbering from the last existing number of the job point.
File formats allow only WGS84 -> Local type of localization for export. Control Points are exported
together with Localization data.
178
Surfaces to File
When you export surfaces from the current job to Topcon 3DMC Project file, MAGNET Field will rename alphanumeric point names. By default, it will continue numbering from the last existing number of the job point.
Multiple Data to File
To export multiple data from the current job to a file:
l
l
Select Data from available for the selected format.
Select Point filters to limit the number of the exported points.
When you export multiple data, the fields specific for every included data type will display. Complete them if
required.
Data Selection
This dialog lists the Available data to export depending on the selected format.
l
l
To select desired data types to export, check mark the boxes near the appropriate data types and click Next.
The control next to this selection lists the number of the corresponding objects in the job.
Point Selection
Select the filters for the points to export from the drop-down list: All Points, By Point List(s), By Type(s), By
Range and Code(s), By Type(s), Range and Code(s), or None.
If more than one filter is selected, they will be processed together and only points that meet the settings of all the
filters will be exported. Select None you do not want to filter.
File Units
This dialog allows you to select units for the data being exchanged.
179
This option is available for all data types and formats containing distance/angular values. Depending on the
data and format selected, you can set only distance, or distance and angle units if available.
Code Style
This dialog enables you to setup a code style, code information on a point, in the exported file.
.
1. To use an existing style, select it from the Style list and click
2. To delete any code style from the list, select it and click the Delete button.
3. To edit a code style:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Select the style from the list.
The Available field will display items you can add to a default set in the Order field.
Use the arrows to move the necessary items between the fields and to arrange the items in the desired
order.
Click the Separators button to set code style separators. More...
Click the Control Codes button to set names More...
Click Save to save the changes in the code style.
Separators
This dialog lists the current separators for the selected code style and allows you to edit them.
l
l
In General Prefix field you can enter a character/symbol to separate the code information from the rest
of information on a point in the exported file.
If required, enter other separators to delimit the items in the code style.
Control Codes
This dialog lists the control codes to create lines. The values can be replaced by user-defined ones during an
export routine. The changes are applied only for the selected style. By default, MAGNET Field uses AS,
AE, C, R as a linework package.
180
DXF/DWG Settings for Export
On this dialog you can select either the Point Style or the Line Style depending on the Data type selected to
export to the file.
1. Choose a Point Style from the available styles:
l AutoCAD Points: only point coordinates.
l AutoCAD Points with Text Fields: point coordinates with text fields for point name, elevation, codes
and attributes.
l Civil 3D/Land Desktop Point Objects: Civil 3D points will be used.
l Carlson Point Blocks: Carslon point blocks will be used. They include points and descriptions for
them as block references.
l TopSURV Point Blocks: TopSURV style will be used. It includes point name, elevation, codes,
strings and attributes. displays points with the names as block references.
2. Choose a Line Style from the available styles:
l AutoCAD Lines: only line coordinates.
l AutoCAD Lines with Text Fields: line coordinates with text fields for line name, elevations, codes
and attributes.
l TopSURV Line Blocks: TopSURV style will be used. It includes line name, elevations, codes, strings
and attributes.
3. The Use 3D coordinates check box is selected by default to export elevations with plain coordinates as
well.
4. Select the Use text font height check box to open a field to manually/automatically set the height of text
fonts to show the text (in CAD units). By default, it is auto.
Text File Format Settings
To configure settings of the format for the Text File:
1. Select the Delimiter symbol to separate data in the exported file. It can be a space, a comma, tabs or other
symbol selected from the drop-down list.
2. Select the Header in First Row check box to output a header in the file.
3. In the File Style field:
l From the drop-down list, select the order of fields in the format.
l Click Add to create a new format style. More...
181
l
l
Click Edit to change an existing format style. More...
To delete an existing format style, click the Delete button.
Custom Style
To create a new style for Custom Formats:
1. Highlight the necessary items in the Available field or the Order field.
2. Use the appropriate arrows to move the necessary items between the fields. You can use only one type
of code information in the file.
3. Use the appropriate arrows to arrange the items in the Order field in the desired order.
4. Click
to save the File Style and return to the Text File Format dialog. A new string appears in
the File Style drop-down list.
Coordinate System
This dialog displays information about the coordinate system in the job whose data is exported. Select the
Coordinate Type for the data in the text custom file exported.
Find out more on Coordinate Systems.
Units Format
This dialog enables you to select the desired format to represent data being imported from/exported to the file.
l
l
l
From Format select the format for degrees in Latitude and Longitude.
From Plane coordinates precision select fractal length (precision) for plane coordinates from 0.0 to
0.00000000.
From Elevation precision select fractal length (precision) for height from 0.0 to 0.00000000.
182
Import From File
To import data from a file to the current job:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the data type and the file format from which you will import data as required. More...
Select settings for importing points. More...
If required, select file units for imported data. More...
Select the file from which data will be imported.
Define settings for custom text formats. More...
Set up the coordinate system and coordinate type for imported data.
View the import status. More...
Import Data From File
To import different data types from files of either predefined or custom formats:
1. Select the Data type to import from the file.
2. Select the Format of the file being imported for the data type you selected. Each format can store a certain
data group.
3. The Select file units check box is selected by default to configure units for values in the file. More...
4. Select the Use Legacy Localization check box when you import a localization file, which was created by
all versions of Topcon Tools, TopSURV, Pocket 3D, 3D-Office and versions 1.* of MAGNET Tools and
MAGNET Field. If you click the Use Legacy Localization check box, the Legacy mode is automatically
set for horizontal localization in the pop-up menu of Localization.
5. The X-sections include catch points check box is selected by default to import x-sections that include
catch points in some formats.
6. Click the Settings button if available to configure settings for some data type and formats. More...
Settings For Text Custom Formats
Import of Multiple Data Types
Settings for Import
Configure settings for some data type and formats:
183
1. Select the type of the points you import:
l Control Points: the points with coordinates, known from the catalog. These are used for localization.
l Design Points: points used as targets for staking.
2. Select Load as background to import data from the file as a background image. If the box is
unchecked, all data from the file will be stored as a set of the points/lines within a job. This will not happen if import of point lists has been selected.
3. Select Import text to import text from DXF/DWG files.
4. Select Import block base points check box to import block base coordinates as points.
Import of Multiple Data Types
After loading data from the file you can select the data types you want to import.
List of Imported Objects
This dialog shows the list with the objects loaded from the file. Select the check boxes before the appropriate
objects to import.
Wrong Objects
The dialog is being shown when an object with the same name as the imported one already exists in the job.
Depending on the object type, the following options are available:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select Overwrite? to replace the object in the database with the imported one.
Select Rename? to give a new name to the imported object in the Start Name field.
Select Prefix? to add the entered prefix value to the imported object name.
Select Suffix? to add the entered suffix value to the imported object name.
Click Yes to accept the decision.
Click Yes To All to accept the same decision for all similar cases.
Click Skip to skip the object without importing.
Click Skip All to skip all the objects with names that coincide with the names of existing objects,
without importing.
184
Export To 3DMC
The To 3DMC dialog allows you to export data to 3DMC file and SiteLINK 3D users.
Select the required option to Export job to:
1. To 3DMC File (.TP3 ). More...
2. SiteLINK 3D user (.TP3). More...
Also, you can Transfer other file(s) to SiteLINK 3D user. More...
To 3DMC
To export job to 3DMC File for SiteLINK 3D user:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a user group from the Group drop-down list: All, Hardware, Software, Machines.
Select Online only to show only online contacts.
Select contacts from the table of the available user Names and their Types.
Click Next to proceed with export to MC project. More...
To MC project
To export Multiple data from the current MAGNET Field job to Topcon 3DMC project:
1. Data and Format fields cannot be changed.
2. The Select file units check box is selected by default that allows you to view units which are set by default
for the data exported.
3. Select the Export areas as lines check box to export area data as line data to the MC project.
4. The Alphanumeric points will be renumbered starting at: field displays a number at which MAGNET
Field will start renaming points with alphanumeric names as the Topcon 3DMC project demands points
that have only numerical names. MAGNET Field will continue numbering from the last existing number of
the job point.
5. Click the Code Style button to setup the code style. More...
6. Click Next to start the export.
185
SiteLINK 3D File
To transfer files other than 3DMC file to SiteLINK 3D users:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select a user group from the Group drop-down list: All, Hardware, Software, Machines.
Select Online only to show only online contacts.
Select contacts from the table of the available user Names and their Types.
Click Add to select a file to be added to the list.
If necessary, you can remove All or Selected file. Select the corresponding option from Remove.
Highlight the required file and click Send.
Transfer status will show the export in progress.
Import From 3DMC
The import of data from a 3DMC project is a part of general import process that is copied into a standalone
tool.
To import Multiple data from the Topcon 3DMC project to the current MAGNET Field job.
1. Data and Format fields cannot be changed.
2. The Select file units check box is selected by default that allows you to view units which are set by
default for the data imported.
3. Click the Settings button to configure additional settings. More...
Enterprise Upload
To upload data from the current job to an enterprise project:
1. Select a Project from a list of available projects. After you select the project, the names and types of
the inboxes appear in the field. Check mark the desired inbox.
2. Click Add to upload a file. The name and path to the file will be displayed in the corresponding field.
3. If required, click Clear All to erase selections.
4. Click Upload to start uploading data to the selected inbox. Upload status will show the upload progress and the result.
186
Enterprise Download
To download uploaded data from an enterprise project to your device:
1. Select a Project from a list of available projects. After you select the project, the names and types of available inboxes appear.
2. Select the inbox that contains the needed files. The names of the uploaded files and the dates of uploading
appear. Select the file(s) to be downloaded.
3. If required, click Refresh to renew the content of the selected inbox.
4. Click Download to start downloading data to your device. Download status will show the download progress and the result.
187
Chat
Click an icon for text messaging.
The Chat dialog contains three tabs:
The Users tab displays a list of the names of all MAGNET Enterprise users who are currently assigned to a
chat.
1. To make the list show only the users with online presence status, check the Online box. You will see
the users who are ready for immediate connection.
2. To start chatting:
l
l
l
Select the user you want to chat with by checking the box near the name.
Click the Start Chat button to initiate conversation.
Type in the massage you want to post to the selected user.
The SiteLINK 3D tab displays a list of the names of all SiteLINK 3D users who are currently assigned to a
chat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a user group from the Group drop-down list: All, Hardware, Software, Machines.
Select Online only to show only online contacts.
Select contacts from the table of the available user Names and their Types.
Click the Start Chat button to initiate conversation.
The Chats tab displays a list of the users with whom you have already started chatting.
188
Edit folder
Click an icon to perform the task:
Points
Edits properties of existing points and add new points manually.
Codes
Edits code properties and add new codes.
Layers
Edits layer properties and add new layers manually.
Linework
Edits the linework properties and create new lineworks manually.
Areas
Edits areas.
Point Lists
Edits point lists.
Raw Data
Edits raw data and re-compute coordinates.
Background
Deletes/adds background images.
Surfaces
Edits surfaces.
Sessions
Edits observation sessions for GNSS receivers.
Reports
Edits field and stake reports.
189
Roads
Opens a sub-folder with six options to edit the road properties and design new roads.
Edit Points
The Points:<Coordinate Type> dialog contains the list of the points stored in the application database. The
list provides you with the basic information about every point: a point's type and name, coordinates, codes
and note. The title of the dialog shows the type of the coordinates displayed. The icon near the point name
indicates the point type that is the method the point is determined. Learn more about the icon descriptions for
the points.
The buttons available in this dialog serve the following purposes:
l
Expand the Find drop-down list and select an option to find a point:
By Range,
By Code,
By Code String,
By Radius,
By Name or
By Layer.
Click Find Next to find the next point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the previous Find.
Click Delete to delete the point from the list.
Click Edit to open the Edit Point dialog.
Click Add to create a new point.
l
Click
l
l
l
l
The icon
to configure the display settings. More...
brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
190
Point Icon Descriptions
GPS stationary (topo)
offset topo
GPS kinematic (auto topo)
RTK base
sideshot
backsight
control
design or imported
staked
calculated
entered manually
191
Points pop-up menu
If required, you can switch on any of the following functions:
l
l
l
l
l
Select Setup Columns to customize the arrangement of data columns in the list of points. More...
Select PTL Mode to switch on the PTL (Point-To-Line) Mode. The From Point and To Point
columns will appear in the list to show the reference line.
Select Show Scan Points to display the scan points in the list.
Select Show AutoTopo Points to display the AutoTopo points in the list.
Select Recompute to recompute the point coordinates after editing the point's raw data (if the recomputation was not performed in Raw Data).
Setup Columns
To customize the arrangement of columns in the list of points:
1. Highlight the necessary items in the Available field or the Selected field.
2. Use the appropriate arrows to move the necessary items between the fields.
3. Use the appropriate arrows to arrange the items in the Selected field in the desired order.
4. Click
to save the selected order of columns and return to the Points dialog.
Select Points By Range
To select points involved in a specified range:
1. In the Range of Points field, specify the names of the points to find. These can be specified by a range
or by enumeration individually. The symbols ';', '.' or ',' can be used for Name Separator and '-' for
Range Separator.
2. Click
to save the settings and return to the Points dialog with the first found point highlighted.
To find the next point in the range, click Find Next.
192
Select Points by Code
All the codes existing in the current job and their descriptions will be listed in a table.
1. Select the code(s) for which you want to find all the points having that code:
l Selection can be done by placing check marks in the list, against the desired codes.
l Click Check and Uncheck to toggle the highlighted item(s) on and off, respectively.
l Click Select All to choose all the items at a time.
2. Click
to save the selections and return to the Points dialog with the first found point highlighted. To
find the next point with the selected code(s), click Find Next.
Select Points by Radius
To find the points which reside in a circle:
1. Select the Point either by entering it manually or by selecting it from the map
or list
. This will
be the center of the circle.
2. Enter the Radius (distance) around the selected point in the current units.
3. Click
to save the settings and return to the Points dialog with the found points highlighted in the
list.
Select Points by Code Strings
To select the points by Code Strings:
1. Select the Code from the drop-down list of existing codes which have strings.
2. Select the String(s) you would like to use for the code string combination.
3. Click
to save the selections and return to the Points dialog with the first found point highlighted. To
find the next point with the selected code string(s), click Find Next.
193
Find Point By Name
To find a point by its name:
1. Enter the name or part of the name of the Point.
2. Select the Match entire name radio button if the whole name was entered in the Point field.
3. Select the Match partial name radio button if a part of the searched name was entered in the Point
field.
4. Click
to save the settings and return to the Points dialog. If found, the point will be highlighted
in the list.
Select Points By Layer
The Layers dialog enables you to select points which are on the same layer. To do this:
1. Select the layer from the list of existing layers as required.
2. Click
to save the selection and return to the Points dialog. When found, the points will be dis-
played.
Edit / Add Point
This dialog can contain the following tabs, depending on the properties of the highlighted point:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Point tab
Layer/Style tab
Cut Sheet tab
Check Points tab
WA tab
PTL tab
Image tab
194
Point tab
You can edit or view existing parameters of the existing point or add new point.
1. Name of the Point.
2. Code and attribute information for the point.
l You can select a Code from the drop-down list. Code needs to be defined at the time it is entered if it
is not a code that exists in the Codes dialog.
l If the code type is Line or Area, an icon will display that the point belongs to a line. Set a string and,
if required, a control code.
l Press the Code button to view information on the Point Attributes dialog. You can set two control
codes, and attribute values for the code.
l Enter any additional information about the point in the Note field.
3. The display of coordinates depends on the selected coordinate system. For a new point you can manually
enter coordinates in the current coordinate system.
4. If required, select the Control Point check box to add a new point as a control point for localization.
5. Click
to save the point. If a point exists and you try to save another point with the same name, a dia-
log displays a prompt that the point already exists. More...
String
String is a specifying parameter for a code that allows you to group the objects with one code according to some
specified attribute. For example, the code "Pole" also has the "Jones'" string. Processing the points, you will be
able to select only the poles of Jones' and will not take into consideration all the other poles.
Control Codes
Additional manipulations of linework can be performed using control codes for the points with the same codestring combination. Up to two control codes can be specified for every code associated with a point to store the
points which will be connected to form open or closed polylines. Select the codes of the Line or Area type to use
for such points.
The supported control codes of line behavior:
195
Arc Start(AS)
Indicates the start of an arc. Arc parameters are determined by the presence of additional points in the line. These points can create the line segment with the arc start
point which will act as the tangent to the arc.
Arc End(AE)
Indicates the end of an arc. Arc parameters are determined by the presence of additional points in the line. These points can create the line segment with the arc end
point which will act as the tangent to the arc.
Circle Edge(CE)
When this code is applied to the first point of a three-point polyline, this point and next
two points define the edge of the circle.
Circle Radius (CR)
When this code is applied to the first point of a two-point polyline, it indicates the center of a circle. The second point will define the radius of the circle.
Rectangle(R)
When this control code is applied to the third point of a three-point polyline, this results in the automatic creation of a fourth point of a parallelogram whose diagonal is
specified by the first and the third point.
Close (C)
When this code is applied to a point, it closes the polyline with each next point.
Arc End & Start (AE&S)
When this dual control code is applied to a point, it indicates the end of one arc and
the start of another arc.
Arc End & Close(AE&C)
When this dual control code is applied to a point, it indicates the end of the arc and creates the line segment with the arc start point.
Note: If only one point is between the arc start and end points, the arc is formed such that all the three points
lie on the arc. If there are two, or more than two points, between the points with the AS and AE control
codes, the points are all connected by straight line segments.
Note: MAGNET Field will not use this linework package if the Allow Custom Control Code box on the
Global screen is selected. In this case, the user can enter any string to mark it as a control code. MAGNET
Field will not interpret these control codes.
196
Layer/Style tab
By default the layer and point style are defined By Code for the selected point.
To edit the Layer/Style information:
1. Define the Layer in which to have the point. Select it from the drop-down list. Click
to edit the
layers. More...
2. Define the Point Style for drawing. Select the point type and color to be used with the point.
Cut Sheet tab
This tab is present if the selected point is staked and stored.
The list displays the Name of the staked point, the dE, dN, and dH vector of the staked point from the design
point, the Coordinates of the staked point and any Notes associated with the staked point.
Check Points tab
This tab is present if the point has any check points associated with it.
The list displays the Name of the check point, the dE, dN, and dH vector of the check point from the recorded
point, the Coordinates of the check point and any Notes associated with the check point.
WA tab
The WA tab displays a list of stations that can be used in the Weighted Average for the point. Also, the E, N, U
residuals, WA Control (whether its used or not), and notes are displayed.
Select a station in the list. When you click on the Use in WA/Exclude from WA button, the appropriate action
will be taken: the station is added for the WA or excluded from the WA.
197
PTL tab
This tab is displayed when the selected point is a PTL point or when the PTL mode is selected when adding
a point.
1. Select the Start and End Reference Points to define the line for the PTL offsets. These points can be
selected from the map or from the list of job points by clicking on
or
, respectively.
2. Set PTL Offsets in the current distance units:
l In Line, set the distance along the line from the Start Reference Point.
l In Offset, set the distance in a direction perpendicular to the line.
3. Height is the height of the current point.
Note: In this tab you cannot edit any field for the measured PTL point.
Image/Photo tab
This displays a photo note attached to the point.
To edit the photo note:
l
To add an image for the point, you can use:
either
or
to select a photo from existing ones
to capture an image from the controller's camera, if the controller supports the camera.
l
More...
Use the << and >> buttons to scroll through the photos attached to the point.
l
Click
l
If required, use the following icons to geotag the image:
if required to remove the photo note currently displayed for the point.
to show the current data and time in the photo note.
198
to show coordinates of the point.
to display compass readings taken at the time you take the photo note for the device that supports
the camera and the compass.
The Compass Calibration dialog will prompt you to calibrate the compass before taking a photo (if not
already calibrated). The Compass Calibration dialog appears automatically only once. If you skip the calibration, you will not be prompted again as long as you edit the point. You will be able to calibrate the com-
pass any time by clicking the Calibrate Compass option from the pop-up menu
.
Compass Calibration
The Compass Calibration dialog allows you to process the compass calibration. The application provides a
graphic image describing calibration movement.
l
l
If you do not want to process the calibration, click the Skip button to ignore the compass calibration, and
no direction will be provided even if the Show Direction is selected.
Note: If you skip the calibration, you will not be prompted again as long as you edit the point. You can calibrate the compass any time by clicking the Calibrate Compass option enabled in the pop up menu.
Click the Start button to start calibration. The calibration time depends on the device used. For example, it
is 10 seconds for the FC-236, and 60 seconds for the GRS-1 device.
Camera Settings
The dialog allows you to geotag every image when you capture it in the current job.
l
l
199
Select Add Timestamp to display the current date and time over the photos.
Select Add Coordinates to display the coordinate system and the coordinates of this point over the photos.
Note: If you select Add Coordinates and the WGS84 location of the point is available, the coordinates will
be displayed in DDMMSSSS format; otherwise, no coordinates will be displayed or saved in the image.
l
Select Add Direction to display compass readings taken at the time you capture the image. This option
is enabled if the device supports the camera and the compass.
Note: The direction is displayed over the photos provided the compass has been calibrated.
Point Attributes
The dialog allows you to set attributes for the point being created or edited in the following tabs:
l
l
l
l
Code Attributes tab
Layer
Photo
Note
Code Attributes tab
To set code attributes for the point:
1. Select a Code from the drop-down list. The Code list shows all the codes to use in the job.
2. If required, select associated two Control Codes (Ctrl Code)from the drop-down lists. The control
code is a special type of code that can be used by some graphic tools for the interpretation of the survey
results.
3. Select a string for the code of the line or area type.
4. The attribute table lists all available attributes for the code and allows you to enter/select its value.
l Click the Props button to open the Attribute Ranges dialog, which displays the valid ranges for
the attributes for the selected code. More...
l Click Repeat to set the previous saved value.
l Click Default to set the default value.
5. To add Multiple Codes, click on this button. More...
Attribute Ranges
The selected Code name is displayed.
200
The table displays a list of attributes associated with the code. When you highlight a row, the title of the properties
column changes to indicate what is being displayed. For example, for Text type of attribute it would say Max
Chars.
Multiple Codes
The Multi-Code displays a list of all codes, strings and attributes for the point being edited.
l
l
l
Click Add to add another code to the list. More...
Click Edit to change the code selected from the list. More...
Click Delete to delete a selected code from the list.
Layer/Style tab
By default the layer and point style are defined By Code for the selected point.
To edit the Layer/Style information:
1. Define the Layer in which to have the point. Select it from the drop-down list. Click
to edit the
layers. More...
2. Define the Point Style for drawing. Select the point type and color to be used with the point.
Image/Photo tab
This displays a photo note attached to the point.
To edit the photo note:
l
To add an image for the point, you can use:
either
or
201
to select a photo from existing ones
to capture an image from the controller's camera, if the controller supports the camera. More...
l
Use the << and >> buttons to scroll through the photos attached to the point.
l
Click
l
If required, use the following icons to geotag the image:
if required to remove the photo note currently displayed for the point.
to show the current data and time in the photo note.
to show coordinates of the point.
to display compass readings taken at the time you take the photo note for the device that supports the camera and the compass.
Note tab
The tab is used to enter additional information. Type the text in the Note field.
Edit Codes
The Code-Attributes dialog contains a list of Codes used for the survey, the list of Attributes for each code,
and a set of tools for editing:
1. Click Add to create a new Code or Attributes (depending upon the list to which the button belongs).
2. Click Edit to change the properties of the highlighted entry (depending upon the list to which the button belongs): Code or Attributes.
3. Click Delete to delete the highlighted entry from the list.
Code
To create a new code or edit an existing code, enter the code details:
202
1. The Name of the code.
2. The Description for the code.
3. The Type of the objects that the code describes: Point, Line or Area. Each type has an associated plotting
style(s) that can be edited.
l Point: Set a symbol and attributes for points and color. Can be used in Surface.
l Line: Set a symbol for nodes, style and thickness for lines, and color. Can be used in Surface and as
a Breakline.
l Area: Set a symbol for nodes, style and thickness for the boundary, filling style and transparency for
the area, and color. Can be used in Surface, as a Breakline or/and an Exclusion Area.
l Attribute: Select the radio buttons on this tab to enter the code at the beginning of a line/area (Start)
or at every node point along the line/area (Each Node)
l Surface: Select the corresponding check box on this tab to use the code in Surface, as a Breakline
or/and an Exclusion Area
4. Determine a Layer for the code if required.
Attributes
To create a new attribute or edit an existing attribute, enter the attribute details:
1. The Name of the attribute.
2. The Type of the attribute. Text, Bool, Date-Time, Integer, Menu or Real Number. Each type has an associated settings that can be edited.
l Text: Select this if the attribute value is an alpha-numeric string. Set the maximum number of characters you can enter.
l Bool: Select a boolean value.
l Date-Time: Use the default (current date) and time for the code attribute or set the date and time from
the drop-down list.
l Integer: Select this if the attribute value is an integer. Set the minimum and the maximum values of
the attribute.
l Menu: Select this to assign a list of values to select for the attribute. The values are entered in the
field and added to the list with the Add button. To remove a value from the list, select the value from
the list and click
l
203
.
Real Number: Select this if the attribute value is a real number. Set the minimum and maximum values of the attribute.
3. The Default value for the code attribute. You can leave this field empty only when the Required
check box is not selected. Enter the value and select the Required check box to make sure that the
default value for the code attribute is defined.
Edit Linework
The Linework dialog contains a list of existing Lineworks, and the two windows, that present the general
view of the selected linework in the horizontal and vertical planes. To view the current selected linework in a
larger map, double-click one of the map plots.
Note that the double click on the map and property buttons are disabled if accessing this dialog from the
Alignment Pair dialog.
l
l
l
Click Edit to edit the properties of the selected linework:
Points in Line tab
Layer/Style tab
Click Add to create a new linework.
Click Delete to delete the selected line from the list.
Points in Line tab
The Points in Line tab allows you to edit the selected line. The list contains the points with their codes that
compose the line, and the plot displays the line image.
To edit the line:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If required, change the Name of the line.
To delete a point from the line, highlight the point and click the red minus button.
To obtain information about a single point, highlight the point and click the Info button.
The icon next the Select Points field shows the control code from the linework package for the highlighted point. Click the icon and, if required, select another control code. Also, the selection of points
From Map enables you to set such a control code.
5. From the Select Points drop-down list, choose an option to select a point(s) from the job to add to the
end of the line.
204
All - all the job points.
l By Range - points from a range. More...
l By Code - points of a selected code. More...
l By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
l By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain distance. More...
l By Name - a point found by its name. More...
l By Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
l From Map - points selected graphically from the map. Select the points by clicking them on the map;
points that are sequentially clicked are connected with a line. More...
l From List - points from a list of points. More...
6. Use the up and down arrows to move the highlighted point up or down in the ordering.
l
Learn more about the icon description on the dialog.
Select Points From List tab
Lists the points in the current job to select.
The buttons available in this dialog serve the following purposes:
l
l
Expand the Find drop-down list and select an option to find a point:
By Range,
By Code,
By Code String,
By Radius,
By Name,
By Layer or
From Map
Click Find Next to find the next point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the previous Find.
The icon
brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Pop-up menu
If required, you can switch on any of the following functions:
205
l
l
l
Select Show Scan Points to display the scan points in the list.
Select Show AutoTopo Points to display the AutoTopo points in the list.
Select Edit Points to edit a point in the job. More...
Layer/Style
To edit the linework properties to display the line and existing points in the selected linework on the map:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Layer from the drop-down list of existing layers in the job. Click
to edit a layer.
In Point Style, select an icon for the points from the drop-down list and check its display.
In Line Style, select a style for the lines and the Width of lines in points.
Click Color to choose the color for the point and the line.
Edit Area
Contains a list of existing areas and the two windows that represent the view of the selected area in the horizontal and vertical planes. To view the current selected area in a larger map, double-click one of the map
plots.
l
l
l
Click Edit to edit the properties of the selected area:
Points in Area
Layer/Style
Click Add to create a new area.
Click Delete to remove the selected area from the list.
Points in Area tab
Displays a list of existing points in the selected Area and the general view of the area boundary. Area is
bound with a closed line. Line nodes (points) have the same code of area type to form an area boundary. The
point highlighted in the list of points will be marked with a yellow circle on the map view.
To edit the area:
206
1.
2.
3.
4.
If required, change the Name of the area.
To delete a point from the area, highlight the point and click the red minus button.
To obtain information about a single point, highlight the point and click the Info button.
The icon next the Select Points field shows the control code from the linework package for the highlighted
point. Click the icon and, if required, select another control code. Also, the selection of points From Map
enables you to set such a control code.
5. From the Select Points drop-down list, choose an option to select a point(s) from the job to add to the end
of the line.
l All - all the job points.
l By Range - points from a range. More...
l By Code - points of a selected code. More...
l By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
l By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain distance. More...
l By Name - a point found by its name. More...
l By Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
l From Map - points selected graphically from the map. Select the points by clicking them on the map;
points that are sequentially clicked are connected with a line to arrange an area. More...
l From List - points from a list of points. More...
l From Line - all points from a linework. More...
6. Use the up and down arrows to move the highlighted point up or down in the ordering.
Learn more about the icon description on the dialog.
Layer/Style tab
To edit the area properties to display the line and existing points in the selected area on the map:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
207
Select the Layer from the drop-down list of existing layers in the job. Click
to edit a layer.
In Point Style, select an icon for the points from the drop-down list and check its display.
In Line Style, select a style for the lines and the Width of lines in points.
In Area Style, select a fill style and transparency for the area.
Click Color to choose the color for the point, the line and the area.
Edit Point Lists
The List of Point Lists dialog contains a list of existing Point Lists, and the two windows, which display the
general view of the selected list in the horizontal and vertical planes. To view the currently selected point list
in a larger map, double-click one of the map plots.
l
l
l
l
Click Edit to edit the properties of the selected point list:
Point List tab
Click Add to create a new point list.
Click Delete to remove the selected point list from the list.
Click Copy to create a copy of the selected point list with a new name.
Point List tab
Displays a list and the map view of existing points in the selected Point List. The point highlighted in the list
of points will be marked with a yellow circle on the map view.
To edit the point list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If required, change the Name of the point list.
To delete a point from the point list, highlight the point and click the red minus button.
To obtain information about a single point, highlight the point and click the Info button.
From the Select Points drop-down list, choose an option to select a point(s) from the job to add to the
end of the point list.
l All - all the job points.
l By Range - points from a range. More...
l By Code - points of a selected code. More...
l By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
l By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain distance. More...
l By Name - a point found by its name. More...
l By Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
l From Map - points selected graphically from the map. Select the points by clicking them on the
map; points that are sequentially clicked are connected with a line. More...
l From List - points from a list of points. More...
5. Use the up and down arrows to move the highlighted point up or down in the ordering.
Learn more about the icon description on the dialog.
208
Edit Raw Data
All the raw data collected is displayed in a list on this dialog. When a line is selected, the column titles reflect the
data in that line.
The Raw Data list includes information about:
l
Name: Point name and the icon displaying the type of the point. Learn more about the icon descriptions
for the points. The icon
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
stands for a raw note made in the field during the survey.
Type: The type of measurement. Reset GNSS type stands for the action performed manually or automatically to reset the RTK engine.
Codes: Codes for the point, also the Strings associated with the codes if the String display is selected.
HI/Ant Ht: For the Optical mode - the height of the instrument; for the GPS+ mode - the antenna height.
Coordinates: The Coordinates of the Base are displayed and the vectors to the base from the rover of the
collected points. The vectors are only displayed for the points collected with fixed solutions.The TS point
coordinates.
Ctrl Code: Control codes associated with the point.
Solution Type, PDOP, H/V RMS, number of GPS and GLONASS Satellites:For points collected in the
GPS mode.
Notes: The short note for the point.
Local Time: It is the controller date and time when the point was stored. For points collected in the GPS
mode, it is the time of the epoch whose coordinates are stored or the time of the last accepted epoch when
averaging.
The buttons available in this dialog serve the following purposes:
l
l
l
l
209
Expand the Find drop-down list and select an option to find a point:
By Code,
By Name
Click Find Next to find the next point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the previous Find.
Click First / Last to move the cursor to the first or last point.
Click Edit or double click on a line in the list to see and edit the data in a separate dialog. You can edit:
TS survey: the point name, code, height of reflector, backsight azimuth, note, height of instrument and
scale.
DL survey: the name, code, note and vertical offset for the side-shot point.
l
GPS survey: the name, code, antenna height, antenna type, height measurement type, note and offset
data for the surveyed point.
GPS Base Station, started out of the current job: Phase Center coordinates and use of relative antenna
calibration data.
GPS Base Station, started in the current job: Mark coordinates, the point name and code, the antenna
type, height, height measurement type and use of relative calibration data.
Note: The editing does not result in immediate recomputations of the point coordinates. Instead the raw
data may be downloaded onto office software and recomputations can be performed there.
Click Recompute to re-compute the point coordinates after editing the point's raw data.
The icon
brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Edit Optical Raw Data
The Edit Raw Data dialog displays the properties of the selected record and allows you to change the name,
code, notes, and some other record specific data (for instance, the height of instrument/reflector for total station survey and vertical offset for leveling).
Edit GPS Raw Data
The Edit Raw Data dialog displays the properties of the selected record and allows you to change the name,
code, notes, and some other record specific data (for instance, GPS antenna information and offset data).
Edit Raw Base Station
The GPS base station can be started at a point (mark) of known coordinates in the current job or run out of
the job and may show in raw data the Mark or Phase Center Coordinates, respectively.
The point's name, code, mark coordinates and the antenna information can be changed for the base started in
the job. For the base, which runs out of the job, you can edit the phase center coordinates and use of relative antenna calibration data.
210
Pop-up menu
l
l
l
Job Info: displays the Job Info dialog.
Show Raw GPS+/TS: If the GPS+ mode is active, the GPS+ raw data is displayed by default. If you want
to display the TS raw data in the list, select this menu. Similarly, if you are using the Optical mode, the TS
raw data is displayed and optionally the GPS+ raw data.
Angle Sets Report: This menu item will only be displayed when we are in TS mode and the job contains
angle sets which have been acquired. Click the option to get the Angle Sets Report. More...
Angle Sets Report Setup Selection
An angle set is a group of total station observations at the occupation point which are taken at the same time and
constitute a measurement to a point. This group can have a number of different foresight and backsight
sequences.
The Setup Selection dialog displays a list of all of the occupations in the job which have angle sets associated
with them. The Occupation column displays the points where the occupations was set up. The #Sets column displays the number of angle sets taken at the occupation. The HI column will displays the instrument height of the
occupation.
To generate an angle sets report:
l
l
l
l
Select the checkboxes associated with the occupations for which you want to get the report.
To select all the occupations in the list, click Select All.
To erase all selections of occupations, click Clear All.
Click the Report button to generate the Angle Sets Report.
Angle Sets Report
The Angle Sets Report allows you:
l
211
To review detailed report information on the individual angle sets of only the occupations selected in the
Setup Selection dialog.
l
To save the generated report to a file. To do this, click the icon
. The file will be saved in the
Report folder.
Edit Background Images
The Background Images dialog contains two icons:
Drawings. Opens the list of the available vector background images.
Images. Opens the list of the available raster background images.
Drawing
The left panel of the dialog displays the list of the imported vector images. You can highlight any file and the
right panel will show this drawing. This dialog allows you to:
l
l
Observe the properties of the currently selected file. To do this, click Properties. More...
Remove any drawing file from the list. To do this, select the desired file and click Delete.
Note: If the drawing will be used as background, select the Load as background checkbox (in the Settings
dialog) before importing the file to the job.
Note: To show/hide a drawing on the Map, select /unselect its checkbox in the Drawings tab of the Map Properties dialog.
212
Properties
This dialog displays the following properties of the selected file.
l
l
The name of layers which were used in the drawing.
Quantity of points, lines, area, points list, codes and surfaces in the given file.
Images
The dialog displays the list of available images for the background, their formats, file names and linear units.
Learn more about the background images in MAGNET Field.
This dialog allows you to:
l
l
l
Add an image file to the list. To do this, click Add to browse the directories for the image. To show/hide
an image on the Map, select /unselect the checkbox for it. You can select several images for displaying on
the Map.
Remove an image from the list. To do this, select the desired image and click Delete.
Observe the properties of the currently selected image. To do this, click Properties. More...
To save the added and selected images, click
. If the World File for the selected background image file
does not exist or an error occurs, a warning message will be displayed, and the dialog will appear again so you
can select another file.
Background Images
Any raster image with a TIF, JPG, or BMP extension is supported. The images must have geo-referenced data, to
be positioned correctly under all observed data on the map screen,
Note: The geo-referenced data defines the relationship between pixels coordinates of the image and real datum/grid/ground /local coordinates.
GeoTIFF images already contain geo-referenced data, while the others use a separate file which defines the geographic location of the image. This file is called a World File.
213
A World File contains information about the size of the corresponding image and the coordinates of the georeference point (the upper left corner of the image) in the coordinate system of the job. The World File must
have the same filename extension associated with the image format (TFW, JGW or BPW) and should be located in the same directory as the image file.
Properties
This dialog displays the properties of the selected file.
l
l
l
l
l
The Name of the image file.
File Path to the image file on the device.
File Type of the image has been saved as.
The Units field allows you to define the units the image.
The Use World File check box defines whether the image needs a World File to be plotted correctly
or not. This check box can be unselected only for GeoTIFF images.
If the selected image needs a World File to be plotted properly, select the Projection in which the coordinates
in the World File are given: either Current job projection or UTM.
Edit Surfaces
The Surfaces dialog contains a list of existing Surfaces, and a panel of the general view of the selected surface.
l
l
Click Edit to edit the selected surface properties. More...
Click Delete to remove the selected surface from the job.
Surfaces Properties
The Surface Properties dialog includes the Info tab which displays information about the area covered the
selected surface and the Style tab that allows you to edit:
l
l
The Name of the surface.
The Line Style, the line's form, width and color.
214
Edit Sessions
The Sessions dialog allows you to configure and edit automatic surveys with GPS receivers. The receivers can
each be given a descriptive name and added to a list, easing the task of controlling multiple-receiver surveys.
The buttons on this dialog serve the following purposes:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Use the corresponding delete button
to remove a Session survey configuration from the Sessions
list and a receiver from the Receivers list.
Click Edit to change a Session survey configuration highlighted in the Sessions list. More...
Click Add in the Sessions field to add a Session survey configuration to the Sessions list. More...
Click Add in the Receivers field to give the receiver a name to add the receiver to the Receivers list.
Use the arrow button to add a Session survey configuration to a receiver in the Receivers list. To do this,
highlight the preferred session in the Sessions field and the necessary receiver in the Receivers field, then
click this button. Expand the receiver node to see sessions added to this receiver.
Select the Sleep mode after session ends check box to put the receiver into sleep mode after a session you
apply ends.
Session Setup
The Session setup dialog allows you to program a session which can then be loaded into the receiver to automatically start logging data at a specific date and time, and whether the antenna is static or moving.
Specify the parameters for the session:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
215
In Site Name, the name of the site where the receiver will be placed for the survey.
Type of survey, either static or kinematic.
In Start Time, the day of week and the local time that the receiver will start the survey.
In End Time, the day of week and the local time that the receiver will end the survey.
In Interval, the time between successive epochs logged to the raw data file.
In Min SVs, the minimum number of SVs to use when logging an epoch. Epochs containing fewer satellites will not be logged to the raw data file.
7. Select the Antenna Type from the drop-down list.
8. The measured Antenna Height and type (Vertical or Slant) of measurement.
Click
to save the session and to return to the Sessions dialog.
Edit Stake Reports
The Stake Reports List dialog displays a list of existing reports in the job and information about each report:
its name, type (icon and name), configuration and references . The
icon near the report name means
that the report is set as current for this type. Click the icon to change the report status.
The buttons on the dialog serve the following purposes:
l
l
l
l
Click View to view the full report selected. More...
Click Delete to remove the highlighted report from the list. You will have to confirm deletion twice
before the report data is deleted.
Click Edit to edit the report selected in the list. More...
Click Add to create a new report.
Stake Report
To edit the selected stake report:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Name of the report.
Select the Report Type from the list.
If required, edit the report Configuration for the report type.
Select the Set Current check box to set a new report current.
View Stake Report
Displays design references and appropriate information for this report type.
216
Displays the Stakeout Information for the point being saved.
Layers
The Layers dialog contains a list of layers in the job, and a set of tools for editing. The list displays the name,
color and status of each layer.
To edit a layer, highlight it and use necessary tools:
l
l
l
Use either
or
button to make the selected layer visible/invisible.
To change the color for the objects in this layer, click a square in the Color column and select a desired
color in the Select Color dialog.
To sort the layer by Name, or Color, or Status, click the corresponding column's title. The existing layers
will be arranged by this parameter in the dialog. During layers sorting the
and
will be dis-
abled, but the View button will be enabled.
l
To sort the layer in order to display on the Map, click the View button and use either
or
button to move the selected layer up or down in the ordering. This option is useful when the job
contains the overlapped objects:
217
l
l
l
l
l
To change the color for the objects in this layer, click a square in the Color column and select a desired
color in the Select Color dialog.
Click Add to create a new layer. After clicking the button, the Add Layer dialog appears. The dialog
contains three tabs, where you can enter all needed features for the new layer:
l Layer tab
l Style tab
l Avoidance tab
Click Edit to change the properties of the highlighted layer. After clicking the button, the Edit Layer
dialog appears. The dialog contains four tabs, where you can edit all needed features for the existing
layer:
l Layer tab
l Style tab
l Objects tab
l Avoidance tab
Click Delete to delete the highlighted layer from the list. The default layer cannot be deleted. You can
delete a layer which does not have any objects.
Right clicking on a layer opens the context menu:
l Check: places the check mark in the Visible check box to make this layer visible. In this case,
the icon
l
Uncheck: clears check mark in the Visible check box to make this layer invisible. In this case,
the icon
l
l
l
l
stands in the On column.
stands in the On column.
Select All: highlights all the layers in the list.
Select All Below: highlights all the layers below the highlighted layer.
Select Multiple: highlights any selected layer.
Cancel Selection: removes highlights in the list.
Note: If highlighting multiple layers, you can check / uncheck or delete all these layers.
218
Layer tab
The Layer tab allows you to edit the selected layer's information or create a new layer:
1. In Layer Name, enter a desired name of the layer.
2. Select the Visible check box to make this layer visible/invisible. The icon
stands to mark the visible
layer.
3. Enter a Note for the layer.
Style tab
The Style tab allows you to edit the style for drawing points, lines and areas to be displayed in this layer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
In Point Type panel, select an icon for the points from the drop-down list and check its display.
In Line Style, select a style for the lines and the Width of lines in points.
In Area Style, select a fill style and Transparency for the area.
Click Color to select the color for the objects in this layer.
Objects tab
This tab will display if you open the existing layer for editing. Expand the tree nodes to see the names of the
objects (Points, Lines, Areas and Roads) belonging to the selected layer.
Avoidance tab
The Avoidance tab allows you to create a layer for an avoidance zone. The
blinking notification dis-
plays in Topo / Autotopo / Stake dialog, if a TS or a GPS measurement is performed in this area.
219
l
l
In the Avoidance mode you can select for which planes the option will be used for point, linework
and area:
l select OFF to switch the Avoidance mode off;
l select 2D for working in the horizontal plane only;
l select 3D for working in the horizontal and vertical planes.
In the Proximity field, specify the size of a boundary area for point, linework, area or surface. The
blinking notification will be displayed when a measurement is performed within the boundary area or
avoidance area. This boundary will be defined by the distance from the object:
l for point:
2D mode
l
for a linework:
2D mode
l
3D mode
3D mode
for area:
2D mode
3D mode
220
where:
l
l
l
l
l
- boundary and avoidance areas.
In the Surface mode field, select a way of position of the boundary area for a surface in the horizontal and
vertical planes.
l select OFF to switch the Avoidance mode off.
l select Above to place the boundary area above the surface. The blinking notification will be displayed when a measurement is performed in the boundary area:
l
l
l
221
#1 ; #2 ; #3 - points,
#1 - #2; #2 - #3 - linework,
4 - proximity,
select Below to place the boundary area below the surface. The blinking notification will be displayed when a measurement is performed in the boundary area:
select Above / Below to place the boundary area above and below the surface. The blinking notification will be displayed when a measurement is performed within the boundary area:
select Outside to place the boundary area above and below the surface. The blinking notification
will be displayed when a measurement is performed outside the boundary area:
where:
l
l
l
1 - surface,
2 - proximity,
3 - boundary area.
Note: If you do not enter any changes in the tab and close it, the Avoidance check box will be automatically
unselected in the Layer tab .
Edit Roads folder
Click an icon to perform the task:
Roads
Edits properties of existing roads and create new roads.
Horizontal
Edits an available horizontal alignment and create a new one.
Vertical
Edits an available vertical alignment and create a new one.
Templates
Edits properties of an existing x-section template and create a new one.
222
X-Sections
Edits available x-sections and create a new one.
String Set
Edits an existing set of strings and create a new set.
Equation Set
Edits an existing station (or chainage) for horizontal and vertical alignment.
Edit Roads
The Roads dialog displays a list of the roads in the current job, and the plot of the selected road in the horizontal
and vertical planes.
l
l
l
Click Add to create a new Road. More...
Click Edit to view/edit the parameters of the selected road. More...
Click Delete to remove the selected road from the job.
The icon
brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Roads pop-up menu
If required, you can exchange roads:
l
l
l
l
Select Import Road(s) From Job to copy roads from another job. More...
Select Import Road(s) From File to import roads data from a file. More...
Select Export Road(s) To Job to copy roads to another job. More...
Select Export Road(s) To File to create a file with the roads data. More...
Add/Edit Roads
In this dialog you can edit the properties of the road's Alignment and Surface.
223
Edit Road's Alignment
To edit the selected road alignment or to add a new road alignment:
1. Enter the Name of the alignment.
2. Select the Layer in which this road should be placed. The associated
button brings up the dia-
log to edit Layers.
3. In the Horizontal Alignment drop-down list you'll find all available horizontal alignments. Select one
for your Road. The associated
button brings up the Horizontal Alignment list where you can
add, edit and delete Horizontal Alignments.
4. In the Vertical Alignment drop-down list you'll find all available vertical alignments. Select one for
your Road. The associated
button brings up the Vertical Alignment list where you can add,
edit and delete Vertical Alignments.
5. Enter the Start Station of the Road. Start Station is the start position along the Road Alignment.
6. Enter the Interval at which the next station position will be decided. Negative values can be entered,
which will cause the advancement to decrease instead of increase along the line.
Edit Road's Surface
The road surface can be described through either X-Section Set or String Set.
l
Toggling the button between the two will change the contents of the drop-down list. If you want to
associate your road's surface with a cross section set or a string set, select one here. Click
l
to edit
the Cross Section Sets or the String Sets.
In the Working Corridor field, enter:
- Left side working corridor. The left corridor must be lower or equal to the right corridor.
- Right side working corridor.
To calculate the road's points, click the icon
and select Calculate Road Points from the pop-up menu.
More...
224
Calculate Road Points
To generate points along, to the right and to the left of the center line of the road, along its entire length:
1. In the Points to Generate field, define the points to generate:
l Select the Centerline Points check box to generate the center line points.
l Select the Points Right of Centerline check box to generate the points to the right of the center line.
l Select the Points Left of Centerline check box to generate the points to the left of the center line.
l Also, if it is desired to include the Transition Points, place the check mark in the corresponding field,
select the types of transition points (More...) and select a Prefix/Suffix for them, if necessary, in the
appearing field below.
2. Enter the Station Interval between the generated points. By default, it is the Station Interval set in the Start
Pt tab in the Roads dialog.
3. Click the Next button to continue until the
button is available. Click it to open the Calculating
Road Points status screen.
Transition Points
This dialog allows you to select the types of transition points to generate.
1. Select the corresponding check boxes to choose:
l end point on the horizontal alignment
l middle point on curve of the horizontal alignment
l end point on the vertical alignment
l high point on the vertical alignment
l low point on the vertical alignment
2. Click
to save selection.
Centerline Points
To calculate points along the center line:
225
1. Enter the Name of the first point.
2. Select the code from the drop-down list. Click
to set the point attributes of the points being gen-
erated. More...
3. If required, select Prefix/Suffix to be added to the generated point name.
4. Select the Save Points To Point List check box if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate points list. When checked, a field appears where the name for the list can be set.
Right/Left Offset Points
To calculate points to the right or left of the center line:
1. Enter the Name of the first point.
2. Select the code from the drop-down list. Click
to set the point attributes of the points being gen-
erated. More...
3. If required, select Prefix/Suffix to be added to the generated point name.
4. Select the Save Points To Point List check box if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate points list. When checked, a field appears where the name for the list can be set.
5. Set the offset of the point from the center line along two dimensions: horizontal (the Right/Left field)
and vertical (the Up/Down field) relative to the surface (the Surface Offset type) or to the horizontal
line (the Flat Offset type).
Edit Horizontal Alignments
The dialog displays a list of the horizontal alignments in the current job, and the plot of the selected horizontal
alignment.
l
l
l
Click Add to create a new horizontal alignment.
Click Edit to view/edit the currently selected horizontal alignment. More...
Click Delete to remove the selected horizontal alignment from the job. You will be asked for confirmation.
226
Add/Edit Horizontal Alignments
In this dialog you can edit the elements of the Horizontal Alignment and its Start Point.
The icon
brings up the pop-up menu. Select Edit Points to edit a point in the job. More...
Start Point
The Start Pt tab allows you to edit the following parameters:
l
l
In Alignment Name, the name of the horizontal alignment.
In Start Point, the name of the start point that can be entered manually (if a new point name is entered, the
point will be created with the coordinates entered in the North, East and Height fields) or chosen from the
map
l
l
l
or from the list
.
North and East display the local plane coordinates of the point.
In Start enter the starting station for the horizontal alignment.
In Equation Set select the existing Station Equation Set. More...
Horizontal Alignment
The Hz tab shows the list of horizontal alignment elements, the horizontal alignment plot and the start and end station (or chainage) of each element.
l
227
The element list has the following columns:
Element: the icon and the name of the element: line, spiral, curve, or intersection point
Length: the length of the element
Azimuth: the azimuth at the beginning of the element;
Radius: the radius of the curve, spiral or intersection point (the radius of the spiral is the radius at the end of
the 'incoming' spiral or at the beginning of the 'exiting' spiral; the radius of the intersection point is the
radius of the corresponding curve.)
A1: spiral constant 1: Length of Tangent-Spiral to Spiral-Curve. The spiral constant is the square root of the
product of the length and the radius of the spiral.
A2: spiral constant 2: Length of Curve-Spiral to Spiral-Tangent. The spiral constant is the square root of the
l
l
l
l
l
product of the length and the radius of the spiral.
Click Add to select elements to add after the last element (Line, Curve, Spiral, or Intersection
Point).
Click Insert to select elements to insert at the selected location in the list (Line, Curve, Spiral, or
Intersection Point).
Click Edit to change the properties of the selected element.
Click Equations to open the Edit Station Equation Set dialog. In this dialog you can create a new
Station Equation Set or edit/view an existing Station Equation Set.
Click Delete to remove the highlighted element from the horizontal alignment.
Line
The Line dialog allows you to add a line:
l
l
l
l
Enter the Length of the line element.
The Azimuth is editable only for the starting element of the road because, by default, the azimuth is set
tangent to the previous element.
To change the azimuth of all other elements, clear the check mark from the Tangent to Previous box.
Note: Use caution when setting the azimuth, since road elements are usually tangential to each other.
The plot will show the element's appearance.
Curve
The Curve dialog allows you to add a curve:
228
l
l
l
l
l
l
Enter the Radius of the curve or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius: Chord
Angle or Curve Angle.
Enter the Length of the curve element or one of four parameters unambiguously defining the curve length:
Chord, Tangent, Middle Ordinate (the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of the corresponding curve), Delta (the angle between the radii corresponding to the curve), or External (a section of
a line connecting the center of the arc with the vertex of the angle).
The Azimuth is editable only for the starting element of the road because, by default, the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element.
To change the azimuth of all other elements, clear the check mark from the Tangent to Previous box.
Note: Use caution when setting the azimuth, since road elements are usually tangential to each other.
Select the direction of Turn. The Right value stands for clockwise direction, the Left value for counterclockwise direction.
The plot will show the element's appearance.
Spiral
The Spiral dialog allows you to add a spiral:
l
l
l
l
l
l
229
Enter the Radius of the curve at the start and end points or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius: Chord Angle or Curve Angle.
Enter either the Length of the spiral element or Spiral Constant. The Spiral Constant is the square root of
the product of the length and the radius of the spiral.
The Azimuth is editable only for the starting element of the road because, by default, the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element.
To change the azimuth of all other elements, clear the check mark from the Tangent to Previous box.
Note: Use caution when setting the azimuth, since road elements are usually tangential to each other.
Select the direction of Turn. The Right value stands for clockwise direction, the Left value for counterclockwise direction.
Select the Direction of movement along the spiral:
l
TS(traverse-spiral) to SC(spiral-circle) (entering the turn)
l
CS(circle-spiral) to ST(spiral-traverse) (exiting the turn)
l
CS (circle-spiral) to SC (spiral-circle)
230
l
The plot will show the element's appearance.
Intersection Point
The Intersect Pt dialog allows you to add an intersection point:
l
l
l
l
l
Enter the name of the intersection Point or select it from the map or the list. Either enter the name manually
or the North and East coordinates.
North and East display the plane coordinates of the intersection point; they cannot be changed for an existing point.
Enter the Radius of the curve or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius: Chord
Angle or Curve Angle.
Enter either the Length or Spiral Constant for two spiral elements. The Spiral Constant is the square root
of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral.
The plot will show the element's appearance.
Edit Vertical Alignments
The dialog displays a list of the vertical alignments in the current job, and a preview window of the selected vertical alignment.
l
l
231
Click Add to create a new vertical alignment. More...
Click Edit to view/edit the currently selected vertical alignment. More...
l
Click Delete to remove the selected vertical alignment from the job. You will be asked for confirmation.
Add Vertical Alignments
To create a new vertical alignment (VAL):
1. Enter a Name for the vertical alignment.
2. Select the VAL Type:
l Length & Grade: select to create the vertical alignment by sections of graded lines. The vertical
alignment is presented as a set of sections between the stations where the heights are known (usually these are the extremes of the vertical alignment line), and the interval around the station
where the vertical alignment line has a parabolic shape.
l Station & Elevation: select to create the vertical alignment by elements, starting and finishing at
any station where you want and starting again.
3. Click
to save settings and continue creating the vertical alignment.
Edit Vertical Alignments
In this dialog you can add/edit the elements of the Vertical Alignment and its Start Point.
The icon
brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Pop-up menu
If required, you can exchange roads:
l
l
l
Select Edit Points to edit a point in the job. More...
Select High/Low Positions to observe the stations of the highest and low positions in the vertical alignment. More...
Select Grade Display to choose the display of grade values in the dialogs. More...
232
High/Low Positions
This dialog will display any extremums found along a vertical alignment. The types of extremums found are the
high or low positions of arcs, curves and the transition points between two straight lines.
Alnt Name: The name of the vertical alignment.
The High/Low Positions list contains the following data:
Station: The station along the vertical alignment.
Type: The High or Low type of position.
Ell ht/Elevation (Unit): Ellipsoidal height or Elevation, depending on the coordinate system used.
Radius (Unit): Radius of an arc with an high/low extremum.
The icon
brings up the pop-up menu. Select the Save to File option to save the current list to a file with
the default file name: "HighLowPositions.txt". You can edit the file name.
Grade Display
The Grade Display dialog allows you to choose the desired dimension for grade values: Percentage, Run:Rise, or
Slope.
Start Point
The Start Pt tab allows you to edit the following parameters:
l
In Alignment Name, the name of the vertical alignment.
l
In Start Point, the name of the start point that can be entered manually or chosen from the map
from the list
l
l
l
233
.
Elev displays the elevation of the point.
In Start , enter the starting station for the vertical alignment.
In Equation Set select the existing Station Equation Set. More...
or
Vertical Alignment
The Vert tab shows the list of vertical alignment elements, the vertical alignment plot, and the start and end
stations (or chainage) for each element.
l
l
l
l
l
l
The element list data depends on the vertical alignment type:
Element: the icon and the name of the element
Length: the length of the element
Start Grade, End Grade: the grades of the element, at the starting and ending points. For a Vertical
grade element these values are the same.
Station: the station distance
Elevation: the elevation value on the station
VC Length: the vertical curve length is the length of the interval near the station, where the alignment
has a parabolic shape
Click Add to select elements from the floating menu to add after the last element:
Vertical grade, Parabola, or Circular arc for the Length & Grade type of the vertical alignment,
Parabola, Circular arc, or Grade Point for the Station & Elevation type (more...).
Click Insert to select elements from the floating menu to insert at the selected location in the list.
Click Edit to change the properties of the selected element.
Click Delete to remove the highlighted element from the vertical alignment.
Click Equations to open the Edit Station Equation Set dialog. In this dialog you can create a new
Station Equation Set or edit/view an existing Station Equation Set.
Add Vertical Grade
To add/edit a vertical grade to the vertical alignment of the Length & Grade type:
1. Enter the Length of the vertical grade element.
2. Enter the Grade of the element in percentage. If the grade is falling, the value should be set negative.
3. Observe the preview.
Add Parabola
To add/edit a parabola to the vertical alignment of the Length & Grade type:
234
1. When you edit an existing parabola element, you can change it for the Circular arc type in the Curve Type
field.
2. Enter the Length of the parabola element.
3. Enter the Start Grade and End Grade of the element in percentage. If the grade is falling, the value
should be set negative.
4. Observe the preview.
Add Circular arc
To add/edit a circular arc to the vertical alignment of the Length & Grade type:
1. When you edit an existing circular arc element, you can change it for the Parabola type in the Curve Type
field.
2. Enter the Arc Radius of the circular arc element.
3. Enter the Start Grade and End Grade of the element in percentage. If the grade is falling, the value
should be set negative.
4. Observe the preview.
Add Element
To add/edit an element to the vertical alignment of the Station & Elevation type:
1. Enter the end Station for the element.
2. Enter the Elevation at the station.
3. In Curve Length or Arc/Grade Pt, enter the length of the vertical parabola or circular arc, respectively. (It
is assumed that the station is located in the middle of the interval.)
4. The Previous/Next field will show the calculated values of Grade and Length of the previous/next part of
the vertical alignment.
Edit X-Section Templates
The X-Sect Templates dialog displays a list of the existing templates and a plot of the highlighted template.
The list contains three columns: Name (the name of the template), Cut Slope and Fill Slope values.
235
l
l
l
l
Click Add to create a new template.
Click Edit to change the properties of the selected template. More...
Click Delete to remove the highlighted template from the list.
Use the arrow icon to hide/show the plot.
X-Sect Template
To add/edit an X-Sect Template:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Enter the Name of the template.
In the Slope field, enter the Cut and Fill values for the slope (Run values for cut and fill for a unit rise).
These values represent the horizontal increment of the slope for a unit vertical increment. The Cut
slope is used when the road surface is below the terrain, and the Fill Slope is used when the road surface is above the terrain.
The dialog displays a list of segments comprising the template and a plot of the template. A list of segments consists of three columns:
Segment Point: the name of the segment's end point on the x-section template
Hz: the horizontal offset
Vert: the vertical offset
Use the icons
and
to show the template to right and left.
Use the arrow icon to hide/show the plot.
Use the buttons to edit the segments in the list:
Add: to create a new segment that will be attached after the last segment in the list.
Insert: to create a new segment that will be inserted in the list above the currently highlighted segment.
Edit: to change the parameters of the highlighted segment. More...
Delete: to remove the highlighted segment from the template.
Segment
To add/edit the template segment:
1. In Segment Point, enter the name of the segment end point.
2. In the Offset field:
236
l
l
Enter the Horizontal offset.
Press the Down/Up/Grade/Ratio button to select the type and enter the value of the vertical offset.
Entered as Grade (in percentage) or as Ratio, the vertical offset will be recalculated to linear units
after
is pressed.
Edit X-Sections
The X-Sect Set dialog displays a list of the existing x-section sets and a preview window of the highlighted x-section set.
l
l
l
Click Add to create a new x-section set.
Click Edit to change the properties of the selected x-section set. More...
Click Delete to remove the highlighted x-section set from the list.
X-Section Set
The Edit X-Sect Set dialog contains a list of stations, where x-sections are applied. It also displays a preview of
the highlighted x-section.
l
l
l
l
The list of x-sections has the following columns:
Station: The station where the x-section is applied.
Left X Section, Right X Section: The names of the x-sections for the left and right parts of the road relative
to the center line. The left and right cross sections can be different.
Click Add to create a new x-section.
Click Edit to change the properties of the selected x-section. More...
Click Delete to remove the highlighted x-section from the list.
X-Section
To edit/add a cross section:
237
1. Enter the Station where the cross section will be applied.
2. From X-Sect, select which x-sections will be applied: Left Only, Right Only, or Both.
3. Select the Left X-Section and Right X-Section for the left and right parts of the road as required.
These can be chosen only from the existing x-sections.
4. The preview window will show the edited x-section.
Edit String Set
The String Set dialog lists the names of the currently available String Sets. A preview window displays the
currently selected String Set.
l
l
l
Click Add to create a new string set.
Click Edit to change the properties of the selected string set. More...
Click Delete to remove the highlighted string set from the list.
Add/Edit String Set
To add/edit a new/existing String Set:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enter the name of the String Set.
The List of Strings contains all Strings that comprise the String Set.
If required, use the up and down arrows to change the order of the Strings in the list.
The plot will display the currently selected String. It can be hidden with the arrow button.
Click Delete to delete all the selected Strings.
Click Edit to edit the currently selected String (double-clicking on the String will also edit it). More...
Click Add to add a new String to the current String Set.
Add/Edit Road String
To add/edit a new/existing Road String:
1. Enter the name of the String.
2. The list contains all pairs of the horizontal (Hz Alnt) and vertical (Vt Alnt) alignments that comprise
the road string.
238
3.
4.
5.
6.
The plots will display the alignment pair currently selected. They can be hidden with the arrow button.
Click Delete to delete the selected pair from the Road String.
Click Edit to edit the alignment pair. More...
Click Add to add a new alignment pair to the current Road String.
Add/Edit Alignment Pair
This dialog allows you to create/edit a Road String's alignment pair in two ways:
1. From the Hz Alnt and Vt Alnt drop-down lists, select the horizontal and vertical alignments.
2. In the Select field, by creating the alignment pair from a linework:
l Click From List to select a linework from the list. More...
l Click From Map to select a linework from the map. More...
The icon
l
l
brings up the pop-up menu to edit:
Horizontal alignments, select Hz Alnt. More...
Vertical alignments, select Vt Alnt. More...
Select Linework from Map
Select a Linework on the map, which will be passed to the previous dialog for conversion or list selection. Note
that you cannot select any lines other than Linework lines.
Station Equation Set
While contracting road there may be a situation when the original stationing does not fit to the actual alignment,
and a new center line stationing may be needed. Station Equation is a method to link old and new roadway stationing. Station equations are used to change the stationing from a given spot forward or back, along the alignment:
239
The dialog displays a list of the Station Equation Sets in the current job:
l
l
l
Click Add to create a new station equation set. More..
Click Edit to view/edit a highlighted station equation set. More...
Click Delete to remove the selected station equation set from the job. You will be asked for confirmation.
Note: The Station Equation Set consist of the separate Station Equations.
Add / Edit Station Equation Set
The dialog displays a list of the Station Equations for the given Station Equation Set:
l
l
l
l
In theEquation Set field enter or change a name of the station equation set.
Click Edit to view/edit a highlighted Station Equation. More...
Click Add to create a new Station Equation that will be attached after the last Station Equation in the
list. More...
Click Insert: to create a new Station Equation that will be inserted in the list above the currently highlighted Station Equation.
240
l
l
Click Delete to remove the selected station equation set from the job. You will be asked for confirmation.
Right clicking on a Station Equation opens the context menu:
l Select All: highlights all the Station Equations in the list.
l Select All Below: highlights all the Station Equations below the highlighted Station Equation.
l Select Multiple: highlights any selected Station Equation.
l Cancel Selection: removes highlights in the list.
Add /Edit Station Equation
In this dialog you can create a new Station Equation or edit/view an existing Station Equations.
l
l
l
241
In the Equation Name filed enter or change a name of the station equation.
In the Back Station filed enter old (designed) station.
In the Ahead Name filed enter new (real) station.
Calculate folder
Click an icon to calculate the task:
Inverse
The four inverse tasks available in the Inverse menu are based on computing the azimuth and distance between two points, given their coordinates.
Point in Direction
Calculates the coordinates of a point, using a known point, and angle and distance
offsets from the known point.
Intersection
Computes the intersection point or points given two known points, and either the direction or distance from the known point.
Calculator
Does calculations and conversion in scientific and standard modes. You type in the
entire equation you want to calculate, press equals, and the result is shown.
Curves
Computes a full set of parameters to determine a curve using four various minimum
sets of specified parameters.
Area
Calculates the area of a polygon formed by any points, or the coordinates of a point/points which form a polygon of the desired area, after being added to the point
list/linework/area.
Angles
Calculates the angle between two lines, which have a common mid point.
Offsets
Calculates the coordinates of points along a line, a curve, or a road.
Adjust
Transforms points and includes five tasks: Rotate, Translate, Scale, 2D Transform
and Traverse Adjustment.
242
Traverse
Calculates traverse and sideshot points, based on horizontal, and vertical offsets along
a direction which is defined by an azimuth, or right, left or deflection angles.
Surface
Calculates data between two surfaces, for a new Surface, and along contour lines.
Enter Plan
This function allows you to draw a plan consists of the elements which are defined
by points, segments and arcs.
Calculate Inverse
Click an icon to calculate the task:
Point To Point
Computes the inverse (azimuth and distance) between two known points.
Point to Line
Computes the station of a known point inverse to a known line.
Point to List
Computes the inverse (azimuth and distance) for all the points in a Points list with respect
to a known point.
Point to Curve
Calculates the station of the known point inverse to the known curve.
Point to Road
Computes the station of a known point inverse to a known road.
Point to Linework
Computes the station of a known point inverse to a known linework.
Inverse Linework
Computes the inverse for all the vertices in a linework with respect to a known point.
243
Two-Point Inverse
To calculate the inverse (azimuth and distance) between two known points:
1. In the Input tab, enter the known points manually or select them from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
l
In From Point, enter the first known point.
In To Point, enter the second known point.
l
Click the Calc button
l
to calculate the inverse.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
Azimuth: the azimuth from the first point to the second point.
HDist: the horizontal distance from one point to another.
VDist: the vertical distance from one point to another. The "-" sign means that the height of the second
point is lower than the height of the first point.
dNorth: the increment of the North coordinate.
dEast: the increment of the East coordinate.
dHeight: the increment of the height.
Grade(Slope): the increment of the height in percentage terms.
Slope distance: the computed distance between the two points.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Inverse Point to Line
To calculate a known point inverse to a known line:
1. In the Input tab:
l Select the known Point name.
l Select the Start Point of the line.
244
l
Select between Azimuth and Az to Pt to enter either the azimuth of the line manually or select
another point to use the azimuth from the known point to this point as the line's direction.
Note: Every point can be entered manually or selected from the map
l
l
or from the list
of
the job points.
When the second point is selected in Az to Pt to set the line, you can select the Store PTL Point
check box to save PTL data of the known point if required.
Set the Start station of the line.
The Point field will display the default name of the known point's projection on the line. You can
change this name.
Select the code for this point from the existing codes and, if required, click
to set the point's
attributes. More...
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the inverse.
2. In the Results tab:
l Observe the results of the calculation:
Projected Point: the name of the known point's projection on the line.
North, East, Elev: the coordinates of the projected point.
From Point: the name of the known point.
The Line information: Start Point: the name of the starting point of the line.
Tangent Azimuth: the azimuth of the known line.
Projected Azimuth: the azimuth of the perpendicular from the known point to the line.
Start Station: the starting station of the line.
Station: indicates the distance between the starting point and the projection of the known point on the
line.
Offset: the horizontal offset between the known point and the projected point.
Height: the vertical offset between the known point and the projected point. The "-" sign means that
the known point is lower than the calculated point.
l
Click
to save the calculated point to the points list.
l
Click
to save the data to a txt file if required.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
245
Inverse Point to Point List
To calculate the inverse (azimuth and distance) for all the points in a Point List with respect to a known point:
1. In the Input tab:
l
Select the known Point. This can be entered manually, selected from the map
list
l
or from the
of the job points.
Select the Point List. The name can be entered manually, selected from the list
of the job
Point Lists.
The points of the selected Point List will be listed along with their codes in the table and shown
in the plot. Use the arrow button to hide/show the plot.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the inverse to every point in the list.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
Azimuth to the point in the point list from the known point.
HDist is the horizontal distance from one point to another.
dNorth is the increment of the North coordinate.
dEast is the increment of the East coordinate.
dHeight is the increment of the height. The "-" sign means that the known point is lower than the point
in the list.
Grade(Slope) is the increment of the height in percent.
Slope distance is the computed distance between the two known points.
Geodetic Azimuth is the geodetic azimuth.
Geodetic Distance is the computed geodetic distance between the known point and the point in the list.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Inverse Point to Curve
To calculate a known point inverse to a known curve:
246
1. In the Input tab, select points needed for calculations. Every point can be entered manually or selected
from the map
l
l
l
l
l
l
or from the list
of the job points:
Select the known Point name.
Switch between PC and RP to enter the first curve point as required. Depending upon the first curve
point chosen, you can define the curve by two different sets of points:
Enter either PC point, Curve point, PT point.
Or RP point, PC point, PT point.
In this case, the distance between RP point and PC point should be equal to the distance between
RP point and PT point, and two curves can be created: a Small curve of 180 degrees or less and a
Large curve of 180 degrees or more.
From the Curve drop-down list, select which of these two curves should be used for computations.
The COGO field will display the default name of the known point's projection on the curve. You
can change this name.
Select the code for this point from the existing codes and, if required, click
l
attributes. More...
Set the Start Station of the reference curve.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the inverse.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
job or/and click
to set the point's
to save the calculated point in the
to save the data to a txt file if required:
Projected Point: the name of the known point's projection on the curve.
North, East, Elev: the coordinates of the projected point.
Point: the name of the known point.
The Curve information: PC Point, Curve Point, PT Point.
Tangent Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent of the curve at the point of the known point's projection.
Projected Azimuth: the azimuth of the perpendicular from the known point to the tangent of the curve.
Start Sta: the starting station of the curve.
Sta indicates the distance between the starting station and the known point's projection on the curve.
Offset is the horizontal offset between the known point and the projection point.
dHeight is the vertical offset between the known point and the projection point. The "-" sign means that the
known point is lower than the calculated point.
247
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Inverse Point to Road
To calculate a known point inverse to a known road:
1. In the Input tab:
l Select the known Point name. The point can be entered manually or selected from the map
or from the list
l
l
l
Select the Road from the list
of the job points.
of the job roads.
The Start station and the horizontal and vertical plans of the selected road will be shown.
The Point field will display the default name of the known point's projection on the road. You
can change this name.
Select the code for this point from the existing codes and, if required, click
to set the
point's attributes. More...
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the inverse.
2. In the Results tab:
l Observe the results of the calculation:
Projected Point: the name of the known point's projection on the road.
North, East, Elev: the coordinates of the projected point.
Point: the name of the known point.
Road: the name of the road.
Tangent Azimuth: the azimuth of the road segment at the projection point.
Projected Azimuth: the azimuth of the perpendicular from the known point to the road.
Start Station: the starting station of the road.
Station: indicates the distance between the starting point and the projection of the known point
on the road.
Offset: the horizontal offset between the known point and the projected point.
dHeight: the vertical offset between the known point and the projected point. The "-" sign
248
means that the known point is lower than the calculated point.
l
Click
to save the calculated point to the points list.
l
Click
to save the data to a txt file if required.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Inverse Point to Linework
To calculate a known point inverse to a known linework:
1. In the Input tab:
l Select the known Point name. The point can be entered manually or selected from the map
or from the list
l
of the job points.
Choose either Linework or Code for selecting the linework.
l Code: allows linework selection by CodeString. Select the code from the drop-down list and a
string from the Strings list. The plot of the linework will be displayed.
l Linework: allows linework selection from the job's lineworks (listed in the dialog) or a polyline
selected from the Map (click
l
l
). If the line is a background line, copy the line to the
job, update the list of lineworks and select it from the list.
The Start station and the horizontal plan of the selected linework will be shown.
The Pt field will display the default name of the known point's projection on the linework. You can
change this name.
Select the code for this point from the existing codes and, if required, click
attributes. More...
l
Click the Calc button
2. In the Results tab:
249
to calculate the inverse.
to set the point's
l
Observe the results of the calculation:
Projected Point: the name of the known point's projection on the linework.
North, East, Elev: the coordinates of the projected point.
Point: the name of the known point.
Linework: the name of the linework.
Tangent Azimuth: the azimuth of the linework segment at the projection point.
Projected Azimuth: the azimuth of the perpendicular from the known point to the linework.
Start Station: the starting station of the linework.
Station: indicates the distance between the starting point and the projection of the known point
on the linework.
Offset: the horizontal offset between the known point and the projected point.
dHeight: the vertical offset between the known point and the projected point. The "-" sign
means that the known point is lower than the calculated point.
l
Click
to save the calculated point to the points list.
l
Click
to save the data to a txt file if required.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Inverse Linework
To calculate the inverse data for a known linework:
1. In the Input tab:
l Choose either Linework or Code for selecting the linework.
l Code: allows linework selection by CodeString. Select the code from the drop-down list
and a string from the Strings list. The plot of the linework will be displayed.
l Linework: allows linework selection from the job's lineworks (listed in the dialog) or a
polyline selected from the Map (click
). If the line is a background line, copy the
l
line to the job, update the list of lineworks and select it from the list.
The Start station and the horizontal plan of the selected linework will be shown.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the inverse.
250
2. In the Results tab:
l Observe the results of the calculation:
Linework: the name of the linework.
Num Segments: the number of segments in the linework.
Horz Length: the total horizontal length of the linework.
Start Sta: the starting station of the linework.
End Sta: the ending station of the linework.
Segment: information about each segment in the linework.
Type: the type of the segment.
Horz Length: the horizontal length of the segment.
Azimuth: the azimuth of the segment.
Start Sta: the starting station of the segment.
End Sta: the ending station of the segment.
Height: the increment of the height.
Grade: the increment of the height in percentage terms.
l
Click
to save the data to a txt file if required.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Point In Direction
To calculate the coordinates of a point in a certain direction from a known point:
1. In the Input tab:
l
In From Point, enter the known point manually or select it from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
l
Select between Azimuth and Az to Pt to enter the azimuth at the known point either by value or as a
direction to another known point. To automatically add/subtract 90 or 180 degrees, click
select the desired action.
251
and
l
l
Enter the offsets from the known point:
l Set the Angle Offset from the azimuth line.
l In HD Gnd/HD Grid (depends on the current coordinate system), set the horizontal distance offset along the angle offset line.
l In Vert Dist, set the height offset.
The COGO Pt field will display the default name of the unknown point. You can change this
name.
Select the code for this point from the drop-down list. Click
to set the point's attributes .
More...
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the point.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
The coordinates of the unknown point:
North is the northing coordinate of the point.
East is the easting coordinate of the point.
Elev is the height of the point.
From Point is the name of the known point.
Azimuth from the known point to the unknown point.
3. The Map Tab shows the illustration for the results.
Intersection
To calculate the intersection point(s) of two given directions or two distances:
1. In the Input tab:
l Select the name of the known Point 1. The point can be entered manually or selected from the
map
l
or from the list
of the job points.
Select between Azimuth and Az to Pt to enter a direction from the Point 1 to the unknown intersection point. Either enter the azimuth to the unknown point manually or select another point to
calculate the azimuth from the Point 1 to this point and use it as the direction.
Select Distance to enter a distance to the unknown point. In this case, there will be two
252
l
l
l
solutions of calculation and two intersection points will be determined.
Select the name of the known Point 2.
Select between Azimuth and Az to Pt to enter the direction from the Point 2 to the unknown point
or select Distance to enter a distance to the unknown points.
The COGO Pt field will display the default name of the intersection point. You can change this
name.
Select the code for this point from the drop-down list. Click
to set the point's attributes .
More...
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the intersection point.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
North, East, Elev: the coordinates of the first/second found point.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Calculator
The calculator is a powerful tool to do all sorts of calculations and conversions. Type in the entire equation you
want to calculate, press equals, and the result is shown:
l
l
l
Input Field is where calculations are done. It will accept an entire calculation and then once equals is
pressed it will calculate everything at once.
Result Field is where the result is shown once equals is pressed. This field is also used as the y or theta values for rectangular/polar conversions.
Previous Result Field is where the previous result is moved up to once equals is pressed. This field is also
used as the x or r values for rectangular/polar conversions.
The calculator operates in two modes:
l
l
253
Click the std button to open the standard panel. Standard mode performs common math functions.
Click the sci button to open the scientific panel. Scientific mode performs more complex scientific functions.
Standard Calculator
The calculator in standard mode allows you to perform standard maths.
Learn descriptions of the functions:
square root Calculates the square root of a value.
x squared
Calculates the square of a value.
inverse
Calculates the inverse of a value or 1/x.
nth power
Calculates the nth power of a value in the format x ^ power.
percent
Converts the value to a percent or x/100.
MC
Clears the memory.
MR
Recalls the memory value indicated by M in the input field.
MS
Saves the already computed result into memory.
M+
Adds the already computed result to the value in memory.
C
Clears out all the fields.
<-
Backspace, removes the last entry.
copy
If the calculator was started from an edit field, it copies the value back to that
field.
sci
Brings up the scientific calculator.
+/-
Alternates the value between positive and negative.
Scientific Calculator
The calculator in scientific mode allows you to perform scientific functions.
Learn descriptions of the functions:
254
sin
Calculates the sine.
cos
Calculates the cosine.
tan
Calculates the tangent.
arcsin
Calculates the arcsine.
arccos
Calculates the arccosine.
arctan
Calculates the arctangent.
log
Calculates the logarithmic value base 10.
ln
Calculates the natural logarithmic value or base e.
square
root
Calculates the square root of a value.
x
Calculates the square of a value.
squared
inverse
Calculates the inverse of a value or 1/x.
nth
power
Calculates the nth power of a value in the format x ^ power.
percent Converts the value to a percent or x/100.
MC
Clears the memory.
MR
Recalls the memory value indicated by M in the input field.
MS
Saves the already computed result into memory.
M+
Adds the already computed result to the value in memory.
Rad
Deg
Converts radians to degrees.
Deg
Rad
Converts degrees to radians.
Grad
Deg
Converts gradians to degrees.
Deg
Grad
Converts degrees to gradians.
Deg
Converts degrees to degrees minutes seconds notation.
255
DMS
DMS
Deg
Converts degrees minutes seconds notation to degrees.
Converts rectangular coordinates (xy) to polar (r theta). This is done by using both result
Rec Pol fields, the top one being x, bottom one being y. Enter the values and click Rec Pol and it
will convert the top value to r and bottom to theta.
Converts polar coordinates (r theta) to rectangular (xy). This is done by using both result
Pol Rec fields, the top one being r, bottom one being theta. Enter the values and click Pol Rec
and it will convert the top value to x and bottom to y.
DMS+
Adds the left and right values assuming both are in DMS form.
DMS-
Subtracts the right value from the left assuming both are in DMS form.
e
The constant e, base of the natural logarithm.
pi
The constant pi, the circumference to diameter ratio for any circle.
C
Clears out all the fields.
<-
Backspace, removes the last entry.
copy
If the calculator was started from an edit field, it copies the value back to that field.
std
Brings up the standard calculator.
Deg
If this is showing, it means the calculator is working in degrees.
Grad
If this is showing, it means the calculator is working in gradians.
Rad
If this is showing, it means the calculator is working in radians.
+/-
Alternates the value between positive and negative.
Calculate Curves
Click an icon to calculate the task:
256
Curve
Calculates the full set of curve parameters, given one length and one radius parameter.
3Pt Curve
Computes the curve parameters given three points: starting point of the curve (PC point),
any curve point and ending point of the curve (PT point), the Radius point, and PC and
PT points.
PI & Tangents
Computes the starting, ending and center points of a curve, given the point of intersection,
the radius, and the azimuths from the PI point to the PC and PT points respectively.
Radius & Pts
Computes the parameters and the coordinates of the center of a curve given the starting
and ending points of the curve and a radius parameter.
Spiral
Calculates the full set of spiral parameters, given one length and two radius parameters.
Traverse
Calculates the full set of traverse curve parameters, given one length and one radius parameter.
Vertical Curve
To calculate the vertical curve parameters.
Curve Solution
To calculate the full set of curve parameters when a curvature parameter and a length parameter are given:
257
1. In the Input tab:
l Select one of the curvature parameters Radius/Chord Angle/Curve Angle and enter the value
of it.
l Select one of the length parameters of the curve Delta/Length/Chord/Tangent/Mid Ord/External and enter the value of it.
l Observe the plot of the curve in the view window.
l Select the Right/Left direction of Turn relative to the starting point.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the parameters of the curve.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent points) of the curve.
Degree Curve defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve with a
length of 100 units.
Degree Chord defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of curve whose chord
is 100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending
points, and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and the curve (along the line joining
the point of intersection to the radius point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line joining the point
258
of intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Three-Point Curve
To calculate the curve parameters when three points are given:
1. In the Input tab, select points needed for calculations. Every point can be entered manually or selected
from the map
l
l
or from the list
Switch between PC Point (point of curvature) and RP Point (radius point) to enter the first curve
point as required. Depending upon the first curve point chosen, you can define the curve by two different sets of points:
Enter PC point, Curve point, PT point (point of tangency).
In this case, the coordinates of the RP Point will be calculated along with the curve parameters. The
default name will be shown that can be changed. Select the code for this calculated point from the
existing codes and, if required, click
l
259
of the job points:
to set the point's attributes . More....
Or RP point, PC point, PT point.
In this case, the distance between RP point and PC point should be equal to the distance between
RP point and PT point, and two curves can be created: a Small curve of 180 degrees or less and
a Large curve of 180 degrees or more. From the Curve drop-down list, select which of these
two curves should be used for computations.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the curve parameters.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
North, East, Elev: the coordinates of the RP point.
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent points) of the curve.
Curve Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve with a
length of 100 units.
Chord Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose
chord is 100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending
points, and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and the curve (along the line joining
the point of intersection to the radius point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line joining the point
of intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
PI & Tangents
To calculate the curve parameters when two tangents and the point of their intersection are given:
260
1. In the Input tab, enter the data needed for the task:
l Select the PI Point (Point of Intersection). It can be entered manually or selected from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
l
In Az PI to PC, enter the azimuth from the PI point to the starting curve point.
In Az PI to PT, enter the azimuth from the PI point to the ending curve point.
In Radius/Curve Angle/Chord Angle/Tangent, enter the appropriate radius parameter of the
curve.
Enter the PC Point name and select the code for the calculated starting curve point.
Enter the PT Point name and select the code for the calculated ending curve point.
Enter the RP Point name and select the code for the calculated radius point.
l
Click
l
Click the Calc button
l
l
l
l
l
to set the point's attributes if required. More...
to calculate the curve parameters.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
required:
North is the northing coordinate of the PC/PT/RP points.
East is the easting coordinate of the PC/PT/RP points.
Elev is the height of the PC/PT/RP points.
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
261
to save the data to a txt file if
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent points) of the curve.
Curve Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve with a length
of 100 units.
Chord Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose
chord is 100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending
points, and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and the curve (along the line joining
the point of intersection to the radius point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line joining the point
of intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Radius & Points
To calculate the parameters of a curve when the starting/ending points and the radius parameter of the curve
are given
:
1. In the Input tab, enter the initial data for the task. The points can be entered manually or selected from
the map
or from the list
of the job points.
262
l
l
l
l
l
l
Set the PC Point (point of curvature).
Set the PT Point (point of tangency).
In Radius/Curve Angle/Chord Angle, enter the appropriate radius parameter of the curve.
Select the Left or Right direction of Turn, relative to the PC Point.
Select the Curve in the circle that should be considered. The radius, and the PC and PT points
define two curves: one with delta less than or equal to 180 degrees (Small curve), and the other with
delta greater than or equal to 180 degrees (Large curve).
The coordinates of the RP Point will be calculated along with the curve parameters. The default
name will be shown that can be changed. Select the code for this calculated point from the existing
codes and, if required, click
l
Click the Calc button
to set the point's attributes. More....
to calculate the curve parameters.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
North is the northing coordinate of the RP point.
East is the easting coordinate of the RP point.
Elev is the height of the RP point.
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent points) of the curve.
Curve Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve with a length of
100 units.
Chord Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is
100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points,
and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and the curve (along the line joining the
point of intersection to the radius point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line joining the point of
intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.
263
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Spiral
To calculate the parameters of a spiral when the starting/ending points and the radius parameter of the spiral
are given:
1. In the Input tab, enter the initial data to accomplish the task.
l In Spiral Type, select the type of the spiral to be calculated between two points of curvature
change:
l TS To SC from a tangent to a circular curve.
l
CS To ST from a circular curve to a tangent.
264
l
CS To SC between two circular curves.
l
In Radius/Curve Angle/Chord Angle, enter the appropriate radius parameter of the adjoining circular curve at the start point.
In Radius/Curve Angle/Chord Angle, enter the appropriate radius parameter of the adjoining circular curve at the end point.
Select one of the length parameters of the curve Length/Spiral Constant and enter the value of it.
Enter the Azimuth of the tangent at the start point.
Select the Left or Right direction of Turn, relative to the start point.
l
Click the Calc button
l
l
l
l
to calculate the spiral parameters.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
Length is the total length of spiral curve from Start Point to End Point (for all spiral type).
Radius Out is the end radius of the spiral of TS to SC or CS to SC type.
Radius In is the start radius of the spiral of CS to ST or CS to SC type.
Turn is the direction of turn of the spiral. The Right value stands for clockwise direction and the Left value,
for counter-clockwise direction (for all spiral type).
Tangent In Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent to the start point of the spiral (for all spiral type).
Tangent Out Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent to the end point of the spiral (for all spiral type).
Spiral Constantis the spiral constant value. The spiral constant is the square root of the length multiplied by
the radius of the spiral (for all spiral type).
Deg Curve defines the angle in degrees used to compute either the radius of the curve, whose chord is 100
units long. Using the degree of chord (DCH) parameter, the radius of the curve can be calculated as follows:
265
Deg Chord defines the angle in degrees used to compute either the radius of the curve whose length is
100 units long. Using the degree of curve (DCV) parameter, the radius of the curve can be calculated
as follows:
End Point X displays the northing coordinate of the end point of the spiral in the current coordinate system.
End Point Y displays the easting coordinate of the end point of the spiral in the current coordinate system.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Traverse
To calculate the parameters of a traverse spiral when the starting/ending points and the radius parameter of
the spiral are given:
1. In the Input tab, enter the initial data to accomplish the task.
l Enter the PC Point (point of curvature), the start point of the curve. The point can be entered
manually or selected from the map
l
l
l
l
l
or from the list
In Radius/Curve Angle/Chord Angle, enter the appropriate radius parameter of the curve.
Select one of the length parameters of the curve Delta/Length/Chord/Tangent/Mid Ord/External and enter the value of it.
Enter the Azimuth of the tangent at the start point.
Select the Left or Right direction of Turn, relative to the PC Point.
The coordinates of the PT Point (point of tangency) will be calculated along with the curve parameters. The default name will be shown that can be changed. Select the code for this calculated
point from the existing codes and, if required, click
l
of the job points.
Click the Calc button
to set the point's attributes. More....
to calculate the curve parameters.
266
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
points list or/and click
to save the calculated point to the
to save the data to a txt file if required:
PTÂ Point is the name of the calculated point of tangency.
North is the northing coordinate of the PT point.
East is the easting coordinate of the PT point.
Elev is the height of the PT point.
PC Point is the name of the traverse point.
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent points) of the curve.
Curve Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve with a length of
100 units.
Chord Angle defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is
100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points,
and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and the curve (along the line joining the
point of intersection to the radius point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line joining the point of
intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc.
Start Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent at the start point of the arc.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Vertical
To calculate the following vertical curve parameters:
267
l
l
l
l
l
elevation and chainage of the PVI Point (point of the vertical intersection),
elevation and chainage of the PVC point (start point of the vertical curve),
elevation and chainage of the PVT point (end point of the vertical curve),
elevation and chainage of the Hi/Low point (the highest or lowest point of the vertical curve parabola),
Curve Length - horizontal distance of the vertical curve between PVC and PVT points.
1. In the Input tab:
l Select one of the curvature parameters Curve Length, or High/Low Elevation, or Point on
Curve.
l Select either the start point of the vertical curve (PVC) or intersection point of vertical curve
(PVI) and specify the chainage and elevation for the given point.
l Specify the Begin Grade and End Grade of the vertical curve.
l If you selected the Curve Length parameter — specify the Curve Length value.
l If you selected the Point on Curve parameter — specify the Pt. Station (chainage) and elevation of this point.
l If you selected the High/Low Elevation parameter — specify the elevation of the Hi/Low
point.
l Specify the Find Station (chainage) to calculate the elevation of the point on the vertical curve.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the parameters of the vertical curve.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
Curve Length of the curve.
Begin Grade of the curve.
End Grade of the curve.
268
Station and Elevation for the PVC Point.
Station and Elevation for the PVI Point.
Station and Elevation for the PVT Point.
Station and Elevation for the HI/Low Point.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Calculate Area
Click an icon to calculate the task:
By Points
Computes the area of a polygon with known vertices.
Hinge
Computes the coordinates of a point, which when inserted between the starting and ending points of a pointlist, forms a polygon of known area.
Line
Computes the coordinates of points, which along with two known points form a quadrilateral of the known area.
Compute Area By Points
To calculate the area of a polygon with known vertices:
269
1. In the Input tab:
l Select the name of the PointList, Linework or Area that contains vertices of the polygon. The
name can be entered manually or selected from the list
l
l
.
The points of the selected Point List will be listed along with their codes in the table and the polygon will be shown in the plot. Use the arrow button to hide/show the plot as required.
The Up and Down arrow buttons can be used to modify the order of the points to obtain the correct shape of the polygon.
Click the Calc button
to calculate the area of the polygon.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
The calculated Area in (JobUnits)^2, acres and hectares.
Perimeter of the polygon.
The tolerance interval calculated as Area (in meters) minus/plus Perimeter multiplied by 1.25
The list of points constituting the polygon vertices in the correct order.
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Known Area - Hinge
The Known Area Hinge method computes the coordinates of a new point, which when inserted between the
starting and ending points of a point list, forms a polygon of the known area.
The Area pages are a wizard that contain the data needed for the task.
1. In the first Input tab:
l Select the name of the PointList, Linework or Area that contains vertices of the polygon. The
name can be entered manually or selected from the list
l
l
.
The points of the selected Point List will be listed along with their codes in the table and the polygon will be shown in the view window. Use the arrow button to hide/show the plot as required.
The Up and Down arrow buttons can be used to modify the order of the points to obtain the correct shape of the polygon.
Click Next to proceed to the next tab of the wizard. An error message displays if the area selection has self-intersections, and the computation is disabled.
270
2. In the second Input tab:
l The Total Area displays the calculated area of the currently selected polygon.
l In Reqd Area, enter the area of your plot as required. You can express the areas in either (JobUnits)
^2 or acres.
l From the Rotation Point drop-down list, select the hinge point to determine the required area.
l Select the Direction of rotation.
l In COGO Point, enter the name of the new calculated point. Select the code for this point from the
existing codes and, if required, click
to set the point's attributes . More...
l
Click Back to go to the previous Area tab to modify the point list if necessary.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the task.
3. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required:
COGO Point's coordinates
Areas in (JobUnits)^2, acres and hectares.
The list of points constituting the polygon vertices in the correct order.
4. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Known Area - Line
The Known Area Line method computes the coordinates of points, which along with two known points form a
quadrilateral of known area inside the given polygon.
The Area pages are a wizard that contain the data needed for the task.
1. In the first Input tab:
l Select the name of the PointList, Linework or Area that contains vertices of the polygon. The
name can be entered manually or selected from the list
.
The points of the selected Point List will be listed along with their codes in the table and the polygon
will be shown in the view window. Use the arrow button to hide/show the plot as required.
271
The Up and Down arrow buttons can be used to modify the order of the points to obtain the correct shape of the polygon.
l Click Next to proceed to the next tab of the wizard. An error message displays if the area selection has self-intersections, and the computation is disabled.
2. In the second Input tab:
l The Total Area displays the calculated area of the currently selected polygon.
l In Reqd Area, enter the area of the quadrilateral as required. You can express the areas in either
(JobUnits)^2 or acres.
l From the Edge Pt1 and Edge Pt2 drop-down lists, select the known points of the polygon';s
line.
l In COGO Pt1 and Pt2, enter the names for the new calculated points. Note that the line defined
by these points will be parallel to the line defined by the edge points.
l
Select the code for the points from the existing codes and, if required, click
l
point's attributes. More...
Click Back to go to the previous Area tab to modify the polygon if necessary.
l
Click the Calc button
to set the
to calculate the task.
3. In the Results tab:
l Observe the results of the calculation:
COGO Points' coordinates
Areas in (JobUnits)^2, acres and hectares.
The list of points constituting the polygon vertices in the correct order.
l
To save the calculated points, select the check boxes near the point names and click
that
will appear. Only the points with check marks will be saved.
l
Click
to save the data to a txt file if required:
4. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Calculate Angles
Click an icon to calculate the task:
272
Corner Angle
Calculates the angle between two lines, a start line and an end line, which have a common
mid point.
Triangle
Calculates the area and all parameters of a triangle by three given parameters.
Corner Angle
To calculate the angle between two lines, which have a common mid point:
1. In the Input tab:
l Select the Start Point that defines the first side of the angle.
l Select the Mid Point that defines the corner of the angle.
l Select the End Point that defines the second side of the angle.
Note: Every point can be entered manually or selected from the map
or from the list
the job points.
l
Click the Calc button
to calculate the angle.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
required:
3. The Map tab shows the illustration for the results.
Triangle
To calculate a triangle:
273
to save the data to a txt file if
of
1. In the Input tab:
l Select a set of three parameters between Side-Side-Side / Side-Angle-Side / Side-Side-Angle /
Angle-Angle-Side / Angle-Side-Angle and enter them in the corresponding fields.
l Press Calc to calculate the area and other parameters of the triangle.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if
required.
3. The Map Tab shows the illustration for the results.co
Calculate Offsets
Click an icon to calculate the task:
Line Offset
Defines a line between two points used for computing point locations relative to the
line.
Corners Offset
Defines a point location relative to the nodes of the linework.
Curve Offset
Defines a curve (section of an arc) used for computing point locations in relation to
the curve.
Linework Offset
Defines a linework used for computing point locations in relation to the linework.
Points Offset
Calculates point locations relative to the selected points.
Road Offset
Calculates point locations relative to the selected road or alignment.
274
Line Offset
The line is defined by its azimuth, azimuth to another point, or the end point of the line. The plot will display the
defined line.
To calculate point locations relative to a line:
1. Enter the Start Point of the line. This can be entered manually, or selected from the map
list
or from the
of the job points.
2. Select between End Point and Azimuth to define the direction of the line.
3. In Ht Comp, select the type of height computations for the computed points:
l Ht of Start Pt (height of the starting point): The computed points will have the same height as the
starting point of the line.
l Interpolate Ht: The height of the computed points will be computed through linear interpolation
using the height of the starting and ending points of the line.
4. Select the Num Subs check box to enter the number of subdivisions if required to subdivide the line. For
instance a value of 3 indicates that you want to compute four points by subdividing the line in three equal
segments.
5. Select the Include Transition Point check box to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated station.
6. In SS, enter the starting station (chainage) of the line.
7. Click Next to define stationing for offsets and calculate points. More...
Station & Offsets
To define stationing which is used to compute the points locations in relation to lines, curves and alignments:
1. Select between Station and Start Station to set the current or starting station. The two arrow buttons allow
you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the station Interval shown.
2. Set the desired End Station if you wish to compute several points. The two arrow buttons allow you to
decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Station Interval shown in the next line.
3. Set the station Interval.
4. Enter the Right Offset or Left Offset of the computed point with respect to the line at the stations.
275
5. Enter the Up or Down height offset, or the vertical Grade (in percentage) with respect to the height of
the line at the station. If the grade is falling, the value is set negative.
6. Enter the name of the current or starting computed COGO Point. Select the code for this point from
the existing codes and, if required, click
to set the point's attributes. More...
7. Click Calc to calculate the offset points.
Corners Offset
New points are defined by the offset from the nodes of the existing linework. Offset may be defined in three
ways – either inline, or perpendicular right or perpendicular left. Note, that the new point will be created for
each linework segment, connected to the node.
To calculate point locations in relation to a linework nodes:
1. Choose between two options to define the linework:
l Linework: Select an existing linework from the lineworks list or select the linework in the map
. The plot window will display the defined linework.
Code: Define a code generated line. When Code is selected, the drop-down list will contain a
list of all linework codes used in the job which have associated strings. The list will display all of
the available strings associated with the selected code. If the user selects a string the plot window
will update to show the selection.
Click Next.
Select between Perpendicular/Inline and enter the offset from the linework node.
If selected Perpendicular, select either Left or Right.
In COGO Pt, enter the name of the first point to be created.
In Code, select the code for the points to be created.
Click Create.
The software creates points with the defined offset.
l
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
276
Curve Offset
To calculate point locations in relation to a curve:
1. In PC Point, enter the point of curve, the starting point of the arc.
2. In PT Point, enter the point of tangency, the ending point of the arc.
3. Select between Radius/ Curve Angle/ Chord Angle and enter the radius parameters of the curve as
required.
4. In SS, enter the starting station (chainage) of the curve.
5. In Ht Comp, select the type of height computations for the computed points:
l Ht of Start Pt (height of the starting point): The computed points will have the same height as the
starting point of the line.
l Interpolate Ht: The height of the computed points will be computed through linear interpolation
using the height of the starting and ending points of the line.
6. In Turn, select on which side the center point of the curve is located. The plot will display the defined
curve, and Length will show the calculated length of the curve.
7. Select the Include Transition Point check box to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated station.
8. Length, enter the starting station (chainage) of the line.
9. Select the Num Subs check box to enter the number of subdivisions if required to subdivide the line. For
instance a value of 3 indicates that you want to compute four points by subdividing the line in three equal
segments.
10. Click Next to define stationing for offsets and calculate points. More...
Linework Offset
Linework is provided in the points which are connected to form opened or closed polylines.
To calculate point locations in relation to a linework:
1. Choose between two options to define the linework:
l Linework: Select an existing linework from the lineworks list or select the linework in the map
. The plot window will display the defined linework.
277
Code: Define a code generated line. When Code is selected, the drop-down list will contain a
list of all linework codes used in the job which have associated strings. The list will display all of
the available strings associated with the selected code. If the user selects a string the plot window
will update to show the selection.
2. Select a task you want to calculate:
l Offset Linework: To create an offset linework with respect to the selected linework, click Next.
More...
l Offset Points From Linework: To create offset points from the selected line, select the start station and the interval and click Next. More...
3. Click Create Points if required to generate points along a linework and save them in a point list.
More...
l
Offset Linework
To create a new Offset Linework at entered offsets from the selected linework:
1. In the Offset Line field enter the name for the offset linework. The field initially displays a default
name <the linework name_[n]> where [n] is an integer for the first available unique name that does
not already exist in the job. You can change this name.
2. Enter the Right or Left Offset of the computed line with respect to the linework.
3. Enter the distance Up or Down the new line will be shifted. Distance units associated with the edit
fields are the current job distance units displayed.
4. Observe the preliminary view in the horizontal and vertical planes. The plot windows show both the
selected line as well as the offset line at the current entered offset values. These plot windows update
dynamically every time you change the offset values.
5. Click Create to compute and save the offset linework to the current job.
Offset Points From Linework
To create points at the entered offsets from the selected linework:
1. In SS, enter the starting station (chainage) of the linework.
2. Select the Include Transition Point check box to create transition points every time the stationing
passes a transition point.
3. In Interval, select how the offset points will be created.
278
Interval: Enter the station interval to subdivide the linework by entering an interval value in the next
dialog. More...
l Subdivide: Enter a number of subdivisions by which the linework will be split.
l Transition Only: The offset points will only be created at transition points between the start and end
stations.
4. Click Next to define stationing for offsets and calculate points. More...
l
Station & Offsets
To define stationing which is used to compute the points locations in relation to lineworks:
1. Select between Station and Start Station to set the current or starting station. The two arrow buttons allow
you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the station Interval shown. If tou had
selected Include transition points (More...) incrementing and decrementing the stationing will also include
the transition point stations. If you selected the Subdivision or Transition Only the Station button will be hidden to enter the start and end station where the offset points will be created.
2. Set the desired End Station if you wish to compute several points. The two arrow buttons allow you to
decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the station Interval shown in the next line.
3. Enter the station Interval, the interval at which the stationing will increase or decrease.
4. Enter the Right Offset or Left Offset of the computed point with respect to the line.
5. Enter the Up or Down height offset, or the vertical Grade (in percentage) with respect to the height of the
linework. If the grade is falling, the value is set negative.
6. In Angle, select how the angle points will be computed at segment intersections:
l Offset Bk: The offset point at the intersection will be computed from the end point of the first segment.
l Offset Ahd: The offset point at the intersection will be computed from the start point of the second
segment.
l Bisector: The offset point at the intersection will be computed from the intersection of the offset of
the first and second segment.
7. In Curve, select how points on curve segments will be selected:
l Interval: The offset points on curve segments will be computed at intervals along the curve.
l RP: Only the curves radius point will be computed.
l PI: Only the curves point of intersection of tangents will be computed.
l MOC: Only the point in the middle of the curve will be computed.
8. Enter the point information for the first created COGO Point. Select the code for this point from the existing codes and, if required, click
279
to set the point's attributes. More...
All subsequent created points will be increments from the entered point name and have the same code
values.
9. Click Calc to calculate and save the offset point locations to the job.
If the you have hidden the end point stationing, only a single point will be created at the current stationing. If you have entered the end point stationing, points will be created between the start and end
station at the current entered interval including transition points if you have selected to include them. If
you have selected to subdivide the line, points will be created from the start station to the end of the
line.
Create Points
To create points along a linework:
1. Select the Interval or Segments radio button to enter the interval between the calculated points or the
number of segments in the linework.
2. Select the Along Tangent check box to enter the interval between the calculated points or the number
of segments in a straight line.
3. Select the Along Curve check box to enter the interval between the calculated points or the number of
segments in a curve.
4. Select the corresponding check boxes to create additional linework points as required:
l End Points: The linework's start and end points.
l Curve PIs: The points of intersection of tangents to the curves drawn at the start and end curve
points.
l Curve RPs: The radius points.
l Curve MOCs: The points in the middle of the curves.
5. Click Next to define the calculated points' details. More...
Points Details
Enter details for the calculated points:
1. Enter the name of the First Point. Select the code for this point from the existing codes and, if
required, click
280
to set the point's attributes. More...
2. In required, select the Prefix/Suffix from the drop-down list and enter the desired value.
3. Optionally, select the Save Points To Point List check box to create a Point List with the name specified
in the field which appears.
4. Click
to save the calculated points.
Offset Points
To calculate points at an offset from the current job's points:
1. In the Points/Point List/Linework/Area field, select points to which the offset will be applied or select
groups of points by selecting point lists, linework or area:
l For Points, in the Sel Pts drop-down list, choose an option how to select points in the job:
l All - all the job points.
l By Range - points from a range. More...
l By Code - points of a selected code. More...
l By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
l By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain distance. More..,
l By Name - points found by their name. More...
l By Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
l From Map - points selected graphically from the map More...
l From List - points from a list of points. More...
l
For Point List, click
and select an existing point list in the job. More... The list name will
appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the
point selection by pressing
l
For Linework and Area, click
click
281
.
and select an existing linework/area from the map (more...) or
and select an existing linework/area from the list (more...). The name will appear in the
edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selec-
tion by pressing
.
2. The list and the plot will display the points currently selected.
3. If required, move points up and down the list to change the order.
4. To obtain information about a single point highlighted in the list, use the Info icon
.
to remove the highlighted point from the list.
5. Click
6. Click Next to set offsets. More...
Offset Points
Enter offsets and details for the calculated points:
1. Select a Method of the three available to enter appropriate offset data as required:
l North, East, Ht: The northing, easting and height offsets from the points. The labels can change
depending on the job settings.
l Az, HD, VD: The azimuth, horizontal and vertical distances from the points.
l Az, Slope, Zenith: The azimuth, slope distance and zenith angle at the points.
2. Enter the name of the current or starting computed COGO Point. Select the code for this point from
the existing codes and, if required, click
to set the point's attributes. More...
3. Click Calc to calculate the offset points.
Road Offset
To calculate the offset points along an alignment:
1. In Road/H Alnt/HV Alnt, enter the name of the road or alignment to be used for computing points.
This can be entered manually, or chosen from the list
.
2. The SS field shows the starting station of the selected road of alignment, the distance from the beginning. The plots display the alignment in the horizontal and vertical planes.
282
3. If required, click Calculate Road Points to generate points along the defined Road. More...
4. Click Station & Offsets >> to define stationing for offsets and calculate points. More...
Calculate Transform
Click an icon to calculate the task:
Rotate
Rotates the selected points around a specific point.
Translate
Moves a group of points.
Scale
Scales the distances of a range of points relative to a Base Point.
2D Transform
Performs 2D transformations using a list of point pairs to get the transformation parameters.
Session Check
Performs adjustment calculations for RTK Sessions.
Rotate
To rotate the selected points around a specific point:
1. The buttons in the Select Points field allows you to select the points for rotation:
l Click By Range to enter a range of points. More...
l
283
Click
to choose points from the map.
l
Click
l
Click
to choose points from the list of the job's points.
to choose the layer whose points will be rotated.
2. Select the Rotation Point which is to be the center of rotation. This can be entered manually, selected
from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
3. Select the Rotation Method. This can be by entering a Rotation Angle or by entering the Old and
New Azimuths.
4. Click the Calc button
to calculate new positions of the points. The results can be seen through
the Edit Points dialog.
Translate
To translate a group of points:
1. Select the points for translation using the buttons in the Select Points field:
l Click By Range to enter a range of points. More...
l
Click
to choose points from the map.
l
Click
to choose points from the list of the job's points.
l
Click
to choose the layer whose points will be shifted.
2. In Translate By, select the method for translation. This can be by Coords/Pts or Az,Dist,Ht:
l Coords/Pts: all the selected points will be moved in the same direction and distance as between
the points (locations), set by the next two fields: From Pt (From Crd) and To Pt (To Crd). In
the first case, define only the point ID, in the second case - the local coordinates and the height
of the location.
l Az,Dist,Ht: all the selected points will be moved in the specified direction by a specified distance. These parameters are set through the Azimuth (Bearing) field, Hz Dist and Vert Dist
fields.
3. Click the Calc button
to calculate new positions of the points. The results can be seen through
the Edit Points dialog.
284
Scale
To scale the distances of a range of points relative to a Base Point:
1. Select the points for scaling using the buttons in the Select Points field:
l Click By Range to enter a range of points. More...
l
Click
to choose points from the map.
l
Click
to choose points from the list of the job's points.
l
Click
to choose the layer whose points will be shifted.
2. Select the Base Point that is the reference point for the scale transformation. This can be entered manually,
selected from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
3. Set the Scale Factor of the coordinate transformation as required.
4. Select the Scale Heights check box if the height values should also be scaled.
5. Click the Calc button
to calculate new positions of the points. The results can be seen through the
Edit Points dialog.
2D Transformation
To perform two-dimensional transformation of a group of points:
1. Create a list of point pairs used to calculate the transformation parameters. More...
2. Select the points for 2D transformation and calculate the task. More...
285
2D Transform
The 2D Transform dialog allows you to edit a list of point pairs for use in calculating the transformation parameters:
l
l
l
Select Add to enter pairs of points / plane positions. More...
Select Edit to change an existing point pair.
Select Delete to remove an existing point pair from the list.
Select Next to move to the next 2D Transform tab.
Point Pair Info
To select the pairs of points or coordinates to obtain transformation parameters:
1. Select From Pt/From Crd to enter either the point or coordinates from which the parameters will be
calculated.
2. Select To Pt/To Crd to enter either the point or coordinates from which the parameters will be calculated.
2D Transform Parameters
The next 2D Transform dialog displays the transformation parameters which will be applied to the set of
points needing transformation.
1. Select the points for transformation using the buttons in the Select Points field:
l Click From... To to enter a range of points. More...
l
Click
to choose points from the map.
l
Click
to choose points from the list of the job&#39;s points.
l
Click
to choose the layer whose points will be rotated.
2. Click Back to return to the previous dialog.
286
3. Click the Calc button
to calculate new positions of the points. The results can be seen through the
Edit Points dialog.
Session Check
Before the adjustment RTK Sessions you need to have a number of sessions in the current job with corresponding data collected.
To perform an adjustment of RTK Sessions:
1. Set the data needed for the task in the Input tab of the Session Check dialog. More...
2. Select the method of the adjustment and calculate the task. More...
3. Observe the results of adjustment. More...
Input Sessions
In the first Input tab, specify the data for calculation:
1. Select the Computation Type from the drop-down menu.
2. Select the check boxes near the desired sessions to be included into the calculation.
3. Click Next.
Input Reference Data
In the second Input tab, specify the reference data for calculation:
1. Set the Tolerances for the data used in the calculation. You can use predefined types for tolerances from
the drop-down list available after selecting the Use Predefined Types check box.
287
2. Select the Reference Point from the map
3. Click the Calculate button.
or the list
.
Results
In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and click
to save data in a file if required.
Calculate Traverse
Click an icon to calculate the task:
Calculate
Performs calculating traverse and sideshot point coordinates.
Adjustment
Performs traverse adjustments that apply corrections to the individual latitudes, departures, angles and/or elevations in order to make them meet given conditions.
Closure
Performs loop miscclosure test for the traverse.
Calculate
To calculate traverse and sideshot points coordinates:
1. In the Input tab:
l In From Point, enter the occupation point (the traverse point). Enter the point manually or select
it from the map
l
or from the list
of the job points.
Select between Azimuth / Angle R / Angle L / Defl R / Defl L to set respectively:
288
Azimuth from the known point to the calculated point. The azimuth can be entered as is, computed from the right or left angles, or deflection entered in this field and Backsight information.
l Angle to the Right is the angle at the known point from the backsight point to the calculated
point in a clockwise direction.
l Angle to the Left is the angle at the known point from the backsight point to the calculated
point in an counter clockwise direction.
l Deflection to the Right is the angle at the known point between the prolongation of the line
from the backsight point and the line to the calculated point in a clockwise direction.
l Deflection to the Left is the angle at the known point between the prolongation of the line
from the backsight point and the line to the calculated point in an counter clockwise direction.
In HD Gnd/HD Grid (depends on the current coordinate system), set the horizontal distance offset
along the azimuth line.
In Vert Dist, set the height offset.
In To Point, enter the name of the calculated point.
l
l
l
l
Select the code for this point from the drop-down list. Click
to set the point's attributes.
More...
l Press BS Point to display the BS Point dialog that allows you to enter the Backsight Point or Backsight Azimuth. If a BS point has not been entered, then an Azimuth is required. In this case if an
angle value is entered as Angle Right, Angle Left, or Deflection, this value will be considered as azimuth.
l Press Side Shot to compute the coordinates of the To Point, based on the entered values for Azimuth/Angle Right/Angle Left/Deflection, Horizontal and Vertical distances. The From Point does
not change, and To Point is incremented to the next new Point in the database.
l Press Traverse to compute the coordinates of the To Point, based on the entered values for Azimuth/Angle Right/Angle Left/Deflection, Horizontal and Vertical distances. The From Point
changes to the To Point, and the To Point changes to the next new name in the database.
2. In the Results tab, observe the results of the calculation and:
l
Click
to save the calculated point and to continue calculating the traverse.
l
Click
to save the data to a txt file if required.
3. The Map Tab shows the illustration for the results.
289
BS Point
The BS Point dialog allows you to enter the backsight azimuth for the Traverse calculation. The azimuth can
be computed from the traverse's From Point to a backsight point or can be entered manually.
Select BS Point or BS Azimuth to set the backsight point location or the backsight azimuth. The backsight
point may be entered manually, selected from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
If a backsight point is entered, the Code and string of the point are displayed.
Adjust
Before the result of a traverse can be used to determine its location from the traverse stations, the traverse
must be mathematically consistent. The misclosures in the linear and angular measurements must be adjusted
out. The process of applying corrections to the corresponding point coordinates is called traverse adjustment. In the current job, the coordinates of the network after adjustment will be displayed without changes.
The list of adjusted coordinates for the given network will be saved in a new MAGNET Field job.
To perform an adjustment of a surveyed traverse:
1. Set the data needed for the task in the first Adjustment dialog. More...
2. Select the method of the traverse adjustment and calculate the task. More...
3. Observe the results of adjustment. More...
Adjustment Settings
Set the data needed for the task:
1. In Start Point, set the station on which the traverse originates. This can be entered manually, selected
from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
2. In End Point, set the station on which the traverse closes.
3. Enable the Adjust Elevations check box to include elevations adjustment if it is needed to determine
elevations in the traverse.
4. Enable the Adjust Sideshots check box to include sideshots in adjustment.
290
5. If required to consider Earth curvature and atmospheric refraction corrections, set the value of Curvature
refraction either to 0.14 or 0.20.
6. In the Job to store the results, click New to create a new job to store the adjusted coordinate of the network. A full path to the job file will be shown.
7. Click Next to continue. More...
Adjustment Method
To adjust the traverse:
1. Select the method of traverse adjustment:
l Enable the Apply Compass Rule check box to adjust the traverse by the compass rule.
l Enable the Apply Angle Balance check box to adjust angles in the traverse. In this case the Closing
Angle will be shown for the traverse adjustment.
2. Click Adjust to calculate the task.
Adjustment Results
Observe the results of the calculation ("Traverse adjustment report") and click
file if required.
Results of adjustment contain the following information:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
291
Input job name and output job name
TS scale factor
Sideshots
Curvature Refraction
Whether an adjustment of elevations and adjustment of sideshots are made or not
Adjustment methods
Traverse Sides
Route Length
Traverse horizontal distance (HD)
Names and coordinates of the start and end points of traverse
Backsight Azimuth
to save the data to a txt
l
l
l
l
Raw data of the measurements
Misclosure Results
Adjusted point comparison
Adjusted Traverse
Closure
This options allows you to perform loop miscclosure test for the traverse.
Set the data needed for the task:
1. In Start Point, set the station on which the traverse originates. This can be entered manually, selected
from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
2. Click Next to perform the calculation and creating the Misclosure report. More...
Misclosure Results
Observe the results of the misclosure calculation and click
to save the data to a txt file if required.
Results of misclosure contain the following information:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
TS scale factor
Traverse Sides
Siedshots
Route Length
Traverse horizontal distance (HD)
Names and coordinates of the start and end points of traverse
Backsight Azimuth
Raw data of the measurements
Misclosure Results
292
Calculate Surface
Click an icon to calculate the task:
Surface Volumes
Calculates the cut, fill and area between two surfaces.
Create Surface
Creates a new Surface.
Contour Surface
Represents Surface data along contour lines.
Surface Volume
In the Input tab you can perform volume calculations:
1. In the Design field, select the Surface on which you want the volume calculations to be performed. Either
manually enter the name of an existing Surface in the edit field or press the List selection button and choose
the Surface from the list. When the Surface selection changes an information message will display the
maximum and minimum Northing and Easting values for the area covered by the Surface.
2. From the Boundary drop-down menu, select one of six options for volumes calculations.
l Min Elevation: the plane of projection of the final Surface will be defined as a flat plane at a minimum elevation.
l Max Elevation: the plane of projection of the final Surface will be defined as a flat plane at a maximum elevation.
l Boundary: the plot will display only the final Surface. The plane of projection of the final Surface
will be defined as a flat plane at a fixed elevation of zero.
l Fixed Elevation: the plot will display only the final Surface. The plane of projection of the final Surface will be defined as a flat plane at a fixed elevation. Either manually enter the fixed elevation in
the edit field or press the Map or the List selection button to select a point in the job whose elevation
will be used as the fixed elevation. After the point selection dialog has closed the edit field will display the elevation of the selected point.
293
Plane: the plane of projection of the final Surface will be defined by three separate points. Either
manually enter the names of the three points in the edit fields or use the associated Map and List
selection buttons to select these points from the job.
l Original Surface: select another existing Surface. Either manually enter the name of the second
Surface or press the List selection button and choose the Surface from the list. The plots will display both of the Surface selected.
3. Press the Calc button to calculate the cut and fill volumes and projected areas of a Surface to another
Surface or a plane of projection.
l
When a successful Surface calculation has been performed the Results tab will display the calculation data.
A warning message displays if any of the fields is empty or contains a name that does not exist.
Open Surface
To open an existing Surface:
1. Highlight the name of the TIN file you want to open.
2. Click
to open the file.
Create Surface
Create Surface allows you to create a Topcon tn3 Tin by selecting points from the job, existing point lists,
existing areas, existing linework. Surface is a three-dimensional display of transformed elevation data. Surface describes the topographic surface with a network of digitized points and optional breaklines.
To create a Surface
1. In the Points/Point List/Linework/Area field, select the current method of selection of data required
to create the Surface.
l For Points, in the Sel Pts drop-down list, choose an option to select multiple points in the job for
creating the Surface:
l All - all the job points.
l By Range - points from a range. More...
294
By Code - points of a selected code. More...
l By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
l By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain distance. More...
l From Map - points selected graphically from the map More...
l From List - points from a list of points. More...
l From Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
l For Point List, press the List selection button and select an existing point list in the job. More... The
list name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and
added to the point selection by pressing the ok button.
l For Linework and Area, press either the Map selection button and select an existing linework/area
from the map (more...) or press the List selection button and select an existing linework/area from
the list (more...). The name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into
the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the ok button.
2. The list will display the points currently selected, and the plot will display the created Surface.
3. To obtain information about a single point highlighted in the list, use the Info button.
4. If required, check mark the Include Breaklines box to apply breaklines and exclusion areas to the Surface.
Breaklines are linear elements that describe changes in smoothness or continuity of the surface.
l
Note: The points whose feature code is flagged as being a breakline or exclusion area get applied to the Surface in the order that they appear in the point list. You can alter the exclusion areas and breaklines by moving their points up or down in the list.
5. Click Save to save the Surface created from the selected points in the <Job Name>/DTMsubfolder by
default. The default name will be newTIN.TN3.
6. When a valid Surface has been created, the Results tab displays the results updated dynamically as you
alter the data.
7. The Map tab displays the created Surface as the current selected points and the triangulation lines.
8. A warning message displays if less than three or no points have been selected, or there are not enough
points to create a Surface since several have been excluded because their code was flagged as not to be
used in a Surface or they are incomputable in the current system.
To edit the Surface
1. To view a point on the plot, highlight the point in the list.
2. To see a Map view of the current Surface, double-click in the plot window.
3. To delete any point from the Surface:
l Highlight the point in the list.
l Click the Delete button. The Surface will be updated.
295
4. To alter the boundary of the currently selected Surface:
l Press the Edit Boundary button. Find out more...
MAGNET Field general buttons and icons are described here...
General Icons
The Delete button is used to delete the selected points in the point list.
The Info button is used to display information on a single point highlighted in the list.
The Up (and Down
) arrow button is used to move the selected points up (and
down) in the list control. If the current selection is at the top or bottom or nothing is
selected the buttons will be disabled accordingly.
The Plot button is used to hide and show the plot window.
The Arrow control button allows you to use the keyboard arrow keys to move points
inside the list.
Opens the list of points.
Opens a map.
Confirms settings, closes the dialog, and returns to the previous dialog.
296
Editing Boundary
The boundary selection dialog contains a list of points, which bound the Surface, the general plot of the Surface
with the boundary in red.
To edit the boundary:
1. If required, move points up and down the list to change the order of the boundary. The Surface will be
updated to reflect the changes to the point order.
2. To delete a point from the boundary, highlight the point in the list and click the red minus icon. The Surface will be updated.
3. Use the Map or List selection button to select points from all of the points in the Surface to add to the
boundary.
Note: When you select a point in the boundary Map selection dialog the point is added between the end
points of the segment which is closest to the selected point. After each selection the Surface gets updated to
show your selection. When you return to the Edit Boundary dialog the point list gets updated to the order
of the boundary in the map.
Find out description of the icons on the dialog here...
Contour Surface
This dialog allows you to contour an existing Topcon TN3 TIN. Contouring Surface is a method of transforming
elevation data into a contoured surface, representing data along contour lines.
To create the contours on the Surface:
1. Enter the Surface Name manually in the edit field or press the List selection button to select an existing Surface from the list.
2. The plot window will display the currently selected Surface.
3. Press the Next button to set the parameters required for contouring the Surface.
4. Enter an Contour Interval between the contour lines in the edit field as required. The Contour line interval
must be greater than 0.001m. The difference between the start and end elevations is divided by the interval
to get the number of contour lines.
5. The Start Elevation edit field initially shows the lowest elevation in the selected Surface. If required, you
can enter a different value.
297
6. The End Elevation edit field initially shows the highest elevation in the selected Surface. If required,
you can enter a different value.
7. Press the Save button to store the contoured Surface and generate the contour lines in the job. The lines
will be added to the job as lines with the Surface name and an integer value starting at 1 which makes
the line unique.
The results of contouring will be displayed on the Results tab.
The Map tab will display the current selected Surface as well as the contour lines in red.
Enter Plan
This function allows you to draw a plan consists of the elements which are defined by points, segments and
arcs. All created objects will be displayed in the graphical view in the Enter Plan dialog. You may only create these objects, and you cannot edit them.
Note: You may edit objects, created in the Enter Plan dialog by using the Points and the Edit Line dialogs.
Fields for defining new objects parameters are located at the bottom of the dialog. Field type depends on the
current mode. To set current mode, click
and select the required mode from the list.
If the Draw Line is selected, lines or arcs can be created and displayed after configuring the required mode:
l
Length – in this mode you may define the line by its length and direction in the appropriate fields from
a start point. You may select the start point in the field (
l
plan.
Point – in this mode you can create a line from one existing point to another existing point. The addi-
tional field for end point of the line (
l
l
l
l
l
) from the list or by clicking on the
) is displayed in this mode. You may select the required
points from the list or by clicking on the plan.
Arc – in this mode you may create an arc with the right or left turning from a start point.
Arc 2 pt – in this mode you may create an arc, defined by two existing points.
Arc 3 pt – in this mode you may create an arc, defined by three existing points.
Rectangle – this mode allows automatic fourth point creation to complete a rectangle.
Close – this mode allows automatic closing of a linework. This mode is available only if the linework
contains at least two lines segment.
298
l
Restart - this mode finishes the creating of the linework or point.After that you can start creating of new
object(s).
If the Draw Line is unselected, points can be created and displayed after configuring the required mode:
l
Length – in this mode you create an end point of a line. This line will be defined by its length and direction
angle from a start point, which may be specified in the appropriate fields. You may select the start point in
the field (
l
l
) from the list or by clicking on the plan.
Arc - in this mode you create an end point of an arc.
Restart – this mode finishes the creating of the points. After that you can start creating of new object(s).
Fields and buttons of the Enter Plan dialog:
Defines the start point of a line/arc or the reference point for another point creation.
Defines the end point of the line/arc. This field available in the Point and Arc 3 pt mode.
Defines the center or third point of an arc. This field available only in the Arc 3 pt mode.
Opens the list of the points in the job. You may select any point from this list.
Defines the direction. This field is displayed in all modes, but it is available for the parameters input only in the Length and Arc modes.
Defines the line length. This field available only in the Length mode.
Defines the arc radius. This field is available only in the Arc and Arc 2pt modes. This
field contains the list of the following parameters, which may define the arc radius:
l
l
l
299
Radius (default)
Chord angle
Curve angle
Click the button to see the list and select the required value.
Defines the arc delta angle. This field available only in the Arc mode. This field contains
the list of the following parameters, which may define the arc length:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Delta angle (default)
Length of the curve
Length of the chord
Length of the tangent
Middle ordinate (the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of the
corresponding curve)
External (the distance from the midpoint of the curve to the intersection point of tangents).
Click the button to see the list and select the required value.
Allows quickly add or subtract standard angles to the current direction. Extend function
sets the value angle of tangent direction to the previous element in the linework.
Measures the direction and distance between two points on the plan.
Clicking on the button opens a list of the modes. You can set the current mode.
Discards the last performed action. It will be unable if the creation of an object is completed.
Add a new element to the current linework. The end point of the newly created object is
automatically set as the new start point for next element.
Also the drawing toolbar are enabled in the Enter Plan dialog.
Creating points
1. Click
and unselect Draw Line mode. In this mode you can create a point as an end point of a
line or an end point of an arc.
300
2. To create an end point of a line, click
and select Length. To create an end point of an arc, click
and select Arc (Arc Right or Arc Left ).
3. Enter the start point name in the field
4. For point of a line:
l
or select from the list
enter the desired direction in the field
.
and length in the field
.
For point of a curve:
l
enter either radius of arc or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius: chord
angle, or curve angle in the field
l
enter the delta (the angle between the radii corresponding to the curve), or one of five parameters
unambiguously defining the curve length: length of the curve, length of the chord, length of the tangent, middle ordinate (the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of the corresponding
curve), external (the distance from the midpoint of the curve to the intersection point of tangents) in
the field
l
.
.
enter the azimuth of the tangent to the start point of the arc in the field
.
to create the point.
5. Click the button
6. The Map and Points dialogs will show the point(s).
Creating lines by using two points
1. Click
and select Draw Line mode. In this mode you can create a line and arc.
2. Click
and select Point.
301
3. Enter the start point name of the line in the field
4. Enter the end point name of the line in the field
5. Click
or select from the list (click
or select from the list (click
).
).
to draw the line and to continue creating of the linework from the end points of the pre-
vious line. To finish the creating of line(s) select Restart.
6. The Map and Points dialogs will show the point(s).
Creating Arcs
1. Click
and select Draw Line mode. In this mode you can create a line and arc.
2. Click
and select Arc ( Arc Right or Arc Left).
or select from the list (click
).
3. Enter the start point name in the field
4. Enter the radius of the arc, or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius: chord
angle, or curve angle in the field
.
5. Enter the delta (the angle between the radii corresponding to the curve), or one of five parameters
unambiguously defining the curve length: length of the curve, length of the chord, length of the tangent, middle ordinate (the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of the corresponding
curve), external (the distance from the midpoint of the curve to the intersection point of tangents) in the
field
.
6. Enter the azimuth of the tangent to the start point of the arc in the field
7. Click
.
to draw the arc and to continue creating the linework from the end points of the arc. To
finish the creating of arc(s) select Restart.
8. The Map and Points dialogs will show the point(s).
302
Creating Arcs by two points
1. Click
and select Draw Line mode. In this mode you can create a line and arc.
2. Click
and select Arc 2pt:
3. Enter the start point name of the arc in the field
or select from the list (click
).
or select from the list (click
).
4. Enter the end point name of the arc in the field
5. Enter the radius of the arc, or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius: chord angle, or
curve angle in the field
6. Click
.
to draw the arc and to continue creating the linework from the end points of the arc. To finish
the creating of arc(s) select Restart.
7. The Map and Points dialogs will show the point(s).
Creating an Arcs by three points
and select Draw Line mode. In this mode you can create a line and arc.
1. Click
2. Click the button and select Arc 3pt:
l One point as center of the arc and two points as start and end points of the arc (for Arc 3pt
(RP,Small) and Arc 3pt (RP,Large) modes.) See picture below for details:
303
l
All three points are located on the curve (for Arc 3pt(PC)). See picture below for details:
3. Enter the start point name of the arc in the field
or select from the list (click
).
or select from the list (click
).
4. Enter the end point name of the arc in the field
5. Enter the name of the arc center point (for Arc 3pt (RP,Small) and Arc 3pt (RP,Large) modes) or third
point of the arc (for Arc 3pt (RP,Large) mode) in the field
or select from the list (click
).
6. Click
to draw the arc and to continue creating the linework from the end points of the arc. To
finish the creating of arc(s) select Restart.
7. The Map and Points dialogs will show the point(s).
304
Creating Rectangles
To activate the Rectangle mode need to create a linework which contains two segments.
1. Creating a linework with two lines segment:
l
Click
and select Draw Line mode. In this mode you can create a line and arc.
l
Click
and select Length.
l
Enter the name of the start point in the field
l
Enter the desired direction in the field
or select from the list (click
).
and length in the field
for creating first seg-
and length in the field
for creating second seg-
ment.
l
Click
to draw the line.
l
Enter the desired direction in the field
ment.
l
2. Click
305
Click
to draw the line:
and select Rectangle mode.
3. Click
to create a rectangle:
Creating Close figures
To activate the Close mode need to create a linework which contains no less than two lines segment.
1. Creating a linework with two lines segment and more :
l
Click
and select Draw Line mode. In this mode you can create a line and arc.
l
Click
and select Length.
l
Enter the name of the start point in the field
l
Enter the desired direction in the field
or select from the list (click
).
and length in the field
for creating first seg-
and length in the field
for creating second
ment.
l
Click
to draw the line.
l
Enter the desired direction in the field
segment.
l
Click
to draw the line.
306
l
You can create more segments:
2. Click
and select Close mode.
3. Click
to create a close figure:
Distance measurement between two points
To measure distance between two existing points of the job:
307
1. Click on the field
to activate the button
.
.
2. Click
3. On the plan select first and second points.
4. The field
displays the calculated distance between these points.
Azimuth measurement of direction from point to point
To measure the direction azimuth of for two existing points:
1. Click on the field
to activate the button
.
.
2. Click
3. On the plan select first and second points.
4. The field
displays the calculated azimuth of direction for these points.
Angle measurement for three points
To measure the angle for three existing points:
1. Click
and select Draw Line mode.
2. Click
and select Arc (Arc Right or Arc Left).
3. Click on the field
4. Click
to activate the button
.
.
308
5. On the plan select first, second and third points.
6. The filed
309
displays the calculated angle for these points,
Map
The Map icon on the Home screen opens the main Map. The main Map displays the map of the current job.
To move the map display, hold down and slide the stylus on the screen. The Map maintains the scale after
changing the status of the main map.
The basic commands of the main Map are available through:
l
l
l
l
The map view tools which are arranged in two groups. More...
The pop-up menus which depend on the objects selected. More...
The drawing toolbar which allows you to create an object. More...
The snap toolbar which allows you to create a point for the object which was selected in the Drawing
Toolbar. More...
Map View Tools
The tool bar consists of two groups that may be opened/hidden by using the arrow icon.
Click a tool icon to execute the command:
Zoom In
Zooms the plot inwards.
Zoom Out
Zooms the plot outwards.
Zoom Window
Selects an area to center on. You may draw an area from low-right to top-left to highlight the object(s) you want.
Zoom All
Displays all objects in the map.
Center to Point
Selects a point for centering the plot.
310
Layers
Opens the Layers dialog.
Map Properties
Displays the map properties. The Map Properties are also available from every other
pop-up menu.
3D View
Displays 3D view of the map. Then turns into the 2D View icon.
Drawing and Snap toolbars
Using the icons from the toolbars, you can create a point, a polyline segment, or an area.
Drawing toolbar
To open the drawing toolbar, click the
button in the top left corner of the plan.
Point
Creates a point.
Polyline
Creates a polyline
Area
Creates an enclosed area.
Fillet
Creates a fillet for two lines.
Fit arc.
Creates an arc as the best fit to the suggested points.
Fit polyline
Creates a polyline as the best fit to the suggested points.
311
Point
The Point button allows you to add a new point to the existing entities in the selected snap mode. For more
information about snap modes, see Snap Toolbar.
To create a point:
.
1. Click
2. Select the required snap mode, by clicking its icon.
3. Click the required place on the map.
The point is created according to the current snap mode.
Polyline
The Polyline button allows you to add a new polyline, by continuously creating the node points of the polyline when the snap mode is selected or not. For more information about snap modes, see Snap Toolbar .
To create a polyline:
.
1. Click
2. Select the required snap mode, by clicking its icon.
3. Continuously click the required places on the map to draw a line. Each point will be created according
to the current snap mode.
Note: You may change the snap mode during the line creation. To do it, simply click the icon for the
required snap mode.
The polyline is created.
312
Area
The Area button allows you to add a new enclosed area, by continuously creating the node points of the area in
the selected snap mode. For more information about snap modes, see Snap Toolbar.
To create an enclosed area:
.
1. Click
2. Select the desired snap mode, by clicking its icon.
3. Continuously click the required places on the map to create the nodes for the area. Each point will be created according to the current snap mode.
Note: You may change the snap mode during the area creation by simply clicking another snap icon.
The enclosed area is created.
Fillet
The Fillet button allows you to add a fillet with the defined radius between two existing polylines/arcs.
Note: A fillet will be created as the arc, from the first selected polyline/arc to the second polyline/arc, clockwise.
To create a fillet:
1. Click
.
The editbox for defining the fillet radius is displayed.
2. In the editbox, type the required radius of the fillet.
3. On the map, click the first polyline/arc.
4. On the map, click the second polyline/arc.
The fillet is created from the end point of the existing entities.
313
Best fit arc
The Best Fit arc button allows you to add a new arc as the best fit through the selected points.
To create a Best fit arc:
.
1. Click
2. Select the points on the map.
3. After selecting points, click
. The new arc is created.
Best fit line
The Best fit line button allows you to add a new line as the best fit through the selected points.
To create a Best fit line:
.
1. Click
2. Select the point on the map.
3. After selecting the points, click
. The new line is created.
314
Snap Toolbar
To open the snap toolbar, click the
button in the top left corner of the plan and select either point, or poly-
line, or area in the Drawing Toolbar. Using snap toolbar you can create points, lines or area as selected in the
Drawing Toolbar.
End point snap mode
Creates either point at the end of segment, or segment /area using the end points of the polyline
segment.
Mid-point snap mode
Creates either a point at the center of a segment, or segment /area using the middle point of the
polyline segment.
Circle center snap mode
Create a point in the center of arcs.
Line intersection snap mode
Create a point at the intersection of two lines.
Perpendicular snap mode
Creates a polyline perpendicular to an existing polyline.
Circle quadrant snap mode
Creates points at the circle quadrants.
End point snap mode
Use this mode to create:
l
l
l
315
an end point for the selected segment of the polyline,
a polyline segment between two end points,
a closed area with the end points of the selected segment,
l
l
a best fit arc with the end point of the selected segment,
a best fit line with the end point of the selected segment.
To use this mode:
1. Select the drawing tool: Point, Polyline, Area , Best fit arc, or Best fit line in the Drawing Toolbar.
.
2. On the snap toolbar, click
3. Click on a segment to create the end point on the nearest side.
If the Point button is selected, the software creates an end point for each segment that has been selected:
If the Polyline button is selected, the software creates a segment between the end points of the segments that have been selected:
If the Area button is selected, the software creates an closed area using the end points of the segments
that have been selected:
If the Best fit arc button is selected, the software creates:
316
l
an end point for the segment that has been clicked
and after deselecting
l
a new arc as the best fit through the points selected:
If the Best fit line button is selected, the software creates:
l
an end point for the segment that has been clicked
and after deselecting
l
a new polyline segment as the best fit through the points selected:
Mid-point snap mode
Use this mode to create:
l
l
l
317
a mid point for the selected segment of the polyline,
a polyline segment between two (or more) mid points,
a closed area with the mid points of the selected segment,
l
l
a best fit arc with the mid point of the selected segment,
a best fit line with the mid point of the selected segment.
To use this mode:
1. Select the drawing tool: Point, Polyline, Area, Best fit arc, or Best fit line in the Drawing Toolbar.
.
2. On the snap toolbar, click
3. Click on a segment to create the mid point.
If the Point button is selected, the software creates a mid point for each segment that has been selected:
If the Polyline button is selected, the software creates a segment between the mid points of the segments that have been selected:
If the Area button is selected, the software creates an closure area using the mid points of the segments
that have been selected:
If the Best fit arc button is selected, the software creates:
l the mid point of the segment that has been selected
and after deselecting
l
a new arc as the best fit through the point and other points of the job:
318
If the Best fit line button is selected, the software creates:
l
an mid point of the segment that has been selected
and after deselecting
l
a new polyline segment as the best fit through the points selected:
Circle center snap mode
Use this mode to create:
l
l
l
l
l
a point at the center of an arc,
a polyline segment from a circle center point to point or segment,
a closed area from circle center point,
a best fit arc with the circle center point,
a best fit line with the circle center point.
To use this mode:
319
1. Select the drawing tool: Point, Polyline, Area, Best fit arc, or Best fit line in the Drawing Toolbar.
.
2. On the snap toolbar, click
3. Click on an arc or circle to create the center point.
If the Point button is selected, the software creates an center point for the arc that has been clicked:
If the Polyline is selected, the software creates:
l the center point for the arc that has been selected
and after deselecting
l
a segment from the center point to any point or any segment that has been clicked:
If the Area button is selected, the software creates:
l
the center point for the arc that has been selected
and after deselecting
320
l
a closed area from this point and through other points or segment that has been clicked:
If the Best fit arc button is selected, the software creates:
l
the center point for the arc that has been selected
and after deselecting
l
a new arc as the best fit through the center point and other selected points:
If the Best fit line button is selected, the software creates:
l
a center point for the arc that has been selected
and after deselecting
321
l
a new line as the best fit through the center point and other selected points:
Line intersection snap mode
Use this mode to create:
l
l
l
l
l
a point at the intersection of a polyline and/or arc,
a polyline segment from the intersection point to either a point or segment,
a closed area from the intersection point,
a best fit arc with the intersection point,
a best fit line with the intersection point.
To use this mode:
1. Select the drawing tool: Point, Polyline, Area, Best fit arc, or Best fit line in the Drawing Toolbar.
.
2. On the snap toolbar, click
3. Click a polyline/arc and the intersecting polyline/area to create intersecting point:
If the Point button is selected, the software creates an intersection point of the two line segments that
have been selected:
322
If the Polyline button is selected, the software creates:
l
a point at the intersection of the two line segments
and after deselecting
l
a line segment from the point to any selected point or line segment:
If the Area button is selected, the software creates:
323
l
a point at the intersection of the two line segments
and after deselecting
l
a closed area starting from the point and through other selected points or line segments:
If the Best fit arc button is selected, the software creates:
l
a point at the intersection of the two line segments
and after deselecting
324
l
a new arc as the best fit through the point and other selected points:
If the Best fit line button is selected, the software creates:
l
a point at the intersection of the two line segments
and after deselecting
l
325
a new line as best fit through the point and other selected points:
Perpendicular snap mode
Use this mode to create a line segment perpendicular to an existing polyline.
Note: Before using this snap mode create at least one polyline segment.
To use this mode:
1. Select the drawing tool: Polyline or Area.
.
2. On the snap toolbar, click
3. Click a polyline/arc from which to create the perpendicular line.
If the Polyline button is selected, the software creates a perpendicular line from a selected point or polyline to the selected segment:
If the Area button is selected, the software creates:
l
a perpendicular line from a selected point or a polyline to the line segment that has been clicked
and after deselecting
326
l
a closed area from the intersection point using the perpendicular line and other selected point(s):
Circle quadrant snap mode
Use this mode to create:
l
l
l
l
l
an point at the intersection of the circle quadrant axe with its circumference,
a polyline segment between two (and more) intersection points,
a closure area from the intersection points,
a best fit arc with the intersection point,
a best fit line with the intersection point.
Note: The nearest to the click point intersection will be used.
To use this mode:
1. Select the drawing tool: Point, Polyline, Area, Best fit arc, or Best fit line in the Drawing Toolbar.
.
2. On the snap toolbar, click
3. Click on a circle or arc to create the quadrant point:
327
If the Point button is selected, the software creates a point at the intersection of the circle quadrant axes
with its selected circumference:
If the Polyline button is selected, the software creates a polyline segment between two (or more) intersection points:
If the Area button is selected, the software creates a closed area from the intersection points:
If the Best fit arc button is selected, the software creates:
l
point(s) at the intersection of the circle quadrant axes with its circumference
and after deselecting
328
l
a new arc as the best fit through the point(s) and other points of the job:
If the Best fit line button is selected, the software creates:
l
point(s) at the intersection of the circle quadrant axes with its circumference
and after deselecting
l
a new line as the best fit through the point(s) and other points of the job:
Map Pop-Up Menus
To open a pop-up menu hold down the stylus on any place in the map. The menu options vary depending on the
objects selected.
1. When there in no objects selected, the pop-up menu allows you to:
l Create a point at the place of menu call.
2. When an object is selected, the pop-up menu contains commands which virtually duplicate the number of
commands found in MAGNET Field and allow you to:
l Edit job data
l Calculate an appropriate COGO task.
329
Stake desired objects.
3. If you hold down the stylus on multiple objects, you obtain the Objects near selected point dialog that
allows you to select individual objects.
l
Map Properties
The Map Properties dialog contains four tabs:
l
l
l
l
General tab.
3D tab.
Surfaces tab.
Drawings tab.
General tab
In this tab you can configure displaying of the following objects on the Map, by selecting the appropriate
check boxes:
For Points:
l
l
The points' Names, Codes, Notes, Icons, and Heights along with the points.
The Auto Topo and Scanned points.
For Lines:
l
The Stations. Layout of the stations is defined by the Disp Dir As field.
For Bing Maps:
The check box is available when:
l
GPS type of instrument is selected to work.
l
Optical type of instrument is selected to work and a projection (not <none>) is selected.
or
If the check box is selected, after opening the Map the program will automatically load the Bing Maps for the
current job objects from the Internet.
330
When the Current Position in Main Map check box is selected the program automatically snaps back to the center if it moves off the edge of the map.
3D tab
In this tab you can select the fill type and the way of moving and rotation of the job object(s) on the Map.
l
Any surface in the 3D can be displayed as a solid model or as a wireframe model. To set the desired
model, click the corresponding radio button in the Fill mode group.
In the Rotation and moving group you can select a way of objects moving and rotation :
l
l
l
l
If the Scroll 3D radio button is selected, the objects will be moved in vertical or horizontal direction
without any rotation.
If the Free rotation radio button is selected, you can arbitrary rotate the job object(s) relative to some point.
We recommend to use this way for low density of an arrangement of objects.
If the Free rotation about orbit radio button is selected, you can rotate the job object(s) about orbit relative to some point. We recommend to use this way for high density of objects arrangement.
If the Rotation with fixed axis radio button is selected, you can rotate the job object(s) about orbit relative
to some vertical or horizontal axis. We recommend to use this way for high density of objects arrangement.
If the Show objects border check box is selected, you see a rectangle covering all objects of the job.
Surfaces tab
The left panel of the tab contains the list of the surfaces. You can highlight any surface and the right panel will
show this object.
To show/hide surface(s) on the Map, select /unselect its checkbox.
Drawings tab
The left panel of the dialog contains the list of the imported vector images. You can highlight any file and the
right panel will show this drawing. To show/hide a drawing on the Map, select /unselect its checkbox.
331
332
Connections
This dialog allows you to perform the following tasks:
1. To connect with the device of the selected type and select a configuration style to work at the site.
Find out more on Device connection
2. To enable a connection prompt upon starting the job.
Find out more on Device connection
3. To connect with MAGNET Enterprise web-server and the project for data exchange.
Find out more on Enterprise Connection
4. To connect with the network server.
Find out more on Network connection
5. To re-connect with a HiPer SR base.
Find out more on LongLINK connection
6. To connect with SiteLINK 3D server.
Find out more on SiteLINK 3D connection
Connecting with Device
The General tab of the Connections dialog allows you to change the type of the device to work and to select a job
configuration before connecting to the device. In Hybrid Positioning mode, you can directly toggle between
GPS+ and Robotic configurations having both GPS+ receiver and optical robot connected to the
MAGNET Field.
l
l
l
l
Select the GPS type of instrument and the configuration to work in the current job. Select the Base or
Rover radio button when working with the base receiver or the rover receiver in RTK surveys, respectively.
Select the Optical type of instrument and the configuration to work in the current job.
When Connect to the last used BT deviceis selected (by default), automatically connects to the last used
Bluetooth device. Find out more on Bluetooth connection. If you clear this check box, the device discovery will be initiated by pressing the Connect button.
Clearing the Prompt at startup check box will prevent the program from connecting to an instrument until
you click the icon
on the Home screen or enter a Survey or Stakeout dialog. However, the Net-
work settings will be available.
333
l
l
Clicking the Connect button initiates the connection to the device associated with the currently selected configuration. If options of the GPS receiver expired, you will be prompted to check OAF.
Clicking the Disconnect button closes the connection with the current device to connect with another
if required.
Bluetooth Connection
The procedure of Bluetooth connection includes three stages:
Device Discovery
Authentication
Connection to Bluetooth device
Device Discovery
The Select Bluetooth Device dialog lists all visible Bluetooth Devices.
l
l
l
l
l
Each device's Name is displayed. If the name cannot be resolved, Bluetooth Unique Address is displayed instead. Type of device and its services are displayed if the device provides this information.
The dialog title displays the type of device that application tries to connect to.
If a device is not present in the list or some devices did not report their names in a timely manner, try
refreshing the list using the Refresh button. If the device is still not listed, then the distance to it can be
too large or the device can be connected to a different controller. Connection with the device is possible even if its name was not resolved and only Bluetooth Unique Address is listed.
Pressing the Select button will initiate authentication with device.
If Bluetooth hardware is disabled (powered off) or the controller has an unsupported Bluetooth stack, a
warning will be displayed. Currently only the Microsoft Bluetooth stack is supported.
Authentication
The Bluetooth PIN dialog displays information about the selected device.
l
The application maintains authentication information independently of Bluetooth UI in the Operating
System. There is no need to pair devices beforehand, the application will perform the pairing.
334
l
l
l
The application supports connections with devices that do not require a PIN code. To use this feature, clear
the Require PIN check box. If the PIN code is provided and a connection is successful, the application
will store the PIN code in a protected area for future use.
Press the Connect button to initiate a connection.
If a connection succeeds, Bluetooth Unique Address and its authentication will be stored. Next time the
application will not display the Device Discovery.
Connection to Bluetooth device
When the application tries to establish a connection with Bluetooth port, it displays the Accessing Bluetooth
Device dialog. The title of the dialog displays the type of device that application tries to connect to.
l
l
If a connection cannot be established in a timely manner, the dialog will automatically stop the connection.
A connection can be canceled manually and with the Cancel button.
It is possible to initiate the Device Discovery procedure using the Change Device button. Also, the device
discovery can be initiated by clearing the Connect to the last BT device check box before connecting.
Connecting with Enterprise
The Enterprise tab allows you to establish a connection with an enterprise project:
1. Enter your Login and Password for connection to the Magnet Enterprise server.
2. Select a project from the Connect to project drop-down list. You can create a new project using the
icon.
3. If required, select the Connect on startup check box to connect to the project when running the
MAGNET Field.
4. Click Connect to establish the connection. Connection status displays the result.
Connecting with Network
The Network tab displays after you connect to a GPS device with Internal CDMA and GPRS modem for a Network survey. This tab visualizes the actions the program performs to connect the modem to the Network server.
335
For a MAGNET Relay configuration, the rover starts auto connecting to Enterprise Relay only after the
receiver is connected and Enterprise account is connected.
l
l
The action list is a read-only control, that shows available actions. Current action is marked with a
check (last in the list).
The Mount Point box shows an available list of mount points. To refresh the list, click
. Click
to view information on the highlighted mount point.
l
l
l
The Signal indicator shows the signal strength. More bars at indicator means better radio signal. This
indicator is enabled only if the Check signal quality is enabled in Miscellaneous settings.
The status field shows the status of the current operation (that is a subpart of an action).
The connection (disconnection) process can be initiated automatically if an auto-connection (disconnection) to Network server is enabled in Miscellaneous settings or manually by pressing the Connect (Disconnect) button.
Mount Point Information
This dialog displays the information related to the selected Mount point.
Information displayed includes: type, mountpoint, identifier, format, format-details, carrier, nav-system, network, country, latitude, longitude, nmea, solution, generator, compr-encrypt, authentication, fee, and bitrate.
LongLINK Connection
When you are working with a HiPer SR rover, a LongLINK connection with a HiPer SR base is automatically performed if the rover finds a single base. The LongLINK tab allows you to select a base to re-connect if there are several bases found. The tab displays:
l
The connected base transmitting corrections which is marked with the icon
l
All other available bases with the icon
l
.
.
The base data that contain the bases' names, the site IDs, coordinates, the number of the available bases
and the level of the signal power in percentage.
The buttons serve the following purposes:
336
l
l
l
Disconnect breaks the current connection.
Refresh renews the list of available bases.
Connect initiates the connection with the selected base. The Connect button changes for Disconnect.
Connecting with SiteLINK 3D
The SiteLINK 3D tab allows you to establish a connection with SiteLINK 3D server:
1. Enter appropriate login information for connection: server IP, port, password and username.
2. If required, select the Connect on startup check box to connect to the server on starting the MAGNET
Field.
3. Click Connect to establish the connection.
4. Connection status displays the result. The icon
indicates the successful connection.
5. Click Details if you want to learn more on the failed connection status
337
.
Setup folder
Before conducting the survey you may need to perform some preliminary work that depends upon the current
job configuration.
Follow a link to learn more:
Setup GPS survey
Setup Optical (Total Station) survey
Setup GPS folder
Click an icon to perform the task:
Status
Displays information about the current position of the GNSS receiver, RTK status,
and the satellite constellation.
Start Base
Sets the Base Receiver in RTK survey. Available after you establish a connection
with the base receiver.
Localization
Calculates localization parameters of the mathematical coordinate transformation
between an original coordinate system, in which the job points are measured or given,
and a local coordinate system, in which control points are known. Find out more...
Known Pt Init
Initializes the receiver using known coordinates for the Rover station. Available after
you configure menu to display this item.
mmGPS Init
Sets up mmGPS+ system for RTK surveying. Available after you select the
mmGPS+ system in peripherals for the rover receiver configuration.
Survey Session
Displays report information about the settings for the current RTK session.
338
Static Occupation
Starts logging data at the point occupied for static observations in PP Static survey.
PP Sessions
Installs sessions plans into GPS receivers in surveys with Post-Processing.
Simulator
Sets initial WGS84 position for GPS simulation configured.
Status
This allows you to check the status of a GPS+ survey. The Status dialog contains information about the current
position of the receiver, RTK status, and the satellite constellation.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Position tab
System tab
Multi Base Status tab
Scatter Plots tab
SVs tab
Log History tab
Position tab
The Position tab displays:
l
Total number of the available satellites. The lock icon
and the star icon
l
l
339
signifies the number of the satellites tracked,
shows the number of satellites used in position determination.
Current UTC time.
Coordinates of the position in the selected coordinate system and units.
l
l
l
PDOP value; it is a factor depending solely on satellite geometry describing how the uncertainty in the
coordinates will depend on the measurement errors. PDOP is proportional to the estimated position
uncertainty.
H and V stand for HRMS and VRMS, the RMS values of the horizontal and vertical coordinates,
respectively.
Base Dist: slope distance to base antenna. The field is empty if no differential corrections are received.
Settings icon
opens the dialog where Elevation Mask or Base Make At Rover parameter can be
changed.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
l
l
l
l
l
System tab
Multi Base Status tab
Scatter Plots tab
SVs tab
Log History tab
The icon
opens a pop-up menu which varies depending on the configuration type used. More...
System tab
Open the System tab to view the information about the current state of the RTK measurements:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Position Type - Indicates the solution type of the position.
Common Sats - Number of common satellites between the base and rover.
Initialized Sats -Number of satellites initialized.
Radio Link -Quality of the radio link.
RTK Age - Age of the last RTK message in seconds.
Receiver Memory (KB) - Available memory in the receiver for storing TPS files.
Receiver Power(%) - Percentage of receiver power remaining.
Controller Memory (KB) - Available memory in the controller.
Controller Power(%) - Percentage of controller power remaining.
NetRTK (MAC) Status - Applies to Network RTK style with MAC corrections selected. Will display
'Yes' if MAC is used for position computation.
Base Make at Rover - Requires Topcon receiver f/w at rover 3.4 or higher.
If Automatic detection of Base Make is selected in style settings, this field will report the Base Make
340
that was detected by the Rover receiver. If the Base receiver does not support IGS Class extensions to correction formats or if the required RTCM messages were not enabled on the base, this field will report a
dash (-), and the rover will apply default GLONASS corrections. You can override this by pressing the Settings button in the Status dialog or in the Styles Settings (Advanced). No Base Make At Rover will be
reported by MAGNET Field in this mode.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
l
l
l
l
l
Position tab
Multi Base Status tab
Scatter Plots tab
SVs tab
Log History tab
Solution type
Possible solution types:
l
l
l
l
l
No Solution - receiver cannot produce a solution (not enough satellites or incorrect antenna model)
Autonomous (Standalone)
DGPS (Code-differential)
Float
Fixed (RTK)
mmGPS+ solution marker indicates that solution was produced using mmGPS+ technology
Log History tab
If the Log History is available, a Log History tab is displayed.
The Log History tab graphically displays the usage of satellites over time. For convenience, the field is divided
into 5-minute portions along dotted lines. The starting time and next half hour is marked with time labels.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
l
l
341
Position tab
System tab
l
l
l
Multi Base Status tab
Scatter Plots tab
SVs tab
Multi Base Status tab
The Multi Base Status tab displays the information about the current state of the RTK measurements in the
multiple base configuration.
RTK - Use: a checkmark indicates this base station is currently used by the RTK engine.
RTK - ID: the numerical ID of this base station.
RTK - Base: the name of this base station. (Only available if this base is currently in use)
RTK - Age: the age of the last RTK message received by this base station.
RTK - Link: the quality of the radio link of this base station.
RTK - Type: Indicated the solution type of the position (only available if this base is currently in use)
RTK - Dist: the distance between this base station and the rover. (Only available if this base is currently in
use)
Other pages in the Status dialog:
l
l
l
l
l
Position tab
System tab
Scatter Plots tab
SVs tab
Log History tab
Scatter Plots tab
The Scatter Plots tab displays the current receiver position changing in time: either the current receiver vertical position or the horizontal position relative to the position in a local (northing, easting) coordinate system.
The buttons on the plot are used:
342
l
to switch between horizontal
l
to zoom in
l
to open properties
and vertical
plots
and out
. See Properties for Horizontal Plot and Properties for Vertical Plot.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
l
l
l
l
l
Position tab
System tab
Multi Base Status tab
SVs tab
Log History tab
Properties of Horizontal Plot
In this dialog you can show or hide the local coordinate axes (Show Grid checkbox) and activate automatically
scales the horizontal scatter plot to fit into the dialog (Auto Zoom checkbox).
Properties of Vertical Plot
In this dialog you can specify a duration in seconds for the time axis( Time Window field).
SVs tab
The SVs tab displays a graphical representation of the position of the satellites on the sky or the S/N ratios.
l
Clear the GPS+SBAS check box to hide the GPS and SBAS satellites. These satellites are marked with
icon.
l
Clear the GLNS check box to hide the GLONASS satellites. GLONASS satellites are marked with
icon.
343
l
l
Toggle between SNR and Plot to observe the skyplot or the signal-to-noise ratio for the satellites.
Click List to obtain the table displaying the satellites parameters:
PRN: shows the number of the satellite
H/U: shows whether the satellite is healthy or unhealthy
EL: shows the elevation angle of the satellite
AZ: shows the azimuth of the satellite
SNR1: L1 signal to noise ratio
SNR2: L2 signal to noise ratio
USED: shows whether the satellite is used in position computation. You can select whether a satellite
should be used or not by selecting the corresponding row for the satellite in the list and clicking on the
USED column header. This will toggle the use of the satellite.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
l
l
l
l
l
Position tab
System tab
Multi Base Status tab
Scatter Plots tab
Log History tab
Status pop-up menu
The pop-up menu can contain a different set of the following options depending on the configuration type
used
Rover Antenna Setup
Config Beacon is available, when you use the beacon as the corrections source for DGPS Real time.
Reset RTK or Reset DGPS - the command that reinitializes the receiver.
Mission Planning
Clear NVRAM - the command that resets the receiver parameters to factory default values (such as elevation
mask and recording interval, and information about the receiver's internal file system). This command will not
delete any files from the receiver memory. After clearing the NVRAM, the receiver will require some time
(around 15 minutes) to collect new ephemerides and almanacs.
344
Mission Planning
The Mission Planning option enables you to examine the expected observation conditions (such as satellite visibility and PDOP). This can be done in order to find out the best timing for observations at the specified point.
To perform mission planning:
1. Select Setup / Status and the Mission Planning option from the pop-up menu.
2. Configure settings for observations in the Mission Planning Setting dialog. More...
3. Once the Mission Planning Setting dialog is closed the Mission Planning dialog will calculate and show the
position of satellites in the first ten minutes of the specified time on the Sky Plot (the celestial sphere).
4. The Local field displays the date and time (local time) of the calculation result.
5. The dialog also provides information about the given position as applied to the calculations, the PDOP
value, and the number of GPS and GLONASS.
6. If required, you can hide all the GPS or GLONASS satellites from the view. To do this, uncheck the corresponding box.
7. Use the appropriate button to calculate and show the satellites in every ten minutes of the specified time:
l > or < to move forward or backward, respectively
l I< to return to the start time
l II to pause at any ten-minute interval
8. To view different graphical satellite information, select a desired option from the drop-down selection list:
Sky Plot
Sat List
Sat Num
PDOP
9. To change Mission Planning Setting, click
Mission Planning Setting
To configure settings for Mission Planning:
345
.
1. Enter the coordinates of the current position in one of the two possible ways
l
automatically by clicking
l
manually in the current coordinate system after clicking
2. Select the Date and Start and End Time of observations as required.
3. If required, change the Elevation Mask from the default 15 degrees for a desired value.
4. Click
to confirm the settings and to calculate and show the position of satellites in the first ten
minutes of the specified time on the Sky Plot of the Mission Planning dialog. In the combo box you can
select the showing Satellite List, Satellite Number, PDOP.
Satellite List
The Satellite List option allows you to view graphically the availability of either GPS or GLONASS satellites
changing in the specified time.
Satellite Number
The Satellite Number option allows you to view graphically the total number of GPS and GLONASS satellites changing in the specified time.
PDOP
The PDOP option allows you to view graphically the PDOP value changing in the specified time.
346
Localization in MAGNET Field
When performing a task of transformation of GPS points coordinates measured in WGS-84/Datum/Grid coordinate system into a Ground coordinate system, we cannot use the algorithms of transformation which are applied to
predefined or created by the user grids and datums. In this case MAGNET Field does not have predefined relation between two coordinate systems. We use Localization to perform coordinate transformation from WGS84/Datum/Grid to Ground (and vice versa).
Related topics:
l
l
l
l
Basic Concept of Localization
Localization with Stereographic Projection on WGS84
Localization with Stereographic Projection on any Datum
Localization with any Predefined or Created Projection
Basic Concept of Localization
Localization in MAGNET Field is a calculation of transformation parameters between WGS84/Datum/Grid and a
ground coordinate system. To perform localization, you need to have two independent sets of coordinates for the
same point or few points in the MAGNET Field. An independent set of coordinates is a set of such point coordinates that do not have a relation between each other. To perform localization in MAGNET Field, you need to
manually select coordinates in the Ground coordinate system ("Known Point") and in the Grid coordinate system
or WGS84/Datum coordinate system ("Measured Point") for the same point in the current job. Such a point is
called Localization Point.
In MAGNET Field, horizontal localization and vertical localization are performed separately.
l
l
347
Horizontal localizations use two-dimensional conformal transformations. This kind of transformation is also
known as a four-parameter similarity transformation (Rotation, Scale, and two translation parameters (DX,
DY)). To relate the points’ geodesic coordinates (measured with GNSS receivers) to local plane coordinates (obtained with total stations, etc.), a map projection is used as an intermediate step.
Vertical localizations use a three-parameter transformation (one shift (HO) and two slopes (Hx, Hy) to convert between the points’ellipsoidal or orthometric heights and the elevations in the local height system.
These three parameters are necessary in order to specify the plane that would adequately model the difference between the local geoid and the WGS84 ellipsoid in the given local area.
You determine how the localization points will use in localization parameters calculation by selecting the corresponding check boxes:
l
l
l
Use Horizontal - the point will use only in horizontal plane localization.
Use Vertical - the point will use only in vertical al plane localization.
Use Horizontal and Use Vertical - the point will use in both localizations.
Also you can select the point which will use only in the determination of rotation between two coordinate systems by selecting the corresponding check box Rotation Only.
When you check Use Horizontal and / or Use Vertical you can use one, two, three and more localization
points. For this case MAGNET Field will calculate a different set of transformation parameters and residuals.
The table displays which parameters are calculated in the process of localization, some parameters can be set
to zero depending on the used number of the localization points:
In the horizontal plane:
ONE
TWO
THREE FOUR
Point
Points
Points
Points
DX,DY- horizontal offset between two coordinate systems CALC CALC
CALC
CALC
Scale - combined Scale factor
CALC
CALC
PARAMETERS
CALC CALC
Rotation - rotation between two coordinate systems
0
CALC
CALC
CALC
N Residual, E Residual - residuals on the horizontal
plane
0
0
CALC
CALC
ONE
TWO
Point
Points
Points
Points
CALC CALC
CALC
CALC
In the vertical plane:
THREE FOUR
PARAMETERS
H0 - vertical offset between two coordinate systems
Deflection North, Deflection East- Deflection components
0
0
CALC
CALC
Ht Residual - residuals on the vertical plane
0
CALC
0
CALC
348
When you check Rotation Only for a localization point, you need add to localization one or more localization
points with Use Horizontal or Use Horizontal and Use Vertical status. For this case MAGNET Field will calculate:
l
l
with using localization point(s) with Use Horizontal and Use Vertical - DX,DY,H0, Rotation ,Scale,
Deflection North, Deflection East, NResiduals, EResidual, Ht Residuals,
with using localization point(s) with Rotation Only - Rotation, NResiduals, EResidual, Ht Residuals,
If a geoid model is set in the job, MAGNET Field will use this geoid model for calculating orthometric height
(elevation).
The current version of MAGNET Field enables you to perform the horizontal localization in three ways:
1. Using default (the stereographic) projection on WGS84 (Find out more...).
2. Using default (the stereographic) projection on any datum (Find out more...).
3. Using any predefined or created projection (Find out more...).
Localization
In the dialog you can select the type of localization and see the points are used in the calculation of the transformation parameters.
1. Select the Type of Localization. You can see the following types:
l WGS-84 ->Local; For the plane localization will use the stereographic projection on WGS-84. If
you perform a task of transformation of WGS-84 coordinates into Ground coordinates for a network
where the maximum distance between the local points is less than 5 kilometers, you can use this localization type. Before localization you need to set in the Coordinate System dialog: Projection
<none>; Datum WGS-84.
l Datum -> Local; For the plane localization will use the stereographic projection on selected datum.
If you know which datum is used for the local coordinate system, you can use this datum in localization. Before localization you need to set in the Coordinate System dialog: Projection <none>;
Datum ANY_Datum .
l Grid->Local; If you know which projection is used for the local coordinate system, you can use this
projection in localization. In this case this projection and corresponding datum will be used in the process of calculation of localization parameters. Such approach to the calculation of the localization
parameters between two coordinate systems is more rigorous method, than using the stereographic
349
projection for a unknown local projection. This way allows increasing the distance between localization points (up to some hundred of kilometers depending on the type of the projection)
without loss in transformation precision. Before localization you need to set in the Coordinate
System dialog: Projection ANY_Projection; Datum Datum_for_Projection .
2. Click Add to open the Add Localization Point dialog for adding control point(s). The quantity of
points required for localization depends on how these points are used in localization parameters calculation.
Note: The localization is recomputed every time a new point is added to the list of localization points.
The new coordinate system will be saved under the name "Localization" and is automatically selected
in the Coordinate System dialog.
3. Select the Keep scale 1.000000000 check box to preserve the localization from a scale transformation
as required. If this parameter is not selected (default settings), the scale factor will be calculated according to the number of localization points.
4. If needed, click Edit to open the Edit H/V Controls dialog to change how these points are used in localization parameters calculation.
5. Click Remove to remove the highlighted points pair(s).
6. Click Details to view the results of the localization.
7. Click
Click
to close the Localization window.
to change Settings for the survey if necessary.
Related task:
l
Basic Concept of Localization
The icon
opens a pop-up menu which you can select additional features of localization More...
Pop-up menu of Localization
The pop-up menu contains a set of the following options:
350
l
l
l
l
Edit Points
Export to File opens To File dialog, where you can select the desired file format to export the transformation parameters. By default, "gs3" file format is set. The Export to File is enable, when the localization type is WGS->Local.
Localization Origin is enable, when one or more pairs of points are selected for localization, and the
option is used for the WGS->Locallocalization type . You can select one of the following:
l Center of Localization Points (default setting) - the geometrical center of pairs of points, which is
used in localization, becomes the center of the default map projection
l First Localization Point - the first pair of points, which is used in the localization, becomes the center of default map projection.
Legacy Mode is enable, when one or more pairs of points are selected for localization. Select it to set the
Legacy mode for the horizontal localization. We recommend you to select this mode when you import the
Topcon 3D localization file (*.gc3), which was created by all versions of Topcon Tools, TopSURV,
Pocket 3D, 3D-Office and versions 1.* of MAGNET Tools and MAGNET Field. If this mode is not selected (by default), the default mode is applied. We recommend you to select default mode when you import
the Topcon 3D localization file (*.gc3), which was created by MAGNET Tools and MAGNET Field from
version 2.0. When you import Localization file into the opened job and you click the Use Legacy Localization check box, the Legacy mode is automatically set.
Add Localization Point
In the dialog you can add point(s) to localization.
1. Select where the localization point will be use:
l Rotation Only - the localization point is used for the determination of rotation between two coordinate systems only. Using one point is not enough to perform localization. Need to add one or more
point with "Use Horizontal", or "Use Horizontal"/ "Use Vertical " status. When performing localization the software calculates:
l the rotation between two coordinate systems using point(s) with "Rotation Only" and point(s)
with "Use Horizontal", or "Use Horizontal"/ "Use Vertical "status.
and
l
351
the offset and scale between two coordinate systems using point(s) with "Use Horizontal", or
"Use Horizontal"/ "Use Vertical "status.
Use Horizontal - the point is used in the horizontal localization. You can select one, two, three
and more localization points in this plane. For each case the application will calculate a different
set of transformation parameters and residuals.
l Use Vertical - the point is used in the vertical localization. You can select one, two, three and
more localization points in the plane.
2. In the Known Point field, enter the Point in the local (ground) coordinate system. You can enter the
l
point manually or select it from the map
or from the list
of the job points.
3. In the Measured Point field, enter the Point in the coordinate system that is set for the current job.
You can enter the point manually, select it from the map
or from the list
For the GPS device type you can measure the coordinates point by clicking
of the job points.
. The # field shows
the number of the accepted epochs. The parameters of the logging are set through the
Settings
button. If a point with the same name already exists, the application will open the Point Check notification dialog. You can overwrite, rename, or store the point as a check point. Select the Code for this
point and click
4. Click
to set the point's attributes . More...
to save the point and return to the Localization dialog with a newly added point.
Localization Results
The Localization Results dialog displays the input and calculated parameters of the localization:
l
l
l
l
Localize To: the name of the projection (datum) of the current job to which the localization was
applied.
Rotation: the rotation angle between the projection (datum) and local coordinate systems.
Scale: the scale factor between the projection (datum) and local coordinate systems.
Offsets: the offset vector between the origins of coordinate systems.
North: the horizontal component of the offset vector on the X axis.
East: the horizontal component of the offset vector on the Y axis.
HO: the vertical component of the offset vector.
352
l
l
l
Deflections: the vertical deflection.
North: the North component.
East: the East component.
Geodetic Origin: geodetic coordinates of the first localization point from the projection (datum) set in the
coordinate system of the current job.
Lat: the latitude of the first localization point.
Lon: the longitude of the first localization point.
Ht: the ellipsoidal height of the first localization point.
Local Origin: local coordinates of the first localization point from the local set in the local coordinate system.
North: the northing coordinate of the first localization point.
East: the easting coordinate of the first localization point
Ht: the orthometric height of the first localization point.
Start Base (RTK)
The Start Base dialog contains information about the Base receiver and is used to set up the Base.
To set up the Base:
1. Enter the name of the Point where the Base receiver is located. It can be chosen from the map
list
or the
of the job points, or can be entered manually.
2. Select the Code for the point from the drop-down list. If required, set a string. Click
to set the
point's attributes. More...
3. The coordinates of the base point in the selected coordinate system will be shown.
4. You can enter the measured coordinates of the current point. To measure the current position:
l Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click
the button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The menu retains your settings. You can edit
the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog.
l
353
Click the button
. Once pressed, the button turns into
.
Click this button to stop logging the position. The average measured coordinates will be displayed. The Pos field appears to show the number of the measurements used for averaging.
5. Click the Start Base button to start the receiver as the Base transmitting the correction data.
Note: If you start the base with a UHF radio and only for the first time in the job, clicking the Start
Base button initiates the Quick Radio configuration to quickly set up the UHF radio for data transmission. Learn more about how MAGNET Field controls Quick Radio.
l
6. The Duration field displays the length of time you want the receiver to log data to the raw GPS data
file for the Post-Processed RTK. The logging data will start by the Start Base button and stop by the
Stop Base button.
The icon
opens a pop-up menu of the following options. More...
Quick Radio
The Quick Radio functionality enables quick configuration of a UHF radio channel for data transmission.
These are some details about Quick Radio work:
l
l
l
l
If you change a radio parameter value using any other application, MAGNET Field will not consider
the new value, and Quick Radio will not work correctly.
If you connect the same base receiver as the RTK / Network RTK rover, and then back as the base,
Quick Radio will be reset and will work again when you start the base.
If you change the power using the Config Base Radio option, Quick Radio will be reset and will work
again when you start the base.
If you change the channel using either the Config Radio dialog or the Quick Radio configuration during the last Start Base, Quick Radio will not be reset and will not work when you start the base.
Start Base pop-up menu
The pop-up menu can contain the following options:
Status
Config Radio depends on the configuration for the survey
Multi Base available for RTK with CMR+ format of correction data
354
Grid to Ground available if starting the base in a grid coordinate system
Multi Base
For Multi Base mode in RTK survey, all Base receivers must be configured to transmit at the same frequency and
must transmit CMR+ format corrections. The Rover receiver must be configured to receive only CMR+ messages.
To set multi base mode for surveying:
1. From Base Station ID, select the identifying number of the base, which is sent as part of the CMR+ messages. Each base in a network must have a unique ID.
2. From Transmit Delay, select the signal transmission delay from the current base. This parameter is set to
ensure that the radio signals from multiple bases do not overlap. Each base should be set at least 250 milliseconds apart from any other. (At least 500 milliseconds for data transfer rates less than 9600 bps.)
3. Select the Use Multi Base check box to enable multi base mode.
4. Click
to save the settings and to return to the Start Base dialog.
Simulator
In the Simulation Setup dialog you can setup the initial WGS84 position for GPS simulation. You can enter the
position manually or select a point from the map
or from the list
.
If simulation moving speed is not zero, the current position starts to drift immediately. The current position is
remembered between MAGNET Field runs.
Moving speed and direction can be changed in the main map or in the Topo dialog using arrows.
355
Known Point Initialization
By default, this option is absent in the menu. To show it, from the Home screen, click
and select Con-
figure Menu. More... The Known Point Initialization is optionally used for quality control and to help the
rover receiver to obtain the fixed solution under unfavorable conditions.
To initialize the receiver using the known coordinates for the Rover station:
1. Enter the name of the known Point where the Rover receiver is located. It can be chosen from the map
or the list
of the job points, or can be entered manually.
2. The Coordinates of the Rover position are shown in the current coordinate system after the known
point is selected.
3. Enter the antenna height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
Ant Ht button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The menu retains your settings. You can edit
the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog.
4. Click Initialize to start the initialization of the rover receiver with the specified coordinates. After the
initialization is carried out, the KPI Position will display.
KPI Position
The following information about the initialized rover receiver is displayed:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
The total number of the available satellites. The lock icon signifies the number of the satellites tracked,
the star icon shows the number of satellites used in position determination.
The current UTC time.
The solution status.
The position Residuals of the current position from the known coordinates.
The PDOP value; it is a factor depending solely on satellite geometry describing how the uncertainty
in the coordinates will depend on the measurement errors. PDOP is proportional to the estimated position uncertainty.
H and V stand for HRMS and VRMS, the RMS values of the horizontal and vertical coordinates,
respectively.
KPR Status: If it is Initialized.
356
Survey Session
The RTK session wizard displays the following configuration settings which were when recording points:
1. Positioning. More...
2. Meteorological conditions. More...
3. The rover and base receivers. More...
RTK Session - Positioning
The positioning settings for an RTK session include:
l
l
l
l
The Session Name. Click the Get Date button to display the current date for the session name.
The Elevation Mask below which the satellites are not taken into account.
The Minimum SVs to be considered.
The PDOP Mask for the satellites used.
Click Next to observe the meteo settings.
RTK Session - Meteo
The meteo settings in the current units for an RTK session include:
l
l
l
The air Temperature.
The Pressure of air.
The relative Humidity.
Click Next to observe the receivers settings.
RTK Session - Receivers
The Rover and Base receivers settings for an RTK session include:
357
l
l
Click
The type of the Receiver used and it's Serial Number.
The type of the Antenna used and it's Serial Number.
to return to the Setup menu.
PP Session
To setup PP sessions:
1. In the Receivers panel, expand a tree of the receivers and session plans created. More...
2. Highlight a receiver and click the arrow button to move all the receiver's sessions into the list of Active
Sessions. To move an individual session, highlight the required session and click the arrow button.
to delete a highlighted session from the active sessions if you need.
3. Click
4. Click Refresh to renew the active sessions list.
5. Select the Sleep mode after applying check box to put the receiver into sleep mode after applying the
session plans.
6. Click Apply to send all the active sessions to the connected receiver. The sessions disappear from the
list.
Note: After applying sessions to a receiver, you may reconnect with the receiver to observe the applied sessions in the Active Sessions list.
Static Occupation
To configure the receiver for a Post-Processed static occupation of the survey marker:
1. Enter the name of the Point where the static receiver is located. It can be chosen from the map or the
list of the job points, or can be entered manually.
2. Select the Code you want assigned to the point. It will be included in the raw GPS data file. If
required, click
to set the point's attributes . More...
358
3. Enter the antenna height and set the type of measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the Ant Ht
button and select Edit from the drop-down list. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna
height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog.
to set raw data logging parameters for Post-Processing. More...
4. Click 5. The Duration field displays the length of time passed since the starting of the occupation.
6. Click the Start Occ button to start logging data to the raw GPS data file. When pressed, it changes to Stop
Occ. The icon
ated icon
in the status bar of the dialog designates the log file. If the file is opened, the anim-
will show logging into the file.
mmGPS Initialization
The procedure of initialization of mmGPS+ systems includes two steps:
1. Connect the controller and transmitter. Calibrate the transmitter with the correct channel and communication port and also setup the transmitter's height and locate it at the jobsite. Learn more about that
from Transmitter Data and Transmitter Position.
2. Unplug the controller from the transmitter. Connect the controller and GPS receiver to initialize the Sensor.
Click
l
l
l
to display additional functions:
Field Calibration: Opens the Calibration dialog to ensure correct grade in the self-leveling mechanism of
the transmitter.
Known Point Offset: Opens the Known Point Offset dialog to check the results of a resection and optionally to adjust the transmitter's height using the new offset.
Advanced Sensor Options: Opens the Advanced Options dialog.
Transmitter Data
The Data tab allows calibration of the transmitter with the correct channel and communication port:
359
l
l
l
l
The transmitter list contains the following items:
Name: The name of the transmitter.
ID: The ID that corresponds to the channel of the transmitter.
Data: The status of calibration data.
Click Add to add a transmitter to the transmitter list. More...
Click Edit to change the information on the existing transmitter if required.
Click Delete to remove the highlighted transmitter from the list.
Transmitter
To add a connected transmitter:
1. Enter the Name of the transmitter.
2. From Com Port, select the communication port of the controller that is used for connection with the
transmitter.
3. Click Get Data to retrieve the transmitter's data.
The ID that corresponds to the channel of the transmitter
The status of Calibration Data
The Firmware Version
4. Click Clear Data to clear the data fields if required.
5. Click
.
Transmitter Position
To set up the transmitter's height and location at the jobsite:
l
l
l
l
The transmitter list contains the following items:
Name: The name of the transmitter.
ID: The channel of the transmitter.
Point: The point over which the transmitter is setup.
Click Resect to perform resection for an unknown transmitter location in the event that a point has
been lost. More...
Note: This operation requires that the transmitter and sensor have already been setup.
Click Edit to enter the transmitter's position. More...
Click Delete to remove the transmitter from the list.
360
Resect mmGPS+
To measure an unknown transmitter location using the rover and three or more points:
1. With the controller and sensor connected, set up the sensor. More...
2. Perform resection measurements. More...
3. Observe calculated data. More...
Sensor
To set up the sensor for measurements:
1. Select the Receiver Port that connects the receiver and sensor.
2. From Transmitter ID, select the transmitter's channel. The ANY selection will allow the sensor to independently select the transmitter with the smallest error rate.
3. Select the Sensor Gain to set the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitter's laser beam.
4. The Firmware Version for the sensor is shown.
5. If Known Trans Horz Pos is selected, the Known Point dialog displays. Select the point over which the
transmitter is setup.
6. Click Init Sensor to start initialization process.
Resect
To perform the measurements from the rover point to the point over which the transmitter is set:
1. Observe the information about the current state of measurement displays:
l
l
l
l
l
361
An icon for the transmitter's active beam
.
The quality of the radio link.
The type of the position calculation method.
The RMS errors for horizontal and vertical coordinates.
The number of the satellites tracked and used in position calculation.
2. If using an unknown point, click
3. If using a known point:
.
l
Enable the Known Point check box and select the point using the map
or list
l
buttons.
Enter the Antenna Height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant).
l
Click
.
4. During the measurement, the Logging field displays the counter of the epochs collected.
5. The Meas field shows the number of measurement.
6. When the desired amount of epochs is achieved, click
7. Move to the next point and repeat measurement steps for it.
.
Data
On this tab:
1. View the results of resection calculation. Data will display only after three or more points have been
measured.
2. Click Re-Meas to re-measure a point if required.
3. If the resection values are acceptable, click Accept and view the point information for the transmitter.
4. Enter any other desired information and click
to save the transmitter's point information.
Known Point
To setup the transmitter over a known point:
1. Select the Point the transmitter is installed over. It can be selected using the map
or list
buttons.
362
2. In the Transmitter area:
l The transmitter's Name and channel ID will be displayed.
l Select the Fixed Tripod check box if you use a tripod of a fixed height. Select the required value of
the height from three available.
l In Ht, enter the height of the transmitter: either Vertical to the Base of the transmitter or Slant to the
cross Mark on the transmitter's side.
3. Click
.
Sensor
To upload transmitter calibration information to the sensor and set up the sensor for receiving the transmitter's
laser beam:
1. Select the Receiver Port that connects the receiver and sensor.
2. From Transmitter ID, select the transmitter's channel. The ANY selection will allow the sensor to independently select the transmitter with the smallest error rate.
3. Select the Sensor Gain to set the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitter's laser beam.
4. The Firmware Version for the sensor is shown.
5. Click Init Sensor to start initialization process.
Field Calibration
The Field Calibration function fixes errors in incline in the self-leveling mechanism of the transmitter.
To perform field calibration:
1. Set the transmitter into calibration mode. To do this, hold the plumb beam key, then press and release the
power key.
2. Connect the controller and sensor. Face the sensor towards the transmitter at the distance of several feet.
Ensure that the sensor remains steady throughout the calibration process.
3. The Transmitter Name displays.
4. Click Next. A wizard will guide you through the calibration process. When the calibration completes,
Update Calibration Data if required.
363
Update Calibration Data
The Update Calibration Data dialog displays after performing Field Calibration if it is determined that the
transmitter leveling offsets need to be adjusted.
To update the calibration data:
1. Disconnect the controller from the sensor and connect with the transmitter.
2. Select the Communication Port that connects the controller and transmitter.
3. Click Update Data to send the offsets information to the transmitter. MAGNET Field uploads the calibration data to the transmitter and automatically turns off the transmitter.
4. When finished, close a successful message and initialize the sensor. More...
Known Point Offset
The Known Point Offset function is used to compute the height offset between the rover and a currently occupied known point. This can be used as an adjustment for the transmitter height.
1. The Transmitter Name field displays the name of the transmitter.
or list
buttons.
2. Select the rover's known Point. It can be selected using the map
3. Enter the Antenna Height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant).
4. The Num Epochs field displays the number of GPS epochs used in the measurement.
5. Click
to start the measurement process. After pressing, the button changes to
, and the
counter of the epochs collected appears. You should wait until the epochs collected are averaged. Click
to cancel.
6. When the averaging completes, the Height Offset will display the difference in height between the
known measurement and the current rover measurement.
7. Click
, then Yes on the warning dialog to adjust the transmitter height using the offset. This off-
set will be automatically added to the transmitter's height.
8. When finished, initialize the sensor. More...
364
Advanced Sensor Options
In the mmGPS+ Options field you can:
1. Select the Init Time Improvement check box to improve the RTK fix time for the receiver.
2. The Weighted Height check box is selected by default to use the weighted height values from GPS and
mmGPS+ measurements.
Setup Optical (Total Station) folder
Click an icon to perform the task:
Backsight
Sets up a Total Station survey with a reference direction.
Resection
Computes the coordinates of an occupation point, where the instrument is set up, using
measurements to two (or more) points with known coordinates. When you work in the
Hybrid Positioning mode, on one known point GPS and TS measurements will be performed.
Benchmark
Computes the elevation of an occupation point, where the instrument is set up, using measurements to two (or more) points with known elevations.
Reference Line
Computes the coordinates of an occupation point, where the instrument is set up, using
measurements to two design points (or offsets from them). You consider the measurements from the instrument as perfect.
Remote Ctrl
Transmits commands from the controller to the motorized total station.
Localization
Calculates localization parameters of the mathematical coordinate transformation between
an original coordinate system, in which the job points are measured or given, and a local
coordinate system, in which control points are known. Find out more...
365
Backsight
The backsight wizard helps you specify a reference direction of a Total Station survey.
1. In the Occupation Point group you can:
l Enter the name of the Point, where the total station is located. You can set the occupied point in
one of the following ways:
l Type in the name of the point.
l
Choose the point from the map
.
l
Choose the point from the list of the job points. To do this, click
and select From
List from the pop-up menu.
l
Determine an arbitrary point near an alignment. Click
and select Station and
Offsetfrom the pop-up menu.
l
Determine the point location by resection. Click
and select Resection from the pop-
up menu.
l
Compute the elevation of an occupied point by vertical resection. Click
l
Remote BM from the pop-up menu.
Type in the height of the instrument (HI).
l
Click
and select
to select the way to specify the scale factor for the given occupation point. You can
set either Scale factor is equal one, or type in custom value to the User Scale or set scale for the
current Grid projection (if a project is selected ) .
Note: If you have entered a new occupation point, the software prompts you to enter the point coordinates in the Add Points dialog before starting of measurement.
2. In the Backsight Point group you can:
l Select between Point / Azimuth to enter either the name of the backsight location or the direction to it.
You can set the backsight direction in one of the following ways:
l Type in the name of the point.
l
Choose the point from the map
366
l
Choose the point from the list of the job points. To do this, click
and select From List
from the pop-up menu.
l
Determine an arbitrary point near an alignment. Click
and select Station and
Offsetfrom the pop-up menu.
l
l
l
Use multiple backsight points. Click
and select Multiple BS from the pop-up menu.
Enter the height of the reflector.
Select Fixed Height if you want to fix the height of the backsight point for the whole set of measurements. This is useful when one target is mounted at the BS for the duration of an occupation and
another is used for sideshots in mode Ang/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev
Note: If you have entered a new backsight point, the software prompts you to enter the point coordinates in
the Add Points dialog before starting of measurement.
3. Click the Next button to continue.
4. Check the setup settings:
l The Occupied point name and the height of the instrument.
l The Backsight point name (or "---" if the Azimuth was selected in the Backsight Point group) and
the height of the reflector.
l The Azimuth to the backsight point location.
The Set Circle to field displays the horizontal circle reading corresponding to the backsight point. The icon
brings up the floating menu that enables you to set the BS Circle value to zero or azimuth, to input a
value or to get from the instrument, or to change the value by +/- 90 or 180 degrees. The software retains
the previous setting for this drop-down list.
To turn a Robotic total station to the Backsight Point, click the To BS button.
Select Measure Distance if required to measure the distance to backsight point.
If required, click the Check button to take the measurement to the backsight point and then view the results.
5. Click the Set button to set the horizontal circle on the instrument as defined in the BS Circle field, take the
measurement to the backsight point and then observe the results. If required, click
367
to save the
results into a file.
6. Click
to observe and change the survey settings, if required. More...
7. The icon
Click the icon
brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
provided a robotic total station is used to toggle between the status bar and the tool bar
for remote control of the instrument. More...
User Scale
Enter the required value of the scale.
Pop-up menu
Additional options which can be useful are as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
View: you can select text view (Normal) and graphic view (Map).
Edit Points: opens the Points list to edit points.
Robotic: you can open either the Remote Control Tilt dialog (by clicking Tilt) to control tilt correction
or open Search/Track Parameters dialog (by clicking Remote Settings) to specify the parameters of the
searching area in the horizontal and vertical planes.
Inverse: opens the Two-Point Inverse COGO dialog.
Intersection: opens the Intersection COGO dialog.
Raw data: you can open either the Raw Data dialog to edit raw data or the Add Raw Note dialog to
enter text of a field note.
Help: opens the help topic.
Tilt: opens the Remote Control Tilt dialog to control tilt correction.
Remote Control Tilt
This dialog allows you to control tilt correction.
368
l
l
l
l
Two bars show the level bubbles in two directions.
X,Y fields display numerical values of the instrument tilt.
The circle represents the tolerance of location of the level bubble for the vertical and horizontal angle tilt
correction.
If required, adjust the instrument tilt to visually set the bubble into the correction area.
Station and Offset
The Station and Offset dialog allows the backsight or occupation point to be determined by the station, offset and
elevation in relation to a road.
To determine the point:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click
and select the referenced alignment that can be a Road or Horizontal Alignment
Enter the Station along the road where this point should occur.
Enter the Offset from the road where this point should occur.
Enter the Elevation of the point.
5. Click
to open the Add Point dialog on which to add the calculated point to the list of points. The
BS dialog opens with this occupation point.
Multiple Backsight
Multiple backsight points allow you to verify the location of the occupied point.
Take the measurements to a number of BS points:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the first known Point name.
The Code field displays the point's code.
In HR, enter the height of the reflector.
Take measurements. More...
The Set tab displays measurements being done during one set: the Res HA (residuals of the horizontal angles)
and the measured and initial parameters. Use the buttons for the following purposes:
369
l
l
l
Remove: to delete the highlighted measurement from the set.
Re-Meas: to replace the current measurement with a new measurement.
Accept: to store the new coordinates in the database.
Taking Measurements
Depending from the selected instrument type, MAGNET Field offers the following ways to take measurements.
For the Conventional Total Station. When using the Conventional Total Station you may save the single
measurement, or you may also perform single measurement to the point; verify the result on the screen and
after that save it.
l
click
to obtain the single measurement. Then click
to save it.
l
click
to take the single measurement to the point and automatically save it.
or
Note: For both these ways you can select either Fine or Rapid (Coarse) distance measuring mode.
For the Robotic Total Station. The Robotic Total Station automatically takes the measurement to the target.
There are two buttons in the dialog:
l
when you click
the Robotic starts measurement in the Precise mode. You can set the desired
parameters for the mode in the Mode dialog. Depending from your settings for the Precise mode you
can obtain either continuous measurements, or a single or an averaged measurement in the Fine / Rapid
(Coarse) / Tracking mode. Also you can select the Auto Store option, when either the single or the
averaged measurement will be automatically stored in the job. If you did not set this option, click
to save the measurement, or click
to discard the measurement.
or
370
l
when you click
the Robotic starts measurement in the Quick mode. You can set the desired para-
meters for the mode in the Mode dialog. Depending from your settings for the Quick mode you can save
either a single or an averaged measurement in the Fine / Rapid (Coarse) / Tracking mode to the job.
Resection
The method of resection allows you to determine the location of the Total Station occupation point by measurement of the known points.
The resection wizard helps you perform the resection:
1. In the Define instrument setup group you can:
l
Set a name of the occupation point (Occupy). If you determinate the coordinates of an unknown
occupation point, type in the point name. If you want to recalculate the coordinate of the known occupation point choose the point either from the map
or from the list
Type in the height of the instrument (HI)
l Select from the list (Code) a desire code for the occupation point.
2. Click the Next button to continue.
3. In the Specify another control point group you can:
l
l
Enter the known name (Point); you can select the point either from the map
or from the list
.
Type in the height of the reflector (HR)
l The Measure FS Direct displays the values of horizontal angle (HA), vertical angle (VA) and
slope distance (SD).
l Take the measurements. More...
4. Repeat the procedure for the remaining known points.
l
5. After saving second point (and subsequent point ) the Results screen displays measured value of angles
and slope distances with estimate of accuracy. In this screen you can:
371
Click Add to continue measure an other control point.
l Click Remove to delete any selected measurement.
l Click Re-Meas to repeat the measurement to the previous point.
l Click Accept to calculate (or recalculate, when you add a measurement to next control points)
the occupation point coordinates and finish the resection procedure.
6. After finishing the resection procedure you can add a new measurement for the given occupation point.
l
Click
and perform a new TS measurement.
By using Resection Options you can select resection either in the horizontal plane only (2D) or the
horizontal and vertical plane (Resection 3D).
If you activated Hybrid Positioning mode, the Resection for this mode will prompt to perform TS and
GPS measurement for the point.
Resection 3D
To calculate the default three dimensional resection, minimum two points with distance measurements are
required. With angle-only measurements, three points are required. If additional points are measured, a leastsquared solution is used. To change the type of resection to use only horizontal coordinates (2D), click
and select Resection Options from the pop-up menu. The 2D/3D option is retained between sessions. When doing a resection next time, the resection will start up with the previous used setting.
To perform the resection, see the steps in the Resection. The Result screen displays the result of the
sideshots being done.
The icon
brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Resection in Hybrid Positioning mode
The Hybrid positioning mode allows you to simultaneously record the point coordinates from GPS rover
receiver and Total Station to the opened job. This option can be activated only for Robotic Total Station with
372
reflector. The GPS receiver and Robotic Total Station are connected to the job. Using Hybrid Positioning mode
you can obtain an occupation point coordinates in Grid or WGS-84 coordinate systems.
Before performing resection you need activate Hybrid Positioning, select desired prism and select Hybrid positioning antenna offset check box and open Resection dialog.
There are four different scenarios to perform the resection procedure:
A. The desired Grid projection is defined in the job. Grid to Ground transformation is not selected. The
GPS and TS measurements are performed for each unknown point. The coordinates of the Occupation
Point are calculated in the current Grid coordinate system.
1. Select the desired Grid projection in the Coordinate System dialog.
2. In the Define instrument setup group (Resection dialog) you can:
l Set a name of the occupation point (Occupy). If you determinate the coordinates of an
unknown occupation point, type in the point name. If you want to recalculate the coordinate of
the known occupation point choose the point either from the map
or from the list
.
l Type in the height of the instrument (HI)
l Select from the list (Code) a desire code for the occupation point.
3. Click the Next button to continue.
4. In the Specify another control point group you can:
l
Enter the name (Point); you can select the point either from the map
or from the list
.
Type in the height of the reflector (HR)
l The Measure FS Direct displays the values of horizontal angle (HA), vertical angle (VA)
and slope distance (SD).
l Take the TS measurements. More...
5. In the Measuring GPS for ... you see the point coordinates in the current Grid are measured by the
GPS receiver. In this group you can:
l
l
Change the point name or select the point either from the map
l
Click
373
.
to perform the measurement with the precise settings and store the point either
automatically or manually.
or
or from the list
l
Click
to perform the measurement with the quick settings and to automatically
store the point.
6. After saving second unknown point (and subsequent point ) the Results screen displays measured value of angles and slope distances with estimate of accuracy. In this screen you can:
Click Add to continue measure an other control point.
l Click Remove to delete any selected measurement.
l Click Re-Meas to repeat the measurement to the previous point.
l Click Accept to calculate (or recalculate, when you add a measurement to next control
points) the occupation point coordinates in the current Grid coordinate system and finish
the resection procedure. Clicking on the button opens the Store Point dialog, where the
occupation point coordinates are displayed.
7. After finishing the resection procedure you can add a new measurement for the given occupation
l
point. Click
and perform a new TS / GPS measurement.
B. The desired Grid projection is defined in the job. Grid to Ground transformation is selected. The relation ship between Grid and Ground coordinate systems is known. Coordinates for both coordinate sets
are displayed in the current coordinate system. The coordinates of the Occupation Point are calculated
in the Grid or Ground coordinate systems. The routine of the resection procedure is equal previous
scenario.
1. Select the desired Grid projection in the Coordinate System dialog.
2. Click the Use Grid/Ground check box, click
and select the desired parameter (Para-
meters) in the Grid/Ground Parameters dialog. Click
to save the selected grid to
ground parameters.
3. Perform the steps 2-6 in the previous scenario.
C. The Grid projection is not defined in the job. The user has coordinates of the control points (two
points at least) in the Ground coordinate system. For each control point TS and GPS measurements are
374
provided. The software automatically performs the localization between WGS-84 and Ground. The
coordinates of the Occupation Point are calculated in the Ground and WGS-84 coordinate systems.
1. Select <none > in the Projection of the Coordinate System dialog.
2. In the Define instrument setup group (Resection dialog) you can:
l Set a name of the occupation point (Occupy). If you determinate the coordinates of an
unknown occupation point, type in the point name. If you want to recalculate the coordinate of
the known occupation point choose the point either from the map
or from the list
.
l Type in the height of the instrument (HI)
l Select from the list (Code) a desire code for the occupation point.
3. Click the Next button to continue.
4. In the Specify another control point group you can:
l
Either enter the name of the new point (Point) or select the known point from the map
or from the list
l
l
l
.
Type in the height of the reflector (HR)
The Measure FS Direct displays the values of horizontal angle (HA), vertical angle (VA)
and slope distance (SD).
Take the TS measurements. More...
Note: If you have entered a new point, the software prompts you to enter the point coordinates in the
Add Points dialog before starting of measurement.
5. In the Measuring GPS for ... you see the point coordinates in WGS-84 are measured by the GPS
receiver for localization. In this group you can:
l
Change the point name or select the point either from the map
l
Click
or from the list
.
to perform the measurement with the precise settings and store the point either
automatically or manually.
or
l
Click
the point.
375
to perform the measurement with the quick settings and to automatically store
6. After saving second known point (and subsequent point ) the Results screen displays measured
value of angles and slope distances with estimate of accuracy. In this screen you can:
l Click Add to continue measure an other control point.
l Click Remove to delete any selected measurement.
l Click Re-Meas to repeat the measurement to the previous point.
l Click Accept to calculate (or recalculate, when you add a measurement to next control
points) the occupation point coordinates in the current Ground coordinate system and finish the resection procedure. Clicking on the button opens the Store Point dialog, where
the occupation point coordinates are displayed. Click
to perform the localization
between Ground and WGS-84 coordinate system. If the factual residuals for the known
point less than internal threshold values, the localization will be created. After that:
l In the Projection field Localization is set automatically.
l Next measured pair of points is not automatically added to localization. The localization parameters are not updated.
l Next measured pair of points is used in recalculation of the occupation point
coordinates.
Note: When the Localization is selected as the current projection of the job, you can use
unknown point(s) for resection task in the Hybrid Positioning mode.
You can see the pairs point are used for localization in the Localization Result dialog and
you can manually add or delete any pairs point.
D. The coordinates of the control points (two points at least) in the Ground coordinate system imported
in the job. The desired Grid projection is defined in the job. For each control point TS and GPS measurements are provided. The software automatically performs the localization between Grid and
Ground. The coordinates of the Occupation Point are calculated in the Grid and Ground coordinate systems.
1. Import the set of points with coordinates in Ground coordinate system to the job. Then select the
desired Grid projection.
2. Perform the steps 2-6 in the previous scenario.
3. Next measured pair of points is used in recalculation of the occupation point coordinates.
Results Screen
The screen contains the data collected during the measurements.
376
The columns are:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Point: the name of the point
Res HA: Difference of each HA measurement within the set from the average of all the HA's in the set
Res VA: Difference of each VA measurement within the set from the average of all the VA's in the set
Res SD: Difference of each SD measurement within the set from the average of all the SD's in the set
H, V, SD: Check marks indicate that the Horizontal angle, Vertical angle and the Slope Distance were
used in resection.
HR: The height of reflector
HA: Horizontal Angle measurement within the corresponding set
VA: Vertical Angle measurement within the corresponding set
SD: Slope Distance measurement within the corresponding set
Set: The number and type of measurement within the corresponding set
If there is sufficient data to compute the resection, the results of resection are displayed: standard deviations for
coordinates and calculated scale factor.
The buttons serve the following purposes:
l
l
l
l
Add: to continue measure an other control point.
Re-Meas: to repeat the measurement to the previous point
Remove: to delete any selected measurement.
Accept: to calculate (or recalculate, when you add a measurement from the given TS occupation point to
the next control points) the occupation point coordinates and finish the resection procedure.
Pop-up menu
Additional options which can be useful are as follows:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
377
Setup: PTL Mode, Grid Lines
Edit Points: opens the Points list to edit points.
Inverse: opens the Two-Point Inverse COGO dialog.
Options: opens the Resection Options dialog.
Add Raw Note: opens the Add Raw Note dialog to enter text of a field note.
Show Quick Codes: when selected, shows codes on the Map and allows you to take measurements with
these codes in Quick mode in Topo survey and to log now in Auto Topo survey by clicking the code.
Edit Quick Codes: opens the Code Options dialog to define quick codes.
Resection Options
The Resection Options dialog lets you select the resection type and method and the input parameters.
1. From Resection Type, select 2D to use only horizontal coordinates or 3D to use heights as well.
2. From Resection Method define the required method, by selecting one of the following options from
the drop-down list:
l 2D+H to perform separate adjustment into horizontal plane and vertical plane.
l 3D to perform combined adjustment into horizontal and vertical planes.
3. If required, clear the Use Default Measurement Accuracy check box to change the system default
values for measurement accuracy:
l In Distance, error in the distance measurement.
l In PPM, part per million error in the distance measurement.
l In Horz Angle, error in the horizontal angle measurement.
l In Vert Angle, error in the vertical angle measurement.
l To apply the calculated scale factor value for the TS occupation point, select the Use Calculated
scale factor check box.
Benchmark
The method of elevation allows you to determine the vertical location of an occupied point by resection from
two (or more) known vertical locations.
Set the occupied point:
1. In Occupy, enter the name of the point for which the elevation will be computed. You can set the point
in one of the following ways:
l Type in the name of the point.
l
Choose the point from the map
.
l
Choose the point from the list of the job points. To do this, click
and select From List
from the pop-up menu.
l
Determine an arbitrary point near an alignment. Click
and select Station and Offsetfrom
the pop-up menu.
378
2. Enter the height of the instrument (HI) and the height of the reflector
3. Click Next to proceed on the Known Elevation dialog.
in the current units.
Known Elevation (Multiple)
Take the measurements to known vertical locations on the Measurement tab:
1. Enter the known vertical location in one of the following ways: click the button to choose either Point or
Elevation.
l
You can select the known Point either from the map
or from the list
. The Code field
will display the code information on the selected point.
l Enter the value of the known Elevation.
2. Enter the height of the target. The field saves the entry from the Elevation dialog.
3. Take measurements. More...
The Set tab displays the result of the sideshots being done during one set. Use the buttons for the following purposes:
l
l
l
Remove: to delete the highlighted measurement from the set.
Re-Meas: to replace the current measurement with a new measurement.
Accept: to store the new coordinates in the database.
Reference Line Setup
The option allows you to calculate or recalculate the coordinate of the occupation point using a reference line
with the known start and end points.
Set the occupation point:
1. In Point, enter the name of the point where the instrument is set up. It can be either a new occupation name
or a known point to recalculate. You can enter the point in one of the following ways:
l Type in the name of the point.
l
379
Choose the point from the map
.
l
Choose the point from the list
of the job points.
2. Enter the height of the instrument (HI) in the current units.
3. Click Next to select a first design point. More...
Reference Line Point
Select a start point for setting the reference line:
or from the list
.
1. Select the Point by typing its name, selecting it from the map
2. Optionally, enter the offset values from the point in horizontal and vertical planes:
l As required, set either Right or Left offset relative to the occupation point in the line direction.
l Set the value of the vertical offset: select the type from Up/Down/Elevation.
3. The plot below will schematically show your selections.
4. Click Next to take measurements. More...
5. After saved the start point of the line (or the offset point) automatically the Reference Line Setup dialog
is opened. Select the end point of the reference line (and offset from the point, if required) and click
Next to take measurement. More...
Point Measurements
Setup the target point and sight to it:
1. Enter the height of the target HR.
to take measurements. More...
2. Click
3. Observe the results of calculation after saving the measurement to the end point. More...
Reference Line Results
The dialog shows the setup information graphically. The instrument location is solved based on the measurements, the azimuth between the two points, and the hold location.
380
1. Observe the reference error.
2. Select which point should be held:
l Hold Right to hold the first point
l Hold Left to hold the second point
l Hold Center to hold the midpoint
3. Click Accept to store the new coordinates in the database.
4. Click Back to return to the previous dialog.
Remote Control
From the Remote Control dialog, you can control the total station through the radio. It shows the current values of
the total station measurements and provides a set of tools for the control. If the instrument chosen is robotic, all the
observation dialogs have such tools to provide remote control.
Click the icon
to toggle between the status bar and the tool bar.
The status bar includes the following icons:
Shows the power level of the instrument.
Shows the status of connection with the instrument.
Shows the prism constant for measurements with the reflector.
Indicates reflectorless measurements.
Shows the power and memory level in the controller.
The tool bar includes icons of control commands. Click the icon to execute a required command:
381
Qlock
Cause the Total Station to search for an RC device. RC is the Remote Control System
for optical communications. For instructions on how to operate the RC devices, consult the instruction manual for the corresponding RC.
Turn
Opens the Rotate dialog which allows the Total station to turn to various angles or
points.
Control arrows
Allows turning the total station on devices without arrow keys. Each button corresponds to a direction to turn, the button in the center can be used to stop turning.
Search
Makes the instrument search for the prism.
Lock
Locks onto the prism or tracks it.
Stop
Makes the total station stop tracking the prism and go into a "Standby" mode. The
Data Indicator above the Qlock button shows the current state of the Total Station.
There are four types: no data, querying status, turning, and receiving data.
Rotate
You can rotate the remote total station by angles or to a point:
l
By Rotation Angles:
1. The Hz and Vert fields display the current angles. Enter the values of the horizontal and vertical angles
to turn. Optionally you can click to add or subtract 90 or 180 degrees to/from shown values.
2. Click Turn to send the data to the total station. The corresponding icon shows the rotation process.
l
Rotate to Point
1. Select a point by typing its name, selecting it from the map
2. Enter the HR value (the height of the reflector).
3. Click the Turn button.
or from the list
.
382
l
Click Plunge TS to perform "Plunge" or "Flip" (rotate the telescope and the body by 180 degrees).
l
The icon
lets you turn the total station on devices without arrow keys. Each button corresponds to
a direction to turn, the button in the center can be used to stop turning.
383
Survey folder
Survey types depend upon the current job configuration.
Follow a link to learn more:
Survey GPS
Survey Optical (Total Station)
Survey GPS
Click an icon to start the desired survey:
Topo
Conducts a survey with GPS static points and determine inaccessible points by setting
offsets from measured points: Offset Line, Azimuth & Offsets and Offset Laser.
Find out more on Offsets.
Auto Topo
Conducts a survey with GPS dynamic points.
X-Section
Performs a survey of a road cross-section.
Find Station
Identifies the station by the distance, computed to the station, and the offset from the
road.
Tape Dimension
Calculates the periphery of structures using tape measurements, relative to the two
known points that belong to one side of the structure.
Surface
Creates or appends to a real-time Surface surface.
384
Topo
The Topo dialog enables you to conduct a stationary survey and can run in two views: Normal and Map.
Click
to open the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Topo Normal View
To perform measurements:
1. Enter the name of the Point to be logged.
2. Enter code and attribute information for the point.
l You can select a Code from the drop-down list. Code needs to be defined at the time it is entered if it
is not a code that exists in the Codes dialog
l If the code type is Line or Area, an icon will display that the point belongs to a line or area. Set a
string and, if required, a control code.
l Press the Code button to enter information on the Point Attributes. More... You can set two control
codes, and attribute values for the code.
3. Enter the Antenna Height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click the
button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The menu retains your settings. You can edit the antenna
type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog.
4. Observe Status information about the equipment you use in the job.
5. Start the measurement process according to your preference:
l
Click
to perform the measurement with the precise settings and store the point either auto-
matically or manually. The point is automatically saved, if it meets the criteria for storing the point as
specified in Topo Settings. In manual mode, after pressing the button, two new buttons appear along
with the count of the epochs achieved. Click
urement.
385
to save and
to cancel the meas-
l
Click
to perform the measurement with the quick settings and to automatically store the
point.
l
Click
to open a file for data logging in surveys with post processing. More... For the
user-defined file name, enter the file name at the logging start. More... Click
to stop data
logging into a file.
6. The display of the current coordinates depends on the selected coordinate system
7. If required, click
to view or change the precise and quick settings for Topo survey. More...
File or Session Name Check
This dialog requests you to select whether to Overwrite, Rename, or Just Append to an already existing file
or session.
Map View
The Map View shows the stored points graphically. All the survey process can be done through this view as
well. It contains the information similar to the Normal View.
Click on any data field to select the value to be displayed. More...
Select Value to display
Select the required item from the list and click
to display it's value during the survey.
386
Beacon Status
The Beacon Status dialog displays settings for a radio beacon source for differential GPS corrections:
l
l
The Station that provides broadcasting differential corrections for the rover.
In Status, the Version of the Beacon Board in the receiver, the Beacon frequency and Signal/Noise ratio of
the received signal are shown.
Laser BS Meas
To set the laser device with an encoder for backsight measurements:
or the list of the job points
.
1. Enter the Occupation Point manually or select it from the map
2. Select between BS Azimuth and BS Point to enter either the backsight azimuth value or point.
3. Follow the instructions in a message which guides you on what to do and displays the measurement values.
Auto Topo
The Auto Topo dialog enables you to initiate a dynamic survey and can run in two views: Normal and Map.
Click
to open the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Auto Topo Normal View
To perform measurements:
387
1. Enter the name of the Point to be logged.
2. Enter code and attribute information for the point.
l You can select a Code from the drop-down list. Code needs to be defined at the time it is
entered if it is not a code that exists in the Codes dialog
l If the code type is Line or Area, an icon will display that the point belongs to a line or area. Set a
string and, if required, a control code.
l Press the Code button to enter information on the Point Attributes. More... You can set two control codes, and attribute values for the code.
3. Enter the Antenna Height and set the type of height measurement (vertical or slant). To do this, click
the button and select Edit from the drop-down menu. The menu retains your settings. You can edit the
antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog.
4. Observe Status information about the equipment you use in the job.
5. The buttons serve the following purposes:
l
to start logging points automatically with the interval specified in Settings.
l
to stop logging.
l
to interrupt the survey (active when logging).
l
to continue surveying.
l
to immediately store the current receiver position (log now).
l
to open a file for raw data logging in surveys with post processing. More... For the userdefined file name, enter the file name at the logging start. More...
l
to stop raw data logging into a file.
l
to view or change the settings for Auto Topo survey. More...
388
Map View
Map View shows the stored points graphically. All the survey process can be done through this view as well. It
contains the information similar to the Auto Topo dialog in Normal View.
Click on any data field to select the value to be displayed. More...
Survey Cross Section
To perform the survey of the cross section:
1. Select between Road, H Alnt and None as required.
.
2. Enter the name of the Road / Horizontal alignment manually or select it from the list
3. When no alignment is selected (None), enter the Centerline Code from the drop-down list. Click the Code
button to set attributes. More...
The centerline code must be a valid line code to apply to the surveyed points for creating the alignment.
If the road has not been set, define the plane. On the first station, the survey is performed so that every next
point has a different code, for example A, B, C, cl, D, E, F. Press
to automatically change the sta-
tion number. The application suggests that the survey on the next station uses the same codes in the opposite order: F, E, D, cl, C, B, A. The line is created along the points with the cl code.
4. Set the Station where the cross section is surveyed.
5. Enter the Interval of distance towards the next station.
6. Select the Use Transition Points check box to include transition points, in spite of the station distance.
7. Click
to start measurements.
X-Section
The points are surveyed similar to the measurements in the Topo dialog. More...
389
Find Station
To identify the station by computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the projection of the station to the road, and the offset of the station from the centerline of the road:
1. Enter the name of the Road, Horizontal Alignment or Horizontal and Vertical Alignments or select
it from the list.
2. Enter the name of the Point for which to find station. You can select a known point from the map or
the list or measure the current point and store it after taking a measurement.
3. Select the Code and attributes of the Point. Code can be entered manually or chosen from the dropdown list.
4. Enter the Antenna Height above the mark. Also the measurement type for the height needs to be specified: Slant or Vertical.
5. Click
to compute the station and offsets of the selected known point.
6. Click
or
to compute and display the station and offsets to the current measured point in
results. For details on description of the buttons, see Topo Measurement.
Results
This dialog shows the results of the computations for the Find Station, the Station (chainage), and Offset of
the point.
Map
The Map tab shows the results in a graphic mode.
390
Tape Dimension
The Tape Dimension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of structures, such as buildings, that have features perpendicular to each other. This is done using tape measurements, relative to the two known points that
belong to one side of the structure (wall of the building), forming the reference line.
Reference Line
1. Define the reference line:
l Enter the Start Point of the line: the name (can be entered manually, or chosen from the map
or the list of the job points
) and Code. Also, the point can be measured by pressing
.
Enter the End Point of the line in the same way.
2. Open the Tape Dimention tab.
l
Tape Dimension
To survey the points in the polygon:
1. Enter the name of the next Point in the survey.
2. From the drop-down menu, select the Code for the point being measured. Click
to set the point's
attributes if required. More...
3. Toggle between Dist Left and Dist Right values as required. These set the direction of the next movement,
relative to the previous direction. Enter the distance to move in the field below.
4. Click Accept to apply the entered distance to the perimeter line.
5. Click Finish and select from the floating menu an option you want:
l
l
391
Close Polygon: to connect the first and the last two points with a line.
Calc Closure: to calculate the difference between the last and the first points.
Data
The Data tab shows the initial data and current results of the measurements.
Surface
To perform survey and create or append to a real-time Surface surface:
1. Enter surface information. More...
2. Perform surface survey. More...
Volume Input
To input surface information:
1. From the drop-down button select either New to create a new Surface or Append To if you want to
add the volume calculations to an existing Surface. Click
to give a name and locate the new
Surface or choose an existing Surface from the list. An information message will display the maximum and minimum Northing and Easting values for the area covered by the Surface.
2. From another drop-down button select the surface to which their volumes will be computed:
l Boundary: the volume calculation is performed from the Surface to a Surface created from all
the points which define the boundary.
l Min Elevation: the volume calculation is performed from the Surface to a flat plane created at
the minimum elevation of the Surface.
l Max Elevation: the volume calculation is performed from the Surface to a flat plane created at
the maximum elevation of the Surface.
l Fixed Elevation: the volume calculation is performed from the Surface to a flat plane created at
the user entered elevation. Either manually enter the fixed elevation in the edit field or press the
Map or the List selection button to select a point in the job whose elevation will be used as the
fixed elevation. The edit field will display the elevation of the selected point.
l Plane: the volume calculation is performed from the Surface to a flat plane created through the
three points. Either manually enter the names of the three points in the edit fields or use the associated Map and List selection buttons to select these points from the job.
392
l
l
Design Surface: the volume calculation will be performed from the Surface to the user-entered Surface. Either manually enter the name of the second Surface or press the List selection button and
choose the Surface from the list. The plots will display both of the Surface.
No Volume Calc: there will not be any volume computation performed.
3. If required, select the Use Alignment check box to enter a road name or select a road from a list
to
view the current station and center line offset on the map.
4. Click Next to perform survey. More...
Surface Topo
Perform the survey in the usual way described in regular Topo survey.
If in Volume Input you select the Use Alnt check box and enter a valid road, you can view the current station
and center line offset, on the map and video tabs, by selecting those labels from the value selection display.
Select Volume Report from the
pop-up menu to view the stockpile/pit volume report while you are per-
forming survey.
Map
As you add points to your Surface the map view will display the Surface in the background and update it dynamically when a point is saved.
In Map properties you can clear the Surface Surface check box not to display the current Surface.
Surface Topo Volume Report
The volume report allows you to view the stockpile/pit volume report while you are performing survey.
l
393
The stockpile is the volume of the Surface which sits above the plane created by the boundary of the Surface.
l
The pit is the volume of the Surface which sits below the plane created by the boundary of the Surface.
If required, click
to save the volume report to a file.
Configure Radio
This dialog contains the settings for the radio modem. The Type field tells us what the selected radio type is
(it is got from the Config->Survey)
The rest of the controls on this dialog depend on the type of radio that was selected.
PTL Mode
The Point-To-Line mode (PTL) is a method of interpretation of the point coordinates. The coordinates are
defined through the two reference points. The line trace through these points is set as one axis and its perpendicular as another.
1. In Start Ref Point and End Ref Point, enter the names of the reference points. Select these points
from the map
or select from the list of points
.
2. Select the PTL Mode On check box to enable the PTL mode.
Grid Setup
The Grid Setup dialog allows the setup of a grid to be displayed with the Map to help you while collecting
points.
1. Select the Display Grid box to display a grid in the Map tab with the settings that follow.
2. Specify the Origin Point for the grid. Select these points from the map
points
or select from the list of
.
3. Select either Azimuth(Bearing) or Azimuth(Bearing) to Point by clicking on the button to indicate
the direction of the lines and enter the corresponding value.
4. In the Spacing field, specify the intervals along y (North) and x (East) axes for the grid lines.
394
mmGPS+ Options
The mmGPS+ Options dialog allows modification of various mmGPS+ functions:
l
l
l
The current status of the receiver's mmGPS+ engine is displayed as ON, OFF or DISABLED. You can
change the status by using the combo box to turn the mmGPS+ engine ON or OFF.
You can Use weighted height computations: The mmGPS+ height can be computed using weights for
the laser and GPS data. When this box is checked, a greater weight is applied to the laser measurement
when the rover is closer to the transmitter or to the GPS measurement when the rover is further away.
In Height Difference Limit, set a limit for the difference between GPS and mmGPS+ height measurements. The mmGPS+ icon will change if the difference is over this limit.
Add Raw Note
Enter a Raw Note Text to give a description during the survey if required.
This note is shown in Raw Data.
When creating a file from the job data, the note will be also saved in this file.
Last Point Data
The dialog contains the information about the last point that has been logged since this dialog was opened. Click
to save the data to a txt file if required.
Survey Optical (Total Station)
Click an icon to start the desired survey:
Topo
Conducts a survey with sideshot points, and determine inaccessible points by setting Offsets from measured points. Find out more on Offsets.
395
Auto Topo
Collects points by Time and Distance only with Robotic instruments.
X-Section
Obtains the coordinates of points that lie on a plane perpendicular to a road center line.
This type of survey is typically performed by moving from one side of a road to the other
in the cross-sectional plane, and then crossing back in the opposite direction at a different
location along the road.
Find Station
Identifies the station by the distance, computed to the station, and the offset from the road.
Tape Dimension
Calculates the periphery of structures using tape measurements, relative to the two known
points that belong to one side of the structure.
Surface
Creates or appends to a real-time Surface surface.
Missing Line
Emulates the total station measurement from one point to another and stores the result to
the Raw Data database.
Set Collection
Collects points with the sideshot measurement method of Angle-Dist Sets-Dir/Rev.
Scanning
Collects points by scanning (with or without images) with Robotic and motorized reflectorless instruments.
Monitor
Measures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the measurements to detect changes in
the position of the prisms. The measurements are recorded into the raw data file.
Topo Survey
The optical topo survey can be conducted as collection of:
396
l
l
Sideshot points
Traverse points
Shots to targets can be taken in one of two modes:
l
l
Sideshot-Direct
Sideshot-Direct/Reverse
Data collection is available in Normal (dialog) View and Map View.
On any survey dialog you can:
l
Click
to change the sideshot mode, if required. More...
l
Click the EDM button to select the distance measurement mode as required.
l
Click the icon
provided a robotic total station is used to toggle between the status bar and the tool
bar for remote control of the instrument. More...
l
Click the icon
to open the pop-up menu of additional options. More...
Pop-up menu
The pop-up menu includes additional options which can be useful during the survey. The menu content depends
on the job configuration. The items with small arrows have submenus. Clicking on such a menu item opens a subset of items.
l
l
l
397
View - click and select either type of display of the survey progress:
Normal
Map view on the map
Measure - click and select:
Sideshot - to measure separate points.
Traverse - to measure traverse points.
Offset type for measurements. More...
Setup - click to expand the menu:
Backsight
PTL Mode
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Display Coords - select to display coordinates of the point in the Normal View when measured.
Grid Lines
Robotic - click to expand the menu:
Remote Settings
Tilt
Image: Mirror Image, Record Wide Image, Record Tele Image (telescope view with the crosshair),
Image as SXGA (standard of resolution).
Edit Points
Inverse
Quick Codes - click to expand the menu:
Show Quick Codes - select to show code boxes on the Map to take measurements with these codes in
Quick mode in Topo survey and to log now in Auto Topo survey by clicking the code.
Edit Quick Codes - opens the Code Options dialog to define quick codes.
Chats - click and select Create New to start a new chat.
Raw Data - click to expand the menu:
Add Raw Note
View Last Point
Edit
Sideshot-Direct
The Sideshot-Direct dialog contains the initial data for single sideshots and displays the information during
survey. The measurement to a single point is taken using the Direct positionof the Total Station.
To perform surveying:
1. Enter the name of the current Point. During the survey the numerical part of the name changes automatically by one.
2. Set Code and attribute information for the point. Code needs to be defined at the time it is entered if it
is not a code that exists in the Codes dialog
l You can enter a Code manually or select from the drop-down list.
l If the code type is Line or Area, an icon will display that the point belongs to a line. Set a string
and, if required, a control code.
l Press the Code button to view information on the Point Attributes. More... You can set two control codes, and attribute values for the code.
3. Enter the height of the reflector (HR).
4. Take measurements. More...
398
Sideshot-Direct/Reverse
The measurement to a single point is taken using the Direct Position and the Reverse Position of the Total Station
(i.e., Plunge - Flip and Rotate the Total station by 180 degrees to get the reverse measurement). One set consists
of one direct and one reverse measurement. These measurements are used to eliminate the Vertical circle centering errors.
This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot-Direct dialog except that one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single one.
Traverse
If you select Traverse survey, the occupation point will automatically change to the previous foresight point and
the backsight point will automatically change to the previous occupation point.The Backsight dialog will automatically update for the next occupation point.
Offsets
Switch to an appropriate offset task to determine inaccessible points by setting offsets from measured points as
required:
Horizontal Angle Offset
Determines a point using the horizontal angle from one point and the distance to another.
Horz-Vert Angle Offset
Determines a point using the horizontal and vertical angles.
Distance Offset
Determines a point giving you the ability to add or subtract distances, horizontally and vertically.
Hidden Point
Determines a point on the ground surface with a slanted rod touching the ground point.
Two Line Intersection
Determines a point by the intersection of the two lines. Each line is defined by two points or two measurements.
399
Line and Corner
Determines a point on the corner using one line defined by two points and a horizontal angle measurement.
Line and Offset
Determines a point that is in a distance from a line defined by two points.
Plane and Corner
Determines a point (Corner) by a plane defined by three points and horizontal and vertical angle measurements.
Survey Cross Section
To perform the survey of the cross section:
1. Select between Road, H Alnt and None as required.
.
2. Enter the name of the Road / Horizontal alignment manually or select it from the list
3. When no alignment is selected (None), enter the Centerline Code from the drop-down list. Click the
Code button to set attributes. More...
The centerline code must be a valid line code to apply to the surveyed points for creating the alignment.
If the road has not been set, define the plane. On the first station, the survey is performed so that every
next point has a different code, for example A, B, C, cl, D, E, F. Press
to automatically change
the station number. The application suggests that the survey on the next station uses the same codes in
the opposite order: F, E, D, cl, C, B, A. The line is created along the points with the cl code.
4. Set the Station where the cross section is surveyed.
5. Enter the Interval of distance towards the next station.
6. Select the Use Horizontal Transition Points check box to include transition points, in spite of the sta-
400
tion distance.
7. Click
to perform measurements of sideshots in Direct or Direct/Reverse mode.
XSect-Direct
The points are surveyed similar to the Observations from the Sideshot-Direct Dialog.
XSect-Direct/Reverse
The points are surveyed similar to the Observations from the Sideshot-Direct/Reverse Dialog.
Find Station
The Measurement tab of the Find Station dialog is used for the identification of the station by computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the projection of the station to the road, and the offset of the station from
the center line of the road.
1. Enter the name of the Road / Horizontal or Horizontal and Vertical alignment manually or select it from the
list
.
2. The name of the point to Find Station to store after taking a measurement.
3. The code and attributes of the Point. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop-down list.
4. The field
retains the value of the reflector height for the backsight point. You can edit this value if
required.
to compute the offsets of a known or measured point.
5. Click
6. Take measurements to an unknown point.
401
l
Click
to take a shot to the point, compute and display the offsets. Or...
l
Click
to take a shot to the point, store it, compute and display the offsets in the Results tab.
Results
This dialog shows the results of the computations for the Find Station, the Station (chainage) and Offset of
the point.
Map
The Map tab shows the results of the Find Station in a graphic mode.
Tape Dimension
The Tape Dimension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of structures, such as buildings, that have
features perpendicular to each other. This is done using tape measurements, relative to two known points that
belong to one side of the structure (wall of the building), forming the reference line.
Set the reference line in the Ref Line tab.
Perform measurements in the Tape Dim tab.
Reference Line
In the Reference Line tab, set two points to define the reference line:
1. In Start Point field enter the name and code for an existing point to start the line (can be entered manu-
ally, or chosen from the map or list). Or click
to measure and save the point.
402
2. In End Point field enter the name and code for an existing point to end the line (can be entered manually,
or chosen from the map or list). Or click
to measure and save the point.
Tape Dimension
To survey the points in the polygon with the reference line shown in the plot:
1. Enter the name of the next Point in the survey.
2. From the drop-down menu, select the Code for the point being measured. Click
to set the point's
attributes if required. More...
3. Toggle between Dist Left and Dist Right values as required. These set the direction of the next movement,
relative to the previous direction. Enter the distance to move in the field below.
4. Click Accept to apply the entered distance to the perimeter line.
5. Click Finish and select from the floating menu an option you want:
l
l
Close Polygon: to connect the first and the last two points with a line.
Calc Closure: to calculate the difference between the last and the first points.
Map
The Map tab shows the results of the Tape Dimension in a graphic mode.
Data
The Data tab shows the initial data and current results of the measurements.
Surface
To perform survey and create or append to a real-time Surface surface:
403
1. Enter surface information. More...
2. Perform surface survey. More...
If in Volume Input you select the Use Alnt check box and enter a valid road, you can view the current station and center line offset, on the map and video tabs, by selecting those labels from the value
selection display.
Select Volume Report from the
pop-up menu to view the stockpile/pit volume report while
you are performing survey.
Missing Line
The Missing Line dialog emulates the total station measurement from one point to another and stores the result to the Raw Data database.
1. In Start Point field enter the name and code for an existing point to start the line (can be entered manu-
ally, or chosen from the map or list). Or click
to measure and save the point.
2. In End Point field enter the name and code for an existing point to end the line in the same way.
3. Select the Check Measurement check box, then click
if you want to take measurements and
check them before saving.
Data
The Data tab displays the results of the measurements and the differences dHD, dVD, and dSD as they
shown in Raw Data.
Map
The Map tab shows the relative position of the points and the measured line.
404
Set Collection
To conduct a survey with the sideshot measurement method of Angle/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev, follow the Set Collection wizard:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set up the survey. More...
Configure the mode settings. More...
If required, enter observation information. More...
Optionally, define the points to be measured. More...
Perform the measurements. More...
Angle/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev
In this method for the measurement to a single point, the instrument will use the specified Angle sequence to perform repeated measurements. The sequence of four measurements constitutes one set. One measurement is the
backsight in Direct phase or the Foresight in Reverse phase in two positions of the Total Station. These measurements are used to eliminate centering errors in the horizontal and vertical circles.
Setup
Set up the backsight for measurements if this is not done:
1. In the Occupy field, set the occupied Point, where the total station is located, and the height of the instrument HI in the current units. More...
2. In the Backsight field, set the backsight Point or Azimuth and enter the height of the reflector. More...
3. Click Next.
Mode
To configure the mode settings:
1. Select the Angle Sequence of measured angles. There are six possible sequences of measurements where
FS is a foresight point (the next occupation point), BS is a backsight point (the previous occupation point),
405
and Plunge term stands for flipping and rotating the total station telescope by 180 degrees. These are
used for the reduction of the angle errors.
to edit the classes.
2. Select the Class with the appropriate number of sets and tolerances. Click
More...
3. The Set circle to field is only available if Angle Sequence starts with BS and displays the horizontal
circle reading corresponding to the backsight point. The icon next to the BS Circle field brings up the
floating menu that enables you to set the BS Circle value to zero or azimuth, to input a value or to get
from the instrument, or to change the value by +/- 90 or 180 degrees. The software retains the previous
setting for this drop-down list.
4. The Set circle at start of each set option is selected to enable setting the horizontal circle reading corresponding to the backsight point at start of each set of angle measurements.
5. If the Auto accept measurement option is selected, when the total station turns to the prism, it will
automatically take a measurement, then turn to the next point in the sequence. If it is not selected, once
the total station turns to the prism, you will be prompted to accept the measurement, then turn to the
next point in the sequence.
6. If required, select the Auto aim and turn check box to automatically advance to the next set in the survey. If this option is selected, when each set is complete, the total station will automatically advance to
the next set and continue the operation. If it is not selected, when a set is complete, the user will be
prompted to advance to the next set.
7. Select the Prompt for observation info check box to enter information about observation conditions.
More...
8. Select the Prompt for predefined points check box to define the points to be measured. More...
9. Click Next.
Temp/Press
In this dialog, enter information needed for a report and click Next. PPM is automatically calculated.
Predefined Points
This dialog contains the list of points you can define before the first Angle Set measure.
1. In the Point field, enter the name of the point.
2. Enter Code and attribute information for the point.
406
You can select a code from the drop-down list. Code needs to be defined at the time it is entered if it
is not a code that exists in the Codes dialog
l If the code type is Line or Area, an icon will display that the point belongs to a line. Set a string and,
if required, a control code.
l Press the Code button to view information on the Point Attributes. More... You can set two control
codes, and attribute values for the code.
l Enter any additional information about the point in the Note field.
3. Click Add to add the point to the list.
4. If required to remove a point from the list, click Remove.
5. After the list is completed, click Next.
l
Set Collection
This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot-Direct dialog except that one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single one.
The Set tab contains the data collected during the measurements, grouped by sets (one set for Multiple mode contains two measurements; one set of the Repeat mode contains four measurements). More...
TS Manual Entry
This dialog allows you to enter observation data manually. They can be:
l
l
l
l
l
HA, the horizontal angle measurement.
V, the vertical angle measurement.
SD, the slope distance measurement (3D).
HD, the horizontal distance measurement (2D).
VD, the vertical distance measurement (1D).
Auto Topo
This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and allows you to collect points by Time or Distance
according to your preference to conduct the survey.
407
1. The Point field displays the current point name. You can change it.
2. From the drop-down menu, select the Code for the point being measured. Click
to set the
point&#39;s attributes if required. More...
3. Enter the HR (the height of the reflector).
4. Click
to start the survey process. After pressing, the button changes to
to stop the pro-
cess.
5. Click
to immediately store the current position.
For a description of other buttons, refer to Remote Control.
Monitor Pointlist
The Monitor function measures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the measurements to detect changes
in the position of the prisms. The measurements are recorded into the raw data file. Optionally, the raw measurements or the computed points can be outputted to a file or communication port in either the FC-6 or GTS7 formats. The output format and destination is accessed from the Monitor Options dialog when configuring
the total station.
The Monitor Point List dialog allows you to monitor points from a predefined point list.
1. Select the predefined Point List. It can be chosen from the list of Point Lists
or entered manu-
ally.
2. The list of currently selected points will display. Set the desired sequence of points.
408
l
The Up
and Down
arrows allows you to move the highlighted point up or down in
the order of the points.
l
The arrows symbol
switches on/off the keyboard arrow keys that duplicate the arrows on the
dialog.
l
The
symbol can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list.
field, enter the height of the reflector.
3. In
4. Click Next to initiate monitoring. More...
Monitor
To control the monitor survey:
1. The name of the Point to be measured displays.
2. Set the interval listed as the Cycle Time. If a prism cannot be found after a period of 15 seconds, the total
station will rotate to the next point in the sequence.
3. If Auto is set to ON, the total station automatically rotates to the next point in the sequence and records a
measurement. If it is set to OFF, the total station rotates to the point, but allows you to verify or correct the
centering to the prism prior to taking a measurement. The monitor function will always complete the entire
sequence, even if the measurements take longer than the cycle time.
to initiate the sequence of measurements, which repeats at the desired interval.
4. Click 5. The Data tab lists the differences between the coordinates of the reference point and the measured point.
409
Scanning
Click an icon to start the scanning task:
Grid Scan
This method allows you to scan in Robotic job configuration both with and without
image.
Feature Scan
This method involves two independent scanning procedures: scanning with a specific
interval within a defined area (Grid Scan) and scanning of the automatically extracted
features on an image specific area.
Panorama
Using this option you can take an image or set of images and create scan area.
View
You can see the scanning points of the selected scan project.
Image Scan
Calculates the transformation parameters from image coordinate system to the current
coordinate system using at least four control points on the image and after that performs grid scan on one.
Grid Scan
This method allows you to scan in Robotic job configuration both with and without image. A Robot Total
Station will obtain point cloud data by automatic scanning with a specific interval within a defined area. Scanning is accomplished with the help of a Wizard.
After clicking the icon, the Area Name Setting dialog is opened.
410
Feature Scan
This method involves two independent scanning procedures: scanning with a specific interval within a defined
area (Grid Scan) and scanning of the automatically extracted features on an image specific area. Also you can
manually add/remove point(s) to/from scan. Scanning is accomplished with the help of a Wizard.
After clicking the icon, the Area Name Setting dialog is opened.
Panorama
Using this option you can take an image or set of images and create scan area. After saving it, you can open this
image for Grid Scan or Feature Scan project. Panorama creating is accomplished with the help of a Wizard.
After clicking the icon, the Area Name Setting dialog is opened.
View
You can see the scanning points of the selected scan project. After clicking the icon, the 2D Data Select dialog is
opened.
Image Scan
Calculates the transformation parameter from image coordinate system to the current coordinate system using at
least four control points on the image; and after that performs grid scan on one. The coordinates of all scanned
points and orientation points will be displayed on the Edit->Points. To see the coordinates of the scanned points,
select the "Show Scan Points" option from the pop-up menu, which can be opened by clicking
in the top
left corner. To see the scanned points on the Map , select the "Scanned" check box at the General tab of the Map
Properties dialog.
After clicking the icon, the Scanning dialog is opened.
411
Area Name Setting
The dialog is available for Grid Scan and Feature Scan. In the dialog you can:
1. Enter the Name of the sub-folder, where the scan data will be saved. This sub folder will be created in
the in Jobs/ <current job name>/FIELD_SCAN folder.
2. In the Area Type list, you can select the way to define the border of scanning:
l Square - you can specify two (top left and bottom right) corners on the area. The software creates a rectangle using the selections, where the scanning will be performed.
l Polygonal - you can specify a few (more than two) points as vertexes of a polygon. The the scanning will be performed inside the created polygon.
l All around - you can specify two points to define the height of the panorama with a 360° views
in the horizontal plane. The scanning will be performed inside the created cylinder.
l 1 line - you can specify two points to define the width of the panorama with a 360° views in the
vertical plane. The scanning will be performed inside the created cylinder.
l Specifies plane - you can specify three points on the area. The software creates a parallelogram
using the points, where the scanning will be performed. In this mode you can work without
prism ("NP" button) / with prism ("P" button) / using Non-Prism Long (about 200 - 300 meters
away) mode ("LNP" button) to measure a boundary point of the scanning area.
3. If you select the With Image check box, the Robot will calculate how may photo images need to shut
inside the selected area and take the photo(s). The Panorama screen will display the image.
4. Click Next to set the scan area parameters.
Scan Area Setting
In this menu you can define the scan area. Click a tool icon to execute the command:
Zoom In
Zooms the picture inwards.
Zoom Out
Zooms the picture outwards.
Contrast Increase
Click the icon to increase contrast of the image.
412
Contrast Decrease
Click the icon to decrease contrast of the image.
Top Left Corner
The icon is displayed, when the Square is selected in the Area Type. Click the icon
after selection the top left corner of the rectangle.
Bottom Right Corner
The icon is displayed, when the Square is selected in the Area Type. Click the icon
after selection the bottom right corner of the rectangle.
Add Point to Polygon
The icon is displayed, when the Polygonal is selected in the Area Type. Click the
icon to add the selected point to a polygon.
Delete Point from Polygon
The icon is displayed, when the Polygonal is selected in the Area Type. Click the
icon to delete the previous point of the polygon.
Close Polygon
The icon is displayed, when the Polygonal is selected in the Area Type. Click the
icon to automatically closing the polygon when three and more points were selected.
Top Point Horizontal
The icon is displayed, when the All around is selected in the Area Type. Click the
icon to define the top point of the panorama in the horizontal plane.
Bottom Point Horizontal
The icon is displayed, when the All around is selected in the Area Type. Click the
icon to define the bottom point of the panorama in the horizontal plane.
Top Point Vertical
The icon is displayed, when the 1 line is selected in the Area Type. Click the icon to
define the top point of the panorama in the vertical plane.
Bottom Point Vertical
The icon is displayed, when the 1 line is selected in the Area Type. Click the icon to
define the bottom point of the panorama in the vertical plane.
413
Measuring First Point
Meas 1 The icon is displayed, when the Specifies plane is selected in the Area Type. Click
the icon to define the first point of the parallelogram in the horizontal plane.
Measuring Second Point
Meas 2 The icon is displayed, when the Specifies plane is selected in the Area Type. Click
the icon to define the second point of the parallelogram in the horizontal plane.
Measuring Third Point
Meas 3 The icon is displayed, when the Specifies plane is selected in the Area Type. Click
the icon to define the third point of the parallelogram in the horizontal plane.
Click Next to see border of scanning.
Panorama
The dialog displays an image (if the image was shouted) with the border of scanning. Using
and
you can zoom the picture inwards or inwards. Click Next to set grid interval settings.
Grid Interval Settings
The dialog is available for Grid Scan and Feature Scan. In this dialog you can:
1. In the Turn Mode you can control how the instrument turns to the grid points:
l Normal mode requires the instrument to turn to each point and measure it.
l Non-Stop mode allows the instrument to continuously turn and measure at the same time.
For IS/QS/GPT-9 Series only you can select Normal or Non-Stop mode.
For DS-i robotic device the Normal mode is always selected.
2. In the Detail Mode select Coarse or Fine mode for the distance measurement during scanning procedure.
3. For scanning procedure the "NP" is always selected in the NP Mode.
414
4. Select the type of Interval for scanning. You can specify scanning interval using:
l Points - enter the number of scanning points on the horizontal axe (field H) and vertical axe (field
V). After clicking the Calc button, the HA and VA fields display the corresponding horizontal and
vertical angles interval for the given area.
l Angle - enter angles interval for in the HA and VA fields.
l Distance - enter the distance between neighboring points on the horizontal (HD Div) and vertical
(VD Div) axes. Enter the distance from the robot to center of the selected area into the At Distance
field, or click the Meas button to measure the distance value (for this measuring you can work
without prism ("NP" button) / with prism ("P" button) / using Non-Prism Long mode ("LNP" button) ). After clicking the Calc button, the HA and VA fields display the corresponding angles interval for the given area.
5. Click Next to start the scanning.
Grid Scan
The dialog is available for Grid Scan and Feature Scan. The dialog displays the process of scanning of the grid
scan points. To save all measurements and close the current scan session, click Finish.
Feature Point Selection
The dialog is available for Feature Scan. In this dialog you can define feature scan view on the image. This operation can be performed on a panorama image and on an original image that is part of a panorama image (referred
to here as an "area image"). Click a tool icon to execute the command and buttons:
Zoom In
Zooms the picture inwards.
Zoom Out
Zooms the picture outwards.
Panorama Image Display / Area Image Display
Toggles between panorama image display and area image display (part of panorama).
The panorama view displays all created images, the area displays one image from the set.
415
Using the move image buttons (
,
,
,
) you can see any image of
the panorama. These buttons are enabled after selecting the Apply button.
Auto
Automatically extracts feature points on the selected area where the scanning will be performed. Extracted features are indicated in the image in green.
Add
Adds a feature point at the location of the cross-hair ("+") cursor. The button will be
enabled, when "Plot"operation mode is selected. The added point is indicated in the
image in green.
Del
Deletes the currently selected feature points. The selected point is indicated in the image
in blue.
Clear
Clears the displayed area and returns a selected (blue) points to their deselected state
(green).
Apply
Applies the feature points are configured for Panorama Image Display.
OK
Applies the feature points are configured for Area Image Display, and returns to Panorama Image Display.
Cancel
Closes the Feature Scan Setting (Point) dialog and opens the Scan Area Setting dialog,
where you can create a new scan area.
Review
The check box will be displayed, when the Area Image Display mode is activated.
Shows all of the points in that area image.
Slider
Using the slider you can increase or decrease the number of currently displayed features
for Auto -extracted feature points only.
In Mode you can specify the image operation mode:
l
l
Scroll: Moving the stylus across the image display area scrolls the displayed image.
Area: The stylus can be used to create an area. Tap a point on the screen with the stylus and then tap
other points. Tapping the start point location will create area, if you selected three or more points. You
can delete the point(s) which are within of the area by clicking the Delete button. After selection all
points change color from greed to blue. Only blue points can be deleted:
Step 1: Feature Points
Step 2: Creating area
Step 3: Deleting points
416
l
l
Select: Tapping an image selects the point. After selection point change color from greed to blue. You can
delete the selected point(s) by clicking the Delete button.
Plot: This mode is enabled only for area images. The stylus can be used to manually create a point for scanning. Tap any place of the screen (where the scanning will be performed) with the stylus, the blue crosshair ("+") cursor will be set, click the Add button, the added point will have green color.
Feature Scan Settings
The dialog is available for Feature Scan. In this dialog you can configure feature scan settings for EDM mode and
NP mode
1. In the EDM Mode you can select the distance measuring mode. Depending of the robot type you can see
two following sets:
l Fine / Coarse
or
l
Fine/Rapid/Trajectory
You can find the accuracy values for the selected mode in the operators manual for the given robot for the
reflectorless survey.
2. In the NP mode the non-Prism measurements (NP) is always selected.
Feature Scan
The dialog is available for Feature Scan. The dialog displays the process of scanning of the feature points. You
can stop the process by clicking the Pause button and continue the process by clicking the Re-Start button.
417
2D Data Select
In the dialog you can select the scan project to view data in *.gsn (grid scan data) and in *.csn (feature scan
data). If a project does not contain grid or feature scan data, the Project list does not display the project name.
To view the data, click
. The View dialog is opened.
View
The dialog shows the points which were scanned by the robot. The Total Points displays the total scanned
points in the selected file(s). Using the buttons E-N / N-H /E-H, you can rotate the points in the different
planes on the screen. To see the selected files click the Files button. The 2D Data Select dialog will be
opened.
Scanning
In this dialog you can set the scan type for the Image Scan procedure. Scanning is accomplished with the
help of a Wizard.
1. Select a desired Scan Type: either Scan with Image or Scan w/o Image.
2. Click Next. If you selected the scan with image, the Scanning with Image dialog will be opened, if
you selected the scan with out image, the Area dialog will be opened.
Scanning with Image
To configure the settings for a scan session with image:
1. Enter the Session name or select it from the drop-down list.
2. Select a previous Image from the drop-down list, or browse for a new one.
3. Select the Camera information. If the Image exists in the current job, the Camera information will be
selected automatically; otherwise, select a previous Camera or browse for a new one (Cameras are
stored as a text file with the *.cmr extension.)
4. The View button is available after the scan session is completed and shows the image with the scanned
points. More...
418
Image Orientation
In the dialog you can select the orientation points which will be used in the calculation of the relationship between
pixels coordinates of the image and real grid/ground coordinates.
1. Use the corresponding buttons to zoom in (
and to enable/disable a pan mode (
2. When the Pan button is disabled (
/
), zoom out (
), display the whole image (
),
).
), the following instruction is appeared: Tap on Orientation Pt.
You can start to search the orientation point:
l Tap on the image in an area, where the orientation point is located.
l The following instruction is appeared: Select or meas Orient Pt. The image will zoom to this point
and show a cross-hair. You can switch on the keyboard arrow keys (
l
l
) to adjust the position
of the cross-hair. Also you can select Tele (the default zoomed-in view of the cross-hair) or Wide (a
zoomed-out area of the image with all orientation points).
click Meas and select the desired way to get the coordinate of the given orientation point:
l Meas - opens the Sideshot-Direct dialog, where you can measure and save the orientation
point coordinates to the current job.
l From Map - opens the Map, where you can select the corresponding point on the map.
l From List - opens the Points dialog, where you can select the corresponding point from the
list.
The name "ori0N" will be assigned to the measured / selected point:
3. When a minimum of four orientation points are established, click Next to compute the image orientation
and display the results. More...
419
Orientation Results
The Orient Results dialog displays the results of the image orientation.
1. Observe the results for each orientation point displayed as dX and dY in image pixels.
2. The maximal deviation (MAX) and root-mean-square (RMS) for the orientation points are displayed.
3. If required, click Remove to remove the selected point to adjust the orientation calculation. If four
points still remain, the new results are displayed. If there are less than four orientation points, then the
Orientation Results dialog will close automatically to continue the orientation procedure.
4. Click Next to select an area for scanning. More...
Scan Area
Select one or more areas for scanning:
1. Use one of the following two ways:
l Draw a rectangle by pressing the stylus in the dialog for the start point and dragging to the end
point. When the stylus is lifted, the area is set.
l Draw a polygon by pressing the stylus down at each vertex. Lines will be drawn connecting
each vertex to the previous one. Press the stylus near the first vertex to close the area.
2. Click Clear to erase all drawn areas.
3. When the areas are set, click Next. The Interval dialog opens so you can set the scanning parameters.
More...
4. Click
to open the Mode dialog.
Interval
To set intervals for scanning:
1. In Start Point, enter the starting name for scanned points.
2. In the Scan Mode you can control how the instrument turns to the scan points:
l Fine mode requires the instrument to turn to each point and measure it.
l Coarse mode allows the instrument to continuously turn and measure at the same time.
For IS/QS/GPT-9 Series only you can select Fine or Coarse mode.
420
For DS-i robotic device the Fine mode is always selected.
3. For scanning procedure the "Reflectorless" is always selected in the Meas Mode.
4. Select the type of Interval for scanning. You can specify scanning interval using:
l Angle - enter angles interval in the HA and VA fields.
l Distance - enter the distance between neighbor points on the horizontal (H Dist) and vertical (V
Dist) axes.
l Num Points - enter the number of scanning points on the horizontal axe (field Num H) and vertical
axe (field Num V).
5. Click Next to save the settings and open the Estimate Time dialog. More...
Estimate Time
The Estimate Time dialog displays the scanning information including the total number of points to be scanned
and an estimate of the time it will take to complete the scan. If the estimated time is too long, click Back and enter
larger intervals.
Click
to begin scanning.
Scanning in Progress
As the total station measures points within the predefined area, each point will be displayed on the image.
l
l
If required, click Stop to immediately stop the scan.
Click Pause to interrupt the scan if needed.
View Scan
The dialog displays the image along with orientation and scanned points for completed scan sessions.
421
Area
In this dialog you can define a scan area. You can specify three corners of a rectangular area and the fourth
corner will be computed or four points to make an arbitrary four-sided area. The corners are labeled: Upper
Left, Lower Left, Upper Right and Lower Right.
You can select one way to specify a corner:
l
Click Meas to open the Sideshot-Direct dialog and measure and save the corner coordinates to the current job.
l
Click
to open the Map and select the corresponding point on the map.
l
Click
to open the Points dialog and select the corresponding.
Offsets in MAGNET Field
When surveying with GPS receivers and Total Stations (TS), you may determine points using different types
of offsets.
If performing a survey with a GPS receiver, select the GPS device type in the Connections dialog.
If performing a survey with a TS instrument, select the Optical device type in the Connections dialog.
Offsets for TS Survey
Offset points are available for surveying only for the Sideshot-Direct measurement method. Select this
method for the Topo survey in the Mode dialog ( by clicking
in the Sideshot-Direct dialog). To
select the corresponding offset type, click
in the top left corner and highlight Measure in the pop-up
menu. You see the following offset types (follow the link to find out more).
Horizontal Angle Offset
422
Horizontal/Vertical Angle Offset
Distance Offset
Hidden Point
Two Lines Intersection
Lines and Corner
Line and Offset
Plane and Corner
Horizontal Angle Offset
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of horizontal (2D) coordinates of an inaccessible center
of pipe / tree / pillar using distance and angle measurements.
To do this determination:
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
2. Click
3. The Horizontal Angle Offset is displayed.
4. Take two measurements in any order:
1)
Click the Side button, and measure the distance and horizontal angle to the side
of the pipe / tree / pillar. The prism is located on the side of the pipe / tree / pillar.
2)
Click the Center button, and measure the horizontal angle to the center of the
pipe / tree / pillar.
The Horizontal Angle Offset is displayed on the picture:
423
.
Note: The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Station- Prism at the Prism point.
The Points dialog will display the coordinates of this offset (center) point. The vertical measurements to this
offset point are not considered, and Hoffset = Hside
Horizontal/Vertical Angle Offset
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an
inaccessible point distance and angle measurements.
To do this determination:
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
2. Click
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
.
3. The Horz/Vert Angle Offset is displayed.
4. Take two measurements in the following order:
1)
Click the Prism button, and measure the distance and horizontal and vertical
angles to the prism. The prism is located near the inaccessible point.
424
2)
Click the HA/VA button, and measure the horizontal and vertical angle to
the inaccessible point.
The Horizontal/Vertical Angle Offset is displayed on the picture:
Note: In the horizontal plane, the coordinates of the offset point are calculated using:
l
l
the measured values of the horizontal angles to the Prism point and the offset point,
assumption that the horizontal distance from the Total Station to the Prism point is equal to the horizontal
distance from the Total Station to the offset point.
In the vertical plane, the height of the offset point is calculated using the measured values of the vertical angles to
the offset point and to the Prism point.
The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset point.
Distance Offset
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point using distance and angle measurements, and additional distance offsets measurements, for example
performed with the tape.
To do this determination:
425
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
2. Click
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
.
3. The Distance Offset dialog is displayed.
to take measurements to the Prism.
4. Click
5. Then measure offsets from the Prism to the determined point and enter their values in the corresponding fields of the Enter Distance Offsets screen. You can define the direction of the given offset
in two ways: either click on the button of the current selection or use the minus sign "-" for the current
value. For instance,
and
directions
are the same.
The Distance Offset is displayed on the picture:
Note 1: The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Station- Prism.
Note 2: Hoffset_point = Hprism_point + (Up/Down_offset).
The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.
426
Hidden Point
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point using distance and angle measurements to two prisms located on the rod.
To do this determination:
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
The Hidden Point dialog is displayed.
Enter the distance from the rod’s bottom to Prism 2 in the HR field.
Take two measurements in any order:
1)
Click the Prism1 icon and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the first prism of the rod.
2)
Click the Prism2 icon and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the second prism of the rod.
The Hidden Point Offset is displayed on the picture: The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset (hidden) point.
427
.
Two Lines Intersection
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an
inaccessible point, as intersection of two auxiliary lines. You create these lines (by two points) and perform
distance and angle measurements of the line’s points.
Before performing any measurements, complete the following preparation tasks:
1. Select any two points (Pt1-1 and Pt2-1), from which the desired inaccessible offset point is seen:
When selecting the location of these points, bear in mind that the internal angle formed by the two lines
should not be less than 30 degrees and more than 150 degrees.
2. Set two more points (Pt1-2 and Pt2-2) along the lines "Pt1-1 - offset point" and "Pt2-1 - offset point",
respectively:
To do this offset determination:
428
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
2. Click
3. The Two Line Intersection dialog is displayed.
4. Take four measurements in any order:
1)
Click the Line1Pt1 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal
angle to the first point of the first line.
2)
Click the Line1Pt2 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal
angle to the second point of the first line.
3)
Click the Line2Pt1 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal
angle to the first point of the second line.
4)
Click the Line2Pt2 icon and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle
to the second point of the second line.
The Two Lines Intersection Offset is displayed on the picture: 429
.
Note 1: The height of the prism for all measured points is unavailable in the Two Line Intersection dialog
and should be set in the Backsight screen.
Note 2: The height of the offset point is calculated as the mean of the heights of both lines for this point:
The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset (intersection) point.
Line and Corner
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an
inaccessible point, as intersection an auxiliary line and a plane. You create a line (by two points) and a vertical plane passing through the offset point. Then you perform distance and angle measurements of the line’s
points and angle measurements of the offset point.
Before any measurements, complete the following preparation tasks:
1. Select any two points (Pt1-1 and Pt2-1), from which the desired inaccessible offset point is seen:
430
When selecting the location of these points, bear in mind that the internal angle formed by the two lines
should not be less than 30 degrees and more than 150 degrees.
2. Set point Pt2-2 along the line "Pt2-1 - the offset point" and set up the TS at point Pt1-1:
To do this offset determination:
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
2. Click
3. The Line and Corner dialog is displayed.
4. Take three measurements in any order:
1)
Click the Line1Pt1 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal
angle to the first point of the line.
2)
Click the Line1Pt2 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal
angle to the second point of the line.
3)
Click the Corner button and measure the vertical and horizontal angle to the offset point.
The Line and Corner Offset is displayed on the picture: 431
.
Note 1: The height of the prism for all measured points is unavailable in the Two Line Intersection dialog
and should be set in the Backsight screen.
Note 2. The height of the offset point is the height of the line for this offset point (calculated by extrapolation
along the “Pt2-1 - Pt2-2” line).
The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset point.
Line and Offset
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an
inaccessible point, using an auxiliary line and additional distance offsets measurements, for example made by
the tape. You create a line (by two points), then perform distance and angle measurements of the line’s points
and distance measurements (from this line) to the offset point.
Before any measurements, you have to select any two points (Pt1 and Pt2) near the inaccessible point. The
line which is created by these points will be an auxiliary line.
432
To do this offset determination:
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
2. Click
3. The Line and Offset dialog is displayed.
4. Take two measurements in any order:
1)
Click the LinePt1 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle
to the first point of the line.
2)
Click the LinePt2 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle
to the second point of the line.
.
5. Measure the offsets from the second point (Pt2) to the determined point and enter their values in the following fields of the Enter Distance Offsets screen. You may define the direction of the given offset in two
ways: either click on the button of the current selection or use the minus sign "-" for the current value. For
instance,
433
and
directions are the same.
The directions of the offsets are explained in the figure:
Note 1: The height of the prism for all measured points is unavailable in the Line and Offset dialog and
should be set in the Backsight screen.
Note 2: Offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line "Pt1 - Pt2".
Note 3: 3D coordinates of the offset point are calculated relative to line “Pt1 - Pt2” (calculated by extrapolation along the "Pt1 - Pt2" line).
The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.
Plane and Corner
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an
inaccessible point, as intersection of a line of site and a plane defined by three points. You create three auxiliary points, then perform distance and angle measurements to these points and angle measurements to the offset point.
Note that the user creates three auxiliary points in the same plane where the inaccessible point is located. All
four points must not be on the same line:
434
To do this determination:
1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Sideshot-Direct dialog.
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
2. Click
3. The Plane and Corner dialog is displayed.
4. Take four measurements in any order:
1)
Click the Prism1 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle
to the first prism of the plane.
2)
Click the Prism2 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle
to the second prism of the plane.
3)
Click the Prism3 button and measure the distance, vertical and horizontal angle
to the third prism of the plane.
4)
Click the Corner button and measure the vertical and horizontal angle to the offset point.
The Plane and Corner Offset is displayed on the picture: 435
.
Note: The height of the prism for all measured points is unavailable in the Plane and Corner dialog and
should be set in the Backsight screen.
The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.
Offsets for GPS Survey
The Offsets tab is always presented when you open the Topo screen for the GPS survey. The Offsets tab contains up to three offset types. The Offset Laser is available only if a laser distance meter device is used.
Follow the link to find out more:
Offset Line
Azimuth and Offsets
2 Distance Offset
Offset Laser
436
Offset Line
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point, using two measured points and additional distance offsets measurements, for example, performed
with the tape.
To do this determination:
1. Enter the name of the determined point and the rover antenna height in the Point field of the Topo dialog.
Note: Be sure that the current type of position calculation method corresponds to the precision of the
determined point.
2. Click
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
.
3. The Line dialog is displayed.
4. Select the Start and End points from the map (click
(click
) or from the list (click
), or measure them
) in the dialog.
5. Measure offsets from the End point to the determined point and enter the values. Use one of two ways to
define the direction of the given offset: either click on the button of the current selection or use the minus
sign "-" for the current value:
6. The directions of the offsets are explained in the figure:
437
7. Click
to save the calculated coordinates of the offset point. The Points screen will display the
coordinates of the offset point.
The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line "Start Point - End Point".
Hoffset_point = Hpoint2 + (Up/Down_offset)
Azimuth and Offsets
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an
inaccessible point, using one measured point and distance and angle measurements from this point to the offset point.
To determine a point with the Azimuth & Offsets task:
1. Type the name of determined point and the rover antenna height in the Point field of the Topo dialog.
Note: Be sure that the current type of position calculation method corresponds to the precision of the
determined point.
2. Click
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
.
438
3. The Azimuth - Distance - Height dialog is displayed.
4. Select Start Point from the map (click
) or from the list (click
), or measure it (click
) in
the screen.
5. Define the direction to the offset point in the Azimuth - Distance - Height screen. Use one of two methods
to define the offset point in horizontal plane (the hand symbol points out that there is a choice):
The horizontal angle is determined by the azimuth to the offset point.
1)
The horizontal angle is determined by the azimuth to a point (selected from
the list/map). The offset point lies on the line "Start Point"- "Selected
Point".
2)
439
6. Measure the vertical offset from the Start Point and enter the value in the corresponding field of the Azimuth - Distance - Height screen. Use one of three methods to define the offset point in a vertical plane
(the hand symbol points out that there is a choice):
The zenith angle is measured (from an index with 0 derected
towards the zenith).
1)
The vertical angle is measured (relative to 0 that coincides with
horizontal).
2)
The vertical distance between the offset point and the horizontal
passed through the start point.
3)
440
7. Measure the horizontal distance offset from the Start Point and enter the value in the corresponding field of
the Azimuth - Distance - Height dialog.
8. Click
to calculate and save the coordinates of the offset point. The Points screen will display the
coordinates of the offset point.
2 Distance Offset
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal coordinates of an point, using distances
to the point from two known points. The elevation value of the first known point is assigned to the offset point.
1. Enter the name of the determined point and the rover antenna height in the Point field of the Topo dialog.
Note: Be sure that the current type of position calculation method corresponds to the precision of the
determined point.
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
2. Click
3. The dialog 2 Distance Offset is displayed.
4. Select the Point 1 and Point 2 from the map (click
(click
) or from the list (click
.
), or measure them
) in the dialog.
5. From each point, enter the distance value in the Distance field or measure the value (click
441
).
6. Enter the name of the Offset Point and select the side where the offset point is located in the list "Left
of line 1-2"/ "Right of line 1-2".
7. Click
to save the calculated coordinates of the offset point. The Points screen will display the
coordinates of the offset point.
Offset Laser
What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an
inaccessible point, using distance and angle measurements to the point from a laser rangefinder. MAGNET
Field enables you to use an external laser rangefinder. Before any measurement, set the type of the used
rangefinder in job configuration.
To work with an external laser rangefinder:
1. Click the Configure icon
2. Click the Survey icon
.
.
in the Rover Receiver screen.
3. Click
4. Check the External laser option, select which device to connect the laser rangefinder to: Controller or
Receiver.
442
5. Click Parameters in the Peripherals dialog to set communication parameters between the controller and
external laser rangefinder.
6. Before starting measurements with the laser rangefinder, make sure that the current coordinate system in the
given MAGNET Field job is datum, grid, or localization.
7. Make sure that the job contains the coordinates of the point where the laser rangefinder will be located.
This point is called "Occ point" for this offset type.
8. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Topo dialog.
in the top left corner, highlight Measure in the pop-up menu and select
9. Click
10. The Laser Measure dialog is displayed.
11. Select the name of the external laser rangefinder from the list in the Bluetooth Devices screen. Click
.
in the dialog.
12. Select the Occupation Point from the map (click
) or from the list (click
) in the Config Laser
screen.
13. Either enter the azimuth to the offset point (if
14. Or select a point from the list/map (if
is selected).
is selected). In this case the horizontal angle will be
determined by the azimuth to the selected point. The offset point will be on the line "Occupation Point""Selected Point".
443
15. Enter the laser rangefinder height in the corresponding field.
16. Sight the laser to the desired point and press the Fire button on the laser rangefinder to measure the
slope distance and vertical angle to the point. After measurements are successfully performed,
MAGNET Field displays the Store Point screen with the calculated coordinates of the offset point.
17. Click
to save the offset point in the MAGNET Field job. The Points screen will display the
coordinates of the offset point.
444
Two Peg Test for Level
The Two peg test dialog guides you through a series of measurements to help determine any error in the line of
sight through the level.
1. Center a Digital Level (DL) between the two points to measure and take a measurement (by clicking the
Measuring button) to point 1 and point 2.
2. Move the DL for the point 2 (approximately 3 meters from the point) and take the shots to the point 1 (by
clicking the Measuring button). After that MAGNET Field automatically calculates and displays the true
value for the point 2.
3. To compare the true and the measured value, reverse the staff located at point 2. Collimate the staff on the
point and read the value manually. If necessary, remove the eyepiece cover to expose the cross-hair adjusting screw and shift the horizontal cross-hair line up or down (as required) until the line is coincided with
the reticle reading value. After adjustment the DL, perform the step 1 and step 2.
4. To get the relative error of the DL, again reverse the staff located at point 2 and take a measurement to the
point.
5. The results of the Two Peg testing is displayed on the separate screen.
Two Peg Test Results
The results of the Two Peg testing appear on this dialog after all measurements are taken. The dialog displays all
the shots taken and the computed error.
445
Level Run
Enter information needed to create a Level Run.
1. Enter a Name for the Level Run.
2. In the Note field, enter a description for the Level Run.
3. Click Next to start leveling.
Level Run
This dialog displays information regarding the Digital Level Run in progress.
DL tab
This tab allows you to perform measurements and record them into a fieldbook table.
l
The items to be displayed and the order of items to be displayed can be selected by clicking Display
Settings on the pop-up menu
.
l
The field with the icon
shows the name of the current point. You can select the point from the
l
map, list or enter the name.
Click BS to take the Backsight measurement to the current point. If you select a new point, the Add
Point dialog is opened. Enter the coordinates of the point in the dialog and click
measurement to the point. In this tab, BS measurement has
to take the
symbol.
l
Click on SS to take a Sideshot measurement. In this tab, SS measurement has
symbol.
l
Click on FS to take a Foresight measurement . In this tab, FS measurement has
l
The SumBS-SumFS shows the difference between the sums of BS and FS distances.
symbol.
446
Data
This tab lists all information related to the current measurement for the level run.
Shots
Guides you through the sets needed to be taken for the measurement.
Click Meas to take a shot.
Pop-up Menu
The Level Run pop-up menu contains the following options:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Stake Point
Stake Point List
Stake Elevation
Vertical Offset
Display Settings
Inverse
Display Setting
Select the columns to be displayed for a level run from this dialog. The order of the columns to be displayed can
be changed by selecting the display column and clicking the up and down arrow.
Vertical Offset
Enter the Vertical Offset for the measurement.
447
Manual Level Entry
This dialog allows you to enter level observation data manually. They can be:
l
l
l
l
The height of the Top Wire (if using a 3 Wire instrument).
The height of the Middle Wire.
The height of the Bottom Wire (if using a 3 Wire instrument).
The horizontal Distance measurement between the level and the rod.
448
Stake folder
You can perform layout any object using GPS or Optical equipment.
Click an icon to perform the task:
Points
Stakes design points
Lines
Determines points along desired lines formed by design points.
Offsets
With offsets, you can stake a Line, Intersection, 3 Pt Curve, Curve, and Spiral.
Surface
There are three types of Stake Surface: Elevation, Road, and Surface.
Grid
Creates design points in grid nodes inside the selected area / surface.
Point in Direction
Stakes a point using a known point, the azimuth, and the offsets from the azimuth line.
Point List
Stakes points in a point list.
Curve
Stakes points along a horizontal curve.
Real-Time Road
Stakes points on a road in real time.
Road
Stakes points on a road.
449
Slope
Stakes points near a slope on the desired alignment.
Linework
Stakes points on a linework selected either by Code String, from a linework list, or from
the map.
Stake Points
To stake a point:
1. Enter the name of the Design Point to be staked. Enter the point manually or select it from the map or
from the list of the job points.
2. The Code field displays the code for the design point.
3. For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above
the mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the
Antenna Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
4. For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
5. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
6. Click Stake to open the Stake dialog, assisting the stakeout process. More...
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Stake Lines
To stake a line:
1. Define the line:
l Select the Start Point of the line from the map or the list of the job points.
l Select either the End Point of the line in the same way as the start point or select Azimuth and
enter the azimuth value to define the direction of the line.
2. From the Height Computation drop-down list select the type of height computations for the staked
point:
l Ht of Start Pt (the height of the start point): the staked point will have the same height as the start
point of the line.
450
Interpolate Ht: the height of the staked point will be computed through linear interpolation, using the
height of the start and end points of the line.
Note: this option is unavailable when only the direction of the line is set through an azimuth.
For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna
Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
Click Stake to open the Stake dialog, assisting the stakeout process. More...
l
3.
4.
5.
6.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Stake Offsets
Click an icon to perform the task:
Line
Stakes a line with offsets in the Horizontal and Vertical directions.
Intersection
Stakes the intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified offsets.
3Pt Curve
Creates a curve to stakeout by selecting three points.
Curve
Stakes a curve (section of an arc) at a specified horizontal and vertical offset from the curve.
Spiral
Stakes points at specified Horizontal and Vertical offsets with respect to a specified spiral.
451
Stake Line Offsets
To stake offsets from a line:
1. Define the line:
l Select the Start Point of the line from the map or the list of the job points.
l Select either the End Point of the line in the same way as the start point or select Azimuth and
enter the azimuth value to define the direction of the line. When the End Point is selected, the
Length of the line is displayed.
2. From the Height Computation drop-down list select the type of height computations for the staked
point:
l Ht of Start Pt (the height of the start point): the staked point will have the same height as the start
point of the line.
l Interpolate Ht: the height of the staked point will be computed through linear interpolation, using
the height of the start and end points of the line.
Note: this option is unavailable when only the direction of the line is set through an azimuth.
3. Select the Include Transition Point checkbox if the transition point should be included.
4. In Start, enter the line station (chainage) to begin staking offsets.
5. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
6. Click Next to proceed on the Station & Offsets dialog.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Station & Offset
The Station & Offset dialog allows you to define parameters for staking offset locations.
1. The Station/Real-Time button allows you to toggle between staking known and unknown staking locations.
For Station:
l Enter the starting station location. The two arrows allow you to decrease or increase the station
by the specified interval.
l Enter the Interval for stations.
l The Num Segments field shows the number of segments of the line determined with the given
interval. For instance, a value of 3 indicates the line is divided into three equal segments to stake
four points.
452
2. As required, enter the Right Offset/Left Offset to be applied in plane.
3. As required, enter the Up/Down offset to be applied in height.
4. For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna
Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
5. For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
6. Click Back to return to the previous initial dialog if required.
7. Click Stake to start the stakeout process for the designated offset locations.More...
Stake Intersection Offset
The Intersection dialog enables you to stake the intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified offsets.
To define Line 1 and the offset for the first parallel line:
1. In From Point, enter the point starting Line 1.
2. Select between Azimuth/Az to Pt to set the direction of the line through either the azimuth of the line or
the azimuth from the start point to the point selected.
3. Enter either the Right Offset or the Left Offset as required.
4. Click Next to define Line 2 and the offset for the second parallel line.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Intersection Offset / Line 2
To define Line 2 and the offset for the second parallel line:
1. In From Point, enter the point starting Line 2.
2. Select between Azimuth/Az to Pt to set the direction of the line through either the azimuth of the line or
the azimuth from the start point to the point selected.
3. Enter either the Right Offset or the Left Offset as required.
4. In the Intersect Ht field, you can the height value for the intersection as required. By default, there is
shown the height of the From Point for Line 1.
5. In the Store Point field, enter the name of the intersection point to be stored.
453
6. For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above
the mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the
Antenna Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
7. For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
8. Click Stake to start the stakeout process. More...
Stake 3-Pt Curve Offsets
To stake offsets from a curve defined by three points:
1. Define the curve. You can manually enter, or select from the list or map the following points:
l In PC Point, enter the Point of Curve, the starting point of the arc.
l In PT Point, enter the Point of Tangent to the curve.
l Select either the Curve Point or the RP Point (the Radius Point). The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the selection. In the second case the distance between RP Point and PC
point should be equal to the distance between RP Point and PT point. The radius, and the PC
and PT points define two curves - one with delta less than or equal to 180 degrees (Small curve)
and the other with delta greater than or equal to 180 degrees (Large curve). Select either Small
or Large from the Curve drop-down box to indicate which of these two curves should be used
for computations.
2. Select the Include Transition Point checkbox if the transition point should be included.
3. In Start, enter the curve station (chainage) to begin staking offsets.
4. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
5. Click Next to proceed on the Station & Offsets dialog.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Stake Curve Offsets
To stake a curve (section of an arc) at specified horizontal and vertical offsets from the curve:
1. Define the curve. You can manually enter, or select from the list or map the following points:
l In PC Point, enter the Point of Curve, the starting point of the arc.
l In PT Point, enter the Point of Tangent to the curve, the ending point of the arc.
454
Select between Radius/Chord Angle/Curve Angle to enter the radius parameter of the curve as
required. The Length of the curve will be shown on the dialog.
In Start, enter the curve station (chainage) to begin staking offsets.
From the Height Computation drop-down list select the type of height computations for the staked point:
l Ht of Start Pt (the height of the start point): the staked point will have the same height as the PC
Point of the curve.
l Interpolate Ht: the height of the staked point will be computed through linear interpolation, using the
height of the PC and PT Points of the curve.
In Turn, select the direction of turn, relative to the PC Point.
Select the Include Transition Point checkbox if the transition point should be included.
Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
Click Next to proceed on the Station & Offsets dialog.
l
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Stake Spiral Offsets
To stakeout points at specified horizontal and vertical offsets from a spiral:
1. Define the spiral. You can manually enter, or select from the list or map the following points:
l In TS Point, enter a Tangent to the Spiral point (the starting point of the spiral).
l In Tangent Azimuth, enter the azimuth of the tangent to the spiral at the TS point.
l Select between Radius/Chord Angle/Curve Angle to enter the radius parameter of the spiral as
required.
l Select between Length/Spiral Constant to enter the length of the spiral at the ending point, or the
constant of the spiral.
2. In Turn, select the direction of spiral turn.
3. Define the direction of spiral moving:
l Select TS To SC, Tangent Spiral to Spiral Circle, this is the incoming spiral to the internal circle.
l Select SC To TS, Spiral Circle to Tangent Spiral, this is the outgoing spiral from the circle to the
Tangent.
4. In Start, enter the station (chainage) to begin staking offsets.
5. Select the Include Transition Point checkbox if the transition point should be included.
6. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
7. Click Next to proceed on the Station & Offsets dialog.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
455
Stake Surface
Stake Surface enables you to stake a surface as a known fixed elevation.
Select one of three types of Stake Surface as required: Elevation, Road, or Surface.
Stake Surface Elevation
To stake a surface of a fixed elevation:
1. Select Elevation by clicking the selection button.
2. Enter the elevation value in the editable field. To set the elevation of a desired point as a fixed elevation, click the list selection
or map selection
button and select the point from the list or
the map.
3. Enter the GPS antenna height in the Ant Ht editable field (in the GPS+ case) / the reflector (target)
height in the HR field (in Optical mode)
4. Click Stake to start stakeout.
5. If required, check the Create Surface box. A Cut/Fill or Elevation models can be generated from 3 or
more staked points:
l If the Elevation model is selected for the new surface, the "Min Elevation"/ "Max Elevation" values are calculated from real staked measurements.
l If the Cut/Fill model is selected for the new surface, the "Min Elevation"/ "Max Elevation" values are calculated as the difference between the design surface and the surface.
Click Next to specify a name for a new surface. Enter the name and click
on the Input new Sur-
face name dialog to start the stakeout.
6. If required, check the Use Alignment box. The Use Alignment option enables you to use an existing
alignment to display stations and offsets. Click Next to select the name of the alignment. Click
on the Roads dialog to start the stakeout.
7. If required, check the Define Boundary box. The Define Boundary option enables you to specify a
boundary (polygon) from known points. Click Next to do this in the Surface Boundary dialog.
456
Surface Boundary / Grid Boundary
To define a surface boundary:
1. In the Points/Point List/Linework/Area field, select the current method of selection of data required to create the boundary.
l For Points, in the Select Pts drop-down list, choose an option to select multiple points in the job for
creating the boundary:
l All - all the job points.
l By Range - points from a range. More...
l By Code - points of a selected code. More...
l By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
l By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain distance. More...
l By Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
l From Map - points selected graphically from the map More...
l From List - points from a list of points. More...
l For Point List, press the List selection button and select an existing point list in the job. More... The
list name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and
added to the point selection by pressing the ok button.
l For Linework and Area, press either the Map selection button and select an existing linework/area
from the map (more...) or press the List selection button and select an existing linework/area from
the list (more...). The name will appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into
the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the ok button.
2. The list will display the points currently selected, and the plot will display the created surface boundary.
3. For the Stake Grid dialog, click Stake to start stakeout.
Stake Surface Road
To stake a surface of an existing Road:
1. Select Road by clicking the selection button.
and select the name of the road from the list.
2. Click the list selection button
3. Enter the GPS antenna height in the Ant Ht editable field (in the GPS+ case) / the reflector (target) height
in the HR field (in Optical mode).
457
4. Click Stake to start the stakeout.
5. If required, check the Create Surface box. A Cut/Fill or Elevation models can be generated from 3 or
more staked points:
l If the Elevation model is selected for the new surface, the "Min Elevation"/ "Max Elevation" values are calculated from real staked measurements.
l If the Cut/Fill model is selected for the new surface, the "Min Elevation"/ "Max Elevation" values are calculated as the difference between the design surface and the surface.
Click Next to specify a name for a new surface. Enter the name and click
on the Input new Sur-
face name dialog to start the stakeout.
Stake Surface
To stake a surface of an existing Surface:
1. Select Surface by clicking the selection button.
and select the file. More...
2. Click the list selection button
3. Enter the GPS antenna height in the Ant Ht editable field (in the GPS+ case) / the reflector (target)
height in the HR field (in Optical mode).
4. Click Stake to start stakeout.
5. If required, check the Create Surface box. A Cut/Fill or Elevation models can be generated from 3 or
more staked points:
l If the Elevation model is selected for the new surface, the "Min Elevation"/ "Max Elevation" values are calculated from real staked measurements.
l If the Cut/Fill model is selected for the new surface, the "Min Elevation"/ "Max Elevation" values are calculated as the difference between the design surface and the surface.
Click Next to specify a name for a new surface. Enter the name and click
on the Input new Sur-
face name dialog to start the stakeout.
6. If required, check the Use Alignment box. The Use Alignment option enables you to use an existing
alignment to report stations and offsets. Click Next to select the name of the alignment. Click
on the Roads dialog to start the stakeout.
458
Stake Grid
To stake a surface or area with the constant interval between staked points, you can specify an interval to create a
grid in the horizontal plane. The software:
l
l
Creates a set of the designed point from the grid nodes,
Sets a next design point for staking, when the previous design point is measured.
To create a grid to be displayed with the Map:
l
Specify the Origin Point for the grid. Select these points from the map
points
l
l
l
l
or select from the list of
.
Select either Azimuth(Bearing) or Azimuth(Bearing) to Point by clicking on the button to indicate the
direction of the grid lines and enter the corresponding value.
In the Spacing field, specify the intervals along y (north) and x (east) axes for the grid lines.
Enter the GPS antenna height in the Ant Ht editable field (in the GPS+ case) / the reflector (target) height
in the HR field (in Optical mode).
Click the Design surface check box to use the selected surface / road / fixed elevation in calculation the
design point elevation.
l
Click
in the Stake report field to open a list of existing stake reports in the job and information
l
about each report.
Click Next to continue.
Design Surface
In the dialog you can specify the design point elevation using either a existing surface, or existing road or enter a
fixed elevation. The Cut / Fill values for the staked points will be calculated relatively to the specified elevation
for corresponding design points.
If required, check the Use Alignment check box. The Use Alignment option enables you to use an existing align-
ment to display offsets form the staked points. Click Next to select the name of the alignment. Click
the Roads dialog to specify a boundary (polygon) from known points. More...
459
on
Stake Point in Direction
The Stake Point in Direction dialog enables you to perform the stakeout of a point, using the known point,
the azimuth, and the offsets from the azimuth line.
1. In the From Point field, enter the known point manually or select it from the map or from the list of
the job points.
2. Select between Azimuth and Az to Pt to enter the azimuth at the known point either by value or as a
direction to another known point. To automatically add/subtract 90 or 180 degrees, click
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
and
select the desired action.
Enter the offsets from the known point:
l Set the Angle Offset from the azimuth line.
l In Hz Dist, set the horizontal distance offset along the angle offset line.
l In Vert Dist, set the height offset.
The Store Pt field will display the default name of the staked point. You can change this name.
For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above
the mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the
Antenna Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
Click Stake to start the stakeout process for the designated offset locations. More...
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Stake Point List
To stake points of an existing point list:
1. Select the Name of existing Point List. You can also enter it manually.
2. The dialog will display a list and the plot of existing points in the selected Point List. You can hide the
plot by clicking. The point highlighted in the list will be marked with a yellow circle on the plot.
3. The Up and Down arrows to the left of List of points enables you to move the highlighted point up or
down in the order of the points.
460
4. The arrows symbol switches on/off the keyboard arrow keys to move points inside the list.
5. Select Reverse Order to perform a stakeout starting in reverse order from the end of the Point List.
6. For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna
Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
7. For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
8. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
9. Click Stake to start the stakeout process for the points. More...
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Stake Curve
To stake a curve (section of an arc):
1. Define the curve. You can manually enter, or select from the list or map the following points:
l In PC Point, enter the Point of Curve, the starting point of the arc.
l In PT Point, enter the Point of Tangent to the curve, the ending point of the arc.
l Select between Radius/Chord Angle/Curve Angle to enter the radius parameter of the curve as
required. The plot will show the curve.
2. In Turn, select the direction of turn (Right or Left), relative to the PC Point.
3. Select either Small or Large from the Curve drop-down box to indicate if the smaller or larger part of the
arc between the points is used.
4. For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna
Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
5. For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
6. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
7. Click Stake to start the stakeout process. `More...
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
461
Stake Real-Time Road
To stake a road in real time:
1. Select the Road, only Horizontal or Horizontal and VerticalAlignment to be staked. The names can
be entered manually or chosen from the list. The dialog will display the plan of the selection.
2. The Start point of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of the road is displayed.
3. For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above
the mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the
Antenna Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
4. For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
5. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
6. Click Next to proceed on the Stk Road dialog.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Stake Road (Slope)
This dialog shows cut/fill for template slopes, and enables you to edit the cut/fill slope values.
1. Select either the Template Slopes radio button to apply the template cut/fill slope values or the Enter
Slopes radio button and enter the cut/fill slope values as required.
2. Click Stake to start the stakeout process. More...
Stake Road
To stake points along the road:
1. Select the Road, only Horizontal or Horizontal and VerticalAlignment to be staked. The names can
be entered manually or chosen from the list. The dialog will display the plan of the selection.
2. The Start station of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of the road is displayed.
3. Press the Transition Points button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition
points you wish to include in the stakeout. More...
462
4. For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna
Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
5. For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
6. Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
7. Click Next to proceed on the Stake Alignment dialog.
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
Transition Points
You can select the following Transition Point Types to stake:
l
l
l
l
l
Horz end point: The node point between horizontal segments. Selected by default.
Horz midpoint on curve: The middle point of a horizontal curve.
Vert end point: The node point between vertical segments.
Vert high point: The highest vertical point.
Vert low point: The lowest vertical point.
To select the point types, use one of the following ways:
1. Click the check boxes near the required types to place the check marks.
2. Use the context menu that depends on the place where it pops up:
l Select All: highlights all the types in the list.
l Select All Below: highlights all the types below the highlighted line.
l Select Several: highlights the required types.
l Cancel Selection: removes highlights in the list.
l Check: places check marks in the highlighted lines.
l Uncheck: clears check marks in the highlighted lines.
Click
463
to confirm the selection and return to the Stake Road dialog.
Stake Alignment /Slope
This dialog enables you to stake a road without having predefined templates. You can just enter a temporary
cross-section.
1. In the CL Offsets fields enter the horizontal and vertical offsets to the right (R) and to the left (L) from
the centerline. The vertical offsets can be entered as Up, Down, or Grade.
2. If you select the Stake Curb/Ditch check box, you can enter the horizontal and vertical offsets for the
curb/ditch. The geometry of the curb/ditch can be Diagonal, Hz/Vert, or Vert/Hz.
3. The plan will show all the entries graphically.
4. Click Next to proceed on another Stake Alignment dialog for staking a road and click Stake for staking a slope.
Stake Alignment
The Stake Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross section on the stakeout station and helps you
stakeout all of the desired points.
1. Enter the Station where the stakeout is performed. To change the station number by the value of Station Interval, use the arrow buttons or the arrows symbol to switch on/off the keyboard arrow keys.
2. Enter the Station Interval of the station increment.
3. Shows the point code of the current segment. The buttons of this field move the current segment point
along the cross section. This will reflect on the plan. You can use the arrows symbol to switch on/off
the keyboard arrow keys for moving the point.
4. Select between Right Offset / Left Offset to enter the horizontal offset from the current segment point
as required.
5. Select between Up Offset / Down Offset to enter the vertical offset from the current segment point as
required.
6. From the drop-down list, select one of the following modes to specify offsets location:
l Centerline: both the horizontal and vertical offset starts at the centerline.
l Intersect Left: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the horizontal offset starts at the point
of intersection of the line parallel to the left segment with the cross-section.
l Intersect Right: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the horizontal offset starts at the
point of intersection of the line parallel to the right segment with the cross-section.
l Segment: the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the segment; the vertical offset starts at
the centerline.
464
Surface Left: the horizontal left offset starts at the beginning of the segment; the vertical offset starts
at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
l Surface Right: the horizontal right offset starts at the beginning of the segment; the vertical offset
starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
7. Click Stake to start the stakeout process. More...
l
Stake Slope
To stake a slope:
1. Select the Road, only Horizontal or Horizontal and Vertical Alignment to be staked. The names can be
entered manually or chosen from the list. The dialog will display the plan of the selection. Also, the dialog
allows you to select a linework to stake a slope. To do this, select Linework or Code:
l Code: allows linework selection by CodeString. Select the code from the drop-down list and a string
from the Strings list. The plot of the linework will be displayed.
l Linework: allows linework selection from the job lineworks (listed in the dialog) or a polyline selec-
ted from the Map (click
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
). If the line is a background line, copy the line to the job, update the
list of lineworks and select it in the list.
The Start station of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of the road is displayed.
Press the Transition Points button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition
points you wish to include in the stakeout. More...
For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna
Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
Click Next to proceed on the Stake Alignment dialog. If a linework is selected for staking, Next opens the
dialog for staking alignments without having predefined templates. More...
For the icons available on the dialog see Icons Description.
465
Stake Alignment
The Stake Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross section at the stakeout station and helps you
stakeout the catch point (the point where the slope crosses the surface of the terrain) and/or the offset of the
catch point.
1. Enter the Station where the stakeout is performed. To change the station number by the value of Station Interval, use the arrow buttons or the arrows symbol to switch on/off the keyboard arrow keys.
2. Enter the Station Interval of the station increment.
3. Shows the Hinge Point code. The hinge point is a point of rotation of the Cut/Fill Slopes. The arrow
buttons in this field move the hinge point along the cross section. This will reflect on the plan. You can
use the arrows symbol to switch on/off the keyboard arrow keys for moving the point.
4. Select between Right Offset / Left Offset to enter the horizontal offset from the current segment point
as required.
5. Select between Up Offset / Down Offset to enter the vertical offset from the current segment point as
required.
The icons
/
are used to toggle between the vertical offset and offset perpendicular to the
current segment when Intersect Left or Intersect Right mode is selected.
6. From the drop-down list, select the mode of template offsets:
l Auto: automatically set the last template point (without offsets).
l Intersect Left: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the horizontal offset starts at the point
of intersection of the line parallel to the left segment with the cross-section.
l Intersect Right: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the horizontal offset starts at the
point of intersection of the line parallel to the right segment with the cross-section.
l Segment: the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the segment; the vertical offset starts at
the centerline.
l Segment Slope: it is very similar to the normal Segment, but it uses the next point in the direction
of the slope to calculate the slope ratio. This mode also skips the Stk Slope dialog, since it has
no effect. Click Stake to start the stakeout process.
l Surface Left: the horizontal left offset starts at the beginning of the segment; the vertical offset
starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
l Surface Right: the horizontal right offset starts at the beginning of the segment; the vertical offset
starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
7. Click Next to proceed on the Stk Slope dialog.
466
Stake Linework
To stake a linework:
1. Select Linework / Code to toggle through two linework selections:
l Code: allows linework selection by CodeString. Select the code from the drop-down list and a string
from the Strings list. The plot of the linework will be displayed.
l Linework: allows linework selection from the job lineworks (listed in the dialog) or a polyline selec-
ted from the Map (click
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
). If the line is a background line, copy the line to the job, update the
list of lineworks and select it in the list.
The Start point of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of the road is displayed.
For GPS, the Antenna Height shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height, and the type of height in the Antenna
Setup dialog. To do this, click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
For TS, in HR, enter the reflector height.
Select the Include Transition Point checkbox if the transition point should be included.
Stake Report shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
Click Next to proceed on the Station & Offsets dialog.
Station & Offsets
The Station & Offset dialog allows you to define parameters for staking offset locations.
1. The Station/Real-Time button allows you to toggle between staking known and unknown staking locations.
For Station:
l Enter the starting station location. The two arrows allow you to decrease or increase the station by
the specified interval.
l Enter the Interval for stations.
l The Num Segments field shows the number of segments of the line determined with the given interval. For instance, a value of 3 indicates the line is divided into three equal segments to stake four
points.
2. As required, enter the Right Offset/Left Offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line at the station
shown on the Station field.
467
3. As required, enter the Up/Down offset with respect to the height of the line at the station.
4. The Angle option enables you to stake one of the three possible offset locations when they stakeout to
an angle point:
l Offset Bk: the stake location will be on the (back) segment before the angle point.
l Offset Ahd: the stake location will be on the (ahead) segment after the angle point.
l Bisector: when bisector is selected, the proposed stake location will be on the bisectrix of the
angle at the computed offset from the angle point.
5. The Curve option enables you to stake one of the four possible locations when they stakeout to a
curve point:
l Offset: the stake location will be on the curve at the offset distance from the curve point.
l RP: the radius point.
l PI: the point of intersection of tangents to the curve drawn at the start and end curve points.
l MOC: the point in the middle of the curve.
6. Click Back to return to the previous initial dialog if required.
7. Click Stake to perform the stakeout. More...
Stake dialog
The Stake dialog is designed to assist in the stakeout process. The stake dialog contains a number of flexible
features which allow you to tailor and customize your staking requirements.
The main dialog consists of:
l
l
l
l
Instrument panel along the top,
Stake panel along the bottom and
View. Depending on the current staking application there are a number of different view options which
provide different graphical aids for staking.
With the exception of the data view there are also four selectable Data fields to display specific
stakeout information.
Instrument Panel
The Instrument panel along the top of the dialog displays GPS/Optical instrument specific iconic information.
This information can be displayed or hidden by pressing the arrow button on the left of the dialog.
468
Stake Panel
The Stake Panel along the bottom of the dialog displays a number of buttons used to provide information and
facilitate staking.
l
l
l
l
l
Design Button: The design button on the left provides the information on the current design point. Pressing the button will display a pop-up list detailing the design point information.
Arrow Buttons: The arrow buttons are displayed if the staking application permits multiple point locations. Pressing the buttons will advance forward and backward through the different design locations.
Reading Button (for TS): The read button is used to make an observation.
Measuring Button (for GPS):The measure button is used to take a measurement.
Store Button: The storage button located to the far right is used to save the current staked observation.
Views
Each of the staking modules has a number of different views to provide different aspects to help the staking process. To access the different views either press and hold on the stake dialog until the view popup appears for a
new selection or click View Panel on the pop-up menu
.
The following views can be available:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Data View
Map View
Normal View
Overhead View
Cross Section View
Surface View
Data View
The Data view is accessible on all stakeout modules. The Data view provides a detailed list of all data fields available for the current staking module.
469
Map View
The Map view is also accessible on all stakeout modules. When staking in the map view the background
image of the stakeout is the job's map. A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls, such
as zoom.
Normal View
The Normal view is available whenever you are staking known design coordinates. This view provides a directional way of locating the design locations. If the distance to the design is more than 3 m, a blue arrow will
point to the target direction with the current location in the center of the dialog. If the distance to the target is
less than 3 m, the graphic shows the target point in the center and the current location. As soon as the target
becomes closer than the Horizontal Distance Tolerance value the graphic shows a bull's-eye target point on
the dialog.
Overhead View
The Overhead view is also available whenever you are staking known design coordinates. This view is similar to a map view and shows the current location and design location.
Cross Section View
The Cross Section view is available when staking roads. This view shows the current stake location in a vertical display as well as the road cross section. A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls, such as zoom.
Surface View
The Surface view is available when staking Surface. This view shows the surface and current stake location.
A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls, such as zoom.
470
Data Fields
All views except the Data view have four selectable data fields used to display specific staking information. To
change one of these data fields simply press on the field and select from a list of all the available fields for the current stake module. The Data view always contains all the available data fields.
Icons Description
Brings up the pop-up menu of additional options. More....
Opens the stake settings to view/edit. More....
Opens the list of points to choose the point.
Opens a map to choose the point.
Indicates the vertical type of the antenna height.
Indicates the slant type of the antenna height.
Sets the height of the reflector.
Opens the report list to view/change the report. More....
Confirms settings, closes the dialog, and returns to the previous dialog.
471
Apps folder
Click an icon to use an application built in your device:
Take Photo
Starts the Camera application to take pictures. Not available for onboard. This icon is
available, when an external or internal camera is connected.
Web Browser
Starts Internet Explorer to visit a web address you want. Not available for onboard.
Photo Viewer
Starts the Pictures & Videos application to view the pictures attached to the current
job. Not available for onboard.
Files
Opens File Explorer to manage the files.
News
Allows you to view news and other information from Magnet RSS. Not available for
onboard.
3DMC Inbox
Opens your inbox folder where files sent by other SiteLINK 3D clients are stored.
Scan QR Code
Opens the Image Capture dialog. In this dialog you can take a picture of a required
QR code and decodes information from it. This icon is available, when an external or
internal camera is connected.
Schedule
When the connection with Enterprise project is established, opens the table with list of
tasks for the given project.
Timecard
When the connection with Enterprise project is established, opens the table where you
can enter the work hours for any uncompleted task of the project.
472
Magnet News
To view any information from the Magnet RSS file:
l
l
l
l
Check the Internet connection.
From the bottom drop-down list, select the type of information you are interested in.
Use the arrow buttons to browse.
Click the Link button to open the Internet Explorer with the information as required.
Schedule
When the connection with Enterprise project is established, the table of the dialog displays the list of tasks for the
given project. The Start Day, End Day and CMP % (task completion rate in percentage) fields are available for
the each task. If the task is set “Completed” the task row in the table is grayed and it is not available to log work
for it. To edit the work hours and completion percentage for uncompleted project tasks, you can double click on it
to open Timecard dialog.
Using the buttons on the bottom part of the table you can set the desired period and the table will show the current
status of the tasks for the selected time interval:
l
l
l
Click the By day/week/month button and select the desired time interval from the list.
To select the desired day/week/month, use "<<" or ">>" .
Click the Current day/week/month button to set the current day/week/month in the table.
Timecard
When the connection with Enterprise project is established, you can log the time you spend on tasks of the current
project in the dialog.
l
l
473
To select the desired week, use "<<" or ">>" . Click the Current week button to set the current week in
the table.
For any task of the project you can enter working hours for the day or days. To save the entered values and
send it to the Enterprise service, click the Submit button.
Note 1: If you have entered the works hour in the task only, after clicking the Submit button, the Enterprise service calculates the completion percentage (CMP %) for the given task.
Note 2: Once you manually edited the CMP % column, after clicking the Submit button, the Enterprise service will set manually entered task completion percentage and stop automatic calculation of
task completion rate. The entered value will be used for the given task.
Note 3: The task has a completed status, when completion percentage reaches 100%.
Note 4: You can submit working hours for completed task also.
474
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising